NormalizeHEADmain

1 files changed, 0 insertions, 8478 deletions

diff --git a/old/55444-0.txt b/old/55444-0.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 90e6258..0000000
--- a/old/55444-0.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8478 +0,0 @@
-The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Chautauquan, Vol. 05, July 1885, No. 10, by 
-The Chautauquan Literary and Scientific Circle
-
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
-other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
-the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
-www.gutenberg.org.  If you are not located in the United States, you'll have
-to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook.
-
-Title: The Chautauquan, Vol. 05, July 1885, No. 10
-
-Author: The Chautauquan Literary and Scientific Circle
-
-Editor: Theodore L. Flood
-
-Release Date: August 27, 2017 [EBook #55444]
-
-Language: English
-
-Character set encoding: UTF-8
-
-*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CHAUTAUQUAN, JULY 1885 ***
-
-
-
-
-Produced by Emmy, Juliet Sutherland and the Online
-Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-                            THE CHAUTAUQUAN.
-
-      _A MONTHLY MAGAZINE DEVOTED TO THE PROMOTION OF TRUE CULTURE.
-        ORGAN OF THE CHAUTAUQUA LITERARY AND SCIENTIFIC CIRCLE._
-
-                  VOL. V.      JULY, 1885.      No. 10.
-
-
-
-
-OFFICERS OF THE CHAUTAUQUA LITERARY AND SCIENTIFIC CIRCLE.
-
-
-_President_, Lewis Miller, Akron, Ohio. _Chancellor_, J. H. Vincent,
-D.D., New Haven, Conn. _Counselors_, The Rev. Lyman Abbott, D.D.;
-the Rev. J. M. Gibson, D.D.; Bishop H. W. Warren, D.D.; Prof. W. C.
-Wilkinson, D.D.; Edward Everett Hale. _Office Secretary_, Miss Kate
-F. Kimball, Plainfield, N. J. _General Secretary_, Albert M. Martin,
-Pittsburgh, Pa.
-
-
-
-
-Contents
-
-Transcriber’s Note: This table of contents of this periodical was created
-for the HTML version to aid the reader.
-
-    Some Damascene Pictures                         559
-    The Boston Museum of Fine Arts
-        Second Paper                                562
-    Sanitary Conditions of Summer Resorts           564
-    Wayside Homes                                   567
-    Sunday Readings
-        [_July 5_]                                  570
-        [_July 12_]                                 570
-        [_July 19_]                                 570
-        [_July 26_]                                 571
-    “We Salute Thee, and Live”                      571
-    A Group of Mummies                              572
-    A Trip to Mt. Shasta                            573
-    Reassurement                                    576
-    Will It Pay?                                    577
-    Geography of the Heavens for July               578
-    How Air Has Been Liquefied                      579
-    American Decorative Art                         582
-    Some Modern Literary Men of Germany             585
-    Historic Niagara                                586
-    Two Fashionable Poisons                         589
-    Our C. L. S. C. Column                          591
-    Glimpses of the Chautauqua Program              592
-    Local Circles                                   593
-    The C. L. S. C. Classes                         600
-    The Summer Assemblies                           603
-    Editor’s Outlook                                606
-    Editor’s Note-Book                              609
-    Talk About Books                                611
-    Chautauqua in Japan                             612
-    Program of Popular Exercises                    613
-    Special Notes                                   616
-
-
-
-
-SOME DAMASCENE PICTURES.
-
-BY BISHOP JOHN F. HURST, D.D.
-
-
-One is forcibly struck with the Damascene bazars. They thread the old
-city in all directions. Some of them are new, and some very old. The most
-of them are covered ways, where either side is divided into small booths,
-or shops. The bazar has its specialty—the brass bazar, the silversmith
-bazar, the goldsmith bazar, the shoe bazar, the silk bazar, and all the
-rest. Then there is another order of division, such as the Greek bazar
-and the Frank bazar. There is sometimes, however, a breaking up of all
-orders, for goods of very varied character you can sometimes get in the
-same bazar. The oldest of these quaint marts date back many centuries,
-and are mere holes, or rickety houses, where buying and selling have
-been going on for many a generation. The venders love these old places.
-I imagine their fathers, and even remote ancestors sat in the same spot,
-and did business in much the same way, and chaffed about the prices in
-quite as much hyperbole, four or five centuries ago, as their children
-do to-day, when a Frank drops into the busy way, and halts, and asks a
-question concerning the beautiful wares.
-
-The love is for the old. No Damascene wants to change to the new. The
-smooth floor and familiar shelves of his booth he could not give up to
-another for many a bright _bishlik_.
-
-Not long since the Pasha of Damascus, who had been long making vain
-efforts to get the shop-keepers of a stretch of the bazar in the “street
-that is called straight,” to pull down their booths and put up new ones,
-had to give up the task as hopeless. Finally he ordered that, at a given
-signal, one night, the bazar should be set fire to in a number of places.
-His officers did their duty well. They knew what they were about. The
-result was that long reaches of this one bazar were burned to the ground.
-The wares went up in smoke with the tinder which enclosed them.
-
-“What could the people do?” I asked my informant.
-
-“Do? Why, nothing at all.”
-
-“Were they insured? Did they get any compensation back again for the
-destruction of their property?”
-
-“Not in the least. The Pasha had the power. No questions were asked. The
-consequence is, that, as you see, new bazars are building in various
-places. Soon they will be occupied by gay, oriental wares, and things
-will go on quite the same as before. Only there will be more light and
-fresher air.”
-
-Among the specialties sold in the Damascene bazars we may mention silk
-goods, first of all. They are combined with cotton, and woven into
-various patterns for dress and furniture. They defy all competition the
-world over. The patterns are exquisite. No wonder this artistic weaving
-has given the city’s name, or damask, to such fabrics for all time.
-Curtains and all manner of stuffs are woven, and are here displayed in
-such combinations as to bewilder any but Orientals. I saw, during my
-stay, the places where these fine silks are woven. There are no great
-shops, no few places where they come from. They are produced in small
-houses, in obscure and ill-odorous streets, and by thousands of hands,
-young and old. It is the toil of the poor, the young, and the infirm, in
-sunless cellars and obscure corners which brings out these sunny silks
-and beautiful designs. Queens send here from afar to buy them. There, in
-the hotel, I saw the Crown Prince of Austria and his fair-haired Belgian
-bride. Before twenty-four hours will have passed they will be buying
-these silks of Damascus, and in less than six months Stephanie will be
-wearing them at a court dinner. When she becomes Empress she will be
-having more of them, and her favorite rooms will likely be hung with the
-rich stuffs sent direct from these busy bazars, but coming first from
-dingy homes and little rickety looms.
-
-Yes, one learns an easy lesson here, in these oriental countries, of
-the contrast between the hand that weaves and the body that wears the
-stuffs that adorn the world’s gayest places. In Agra, behind the barred
-gate, I saw the chained prisoners of the jail weaving most patiently one
-rich India carpet for the ex-Empress Eugenie, and another, of different
-figure, but even more rich, for Queen Victoria. It takes about six months
-for the workers to finish their work. As they weave, one hears the clank
-of the chains about their feet. But, in the later years, when those great
-carpets will still delight the eye, few will ever think of the places
-where the fine wool from Cashmere was woven into such pleasing shapes.
-
-
-DAMASCENE TRADITIONS.
-
-There is nothing in the way of safe tradition in Damascus. They will show
-you—yes, what will they not show you? I let them tell me everything,
-and have given no interdict to our dragoman. He is to tell me all the
-wildest traditions he pleases, and take me to every sacred spot, and I
-am to listen. No wonder he has brought me to the house of Ananias, the
-good friend of the blind Saul, before he became the far-seeing apostle to
-the Gentiles. We had to leave our carriage and go through several narrow
-and dirty streets, and got thoroughly wearied by the walk, and then had
-to wait for a key, and be surrounded by begging children, and be pounded
-between donkeys with heavily-burdened panniers, and be led down a damp
-stairway into the darkness, to find the way to the house of Ananias.
-
-There is no harm in asking questions. So, to the question as to how they
-know this is where he lived, the answer came:
-
-“Until lately, nobody knew where Ananias lived. But some years ago a
-learned man from the west came here and told us this was the place, and
-so it must be true.”
-
-Now, I take this comfort: Ananias lived somewhere in Damascus, and there
-is as much probability that he lived here as anywhere else. That is
-enough for me. Why should we disturb things of such little moment?
-
-But there is not much room for doubting the neighborhood of the place
-where Paul entered the city. It was the gate nearest the southern side
-of the city. The old Roman road northward terminated at the gate. It is
-probable that no change has taken place in the road, and that it follows
-just the general line, and even the curves, that it did in the remote
-period. On this southern side of Damascus there has been but little
-change in the wall from Paul’s day to ours. You can see at a glance that
-all the lower part of the wall is of Roman work. The blocks are large,
-clear cut, and brought into closest brotherhood without a grain of
-mortar. The joining is still perfect. It was the wall of Paul’s time, and
-only the upper part has been torn down and rebuilt. It is as easy to see
-the difference between Roman and Turkish workmanship as to trace the line
-between a Moslem mosque and the Theseum in Athens.
-
-They will show you, in Damascus, the very place where Paul was let down
-from the wall in a basket. Let them enjoy their definite locality! But
-I did get, very near the alleged spot, an idea which I had never had
-before—that there was a mode of building which favored the letting down
-of any one from the top of the wall. One can see, in several places on
-this same southern side of Damascus, that people live in houses adjusted
-on the top of the wall itself. I saw one of these diminutive houses which
-projected over the wall so far that one might well wonder why it did not
-fall down to the earth. What more natural thing than that Paul was let
-down from just such a place. There was not a gate in the wall near by,
-and nothing was more natural and easy than to aid his escape in this way.
-
-I lingered some time about the Roman gateway. It is an enchanting spot.
-The great blocks of stone, the pillars, the archway, the smooth stones,
-over which you walk to reach it, the general curve of the wall, tell
-of the Roman times, and bring you face to face with the little church
-in Damascus which was soon to set the whole eastern and western world
-ablaze by its leading of Paul to the light. Along all the ways, out by
-this Roman gate, the people were twisting silk, and getting it ready
-for the loom. It was of hard fiber, yellow, rich, and glistening in the
-afternoon shimmer of the sun, as it came back from the pink sides of
-the Anti-Libanus mountains. There was no available spot which was not
-utilized by long stretches of the silk cord. It was drawn off in all
-directions, and we had to walk carefully to keep from stumbling against
-the twister’s twist.
-
-
-THE CAMELS.
-
-Not very far from the Roman gate was the great camel space. It was the
-point of departure for caravans to Palmyra, Mecca, and the whole eastern
-world. Here were hundreds of camels. They seemed to be waiting for the
-finishing burdens. Some were already loaded, and were pausing for the
-rest. I know not how long it requires for the completing of a caravan.
-But it seems that when some camels are loaded they are taken to the
-outside space, and are kept watch over until all of the others are ready.
-It must be no small or brief matter to get a caravan ready. Then, when
-the last camel is laden, and he takes his place in the caravan, and the
-signal is given to move on, what a commotion it makes! Friends come down
-to see their friends off. It is the moving off of many people, and of
-vast treasures of merchandise. Merchants and travelers, and many others
-who wish to go to the distant places across the desert, for any purpose
-whatever, go with the caravan. It is the safest way, for the train is
-guarded, and has, I imagine, the protection of the government. There is
-something singularly poetical, as well as practical, in the moving of the
-caravan. It is a thing which does not occur every day. Much commercial
-gain depends upon its safe conduct and arrival. The camels must be of
-just the right kind to endure the long journey and the great fatigue.
-The gait is slow and dull. There is the dreariest monotony. Yet this is
-the way these people have been traveling and doing business, and keeping
-up the connections for all these long ages. As things now seem, it would
-appear to be ages still before the railway, or even the wagon, will take
-the place of the much-enduring camel, the ship of the desert.
-
-
-BUCKLE’S GRAVE.
-
-Close beside the space allotted for the camels which make the long
-caravans for Damascus, I came across the little English cemetery. It is
-a quiet spot, surrounded by a high wall. The gate was locked, and there
-was no way of getting within it. I could not tell where the key was to be
-found; wherever it was, it was a long distance off, in the heart of the
-city. So, by the aid of our dragoman, I succeeded in climbing to the top
-of the wall, and seeing the one grave in which I was most interested—that
-of Henry Thomas Buckle, the author of the “History of Civilization.”
-Buckle had wearied himself out with literary work. His methods were not
-the most wise nor expeditious. He was an indefatigable gleaner of facts,
-and a patient gatherer of notes from all quarters, and he piled up his
-note-books in great heterogeneous masses. He seems to have had but little
-help, and not to have husbanded his strength. So, like many men who
-begin to rest when it is all too late, he went off on distant travel. He
-reached Damascus. His mind must have kindled afresh as he saw this city
-of weavers and strange oriental combinations, and the thought of the long
-and hoary history of the place. But he was too weary to think longer. He
-lay down to die, and here he rests, under the shadow of the thick and
-high walls of a little graveyard, where only seldom an Anglo-Saxon comes
-to visit the sacred place. The accumulation of years is beginning to tell
-upon the inscription. But it is still very legible, and gives the record
-of his brief and toiling life.
-
-There is something singularly touching in this little graveyard. There
-are only a few graves, yet among them, besides Buckle’s, are several
-English noblemen and titled ladies. The inscriptions repeat the story of
-love and tears, as everywhere else. None who come here expect to die.
-But the difficulties of removal are great. There are great and long
-settled superstitions against the transportation of the dead in all these
-eastern countries. The best way is to let our friends lie where they
-fall, and to care for the perpetual beauty of their resting place. The
-little graveyards of the Anglo-Saxons in all the eastern cemeteries make
-a strange appeal to the sympathies. I have seen many of them, and always
-they teach a new lesson of the suddenness of death, of the pilgrimage
-which we call life, and of the burning love of those who remain behind,
-and who write their words of tenderest affection upon stone in far-off
-lands.
-
-
-THE GREAT MOSQUE.
-
-There are few mosques which have a more interesting history than the
-great one of Damascus. Of all those in existence, save only that of
-Mecca, the greatest interest probably clusters about this one. It is not
-as splendid as that of St. Sophia, in Constantinople, and yet it has
-some elements of touching story that not even that one possesses. It
-stands upon the foundation of a Greek temple. In the early Christian ages
-it required only an imperial order to convert a temple into a church.
-So, when the Emperor Arcadius, toward the close of the fourth century,
-wished to convert this temple into a church, all he needed to do was
-to declare his will, and hurl out the pagan priesthood, and make a few
-minor changes, and the deed was done. It became a splendid church, whose
-fame went out into all lands. Thus it remained until the rise of the
-Mohammedan faith. When Damascus was conquered, so arduous was the strife
-that the leader of the Christians met the leader of the Moslems near the
-spot where the church stood, and, by agreement, part of the church was
-given up to the Mohammedans, and part still reserved by the Christians.
-But Christian and Moslem had the same doorway. This state of things
-could not last a great while. The Caliph Omar I. asked the Christians
-to sell their right to a part of the church. They refused, and then he
-took it from them. But he was fair enough to given them perpetual right
-to other churches in the city and its environs. He then set to work to
-beautify and make still more splendid this ancient building. He is said
-to have brought from Constantinople 1,200 skilled artists, and to have
-searched over all Syria for the most splendid pillars and architectural
-adornments, with which to beautify and enlarge the building. Precious
-stones were used for mosaic, vines of solid gold were made to run over
-the archways, the wooden ceiling was overlaid with a plating of gold, and
-from its glittering height there hung six hundred gold lamps.
-
-The wars and time have told strangely upon this rich, historical
-building. The lamps are gone, no doubt to serve the purposes of warfare.
-The plating on the ceiling has disappeared, probably for the same reason.
-Much of the splendor has departed. But there are still the magnificent
-columns, with mutilated capitals and defaced bases, which once belonged
-to the Greek pagans of Syria, and in their long life, have witnessed the
-worship of Baal, Jupiter, Mohammed, and the one true Savior.
-
-The present reminders of the time when this vast building of four hundred
-and twenty-nine feet in length and one hundred and twenty-five feet wide,
-was new, are numerous and very prominent. Everywhere, at every step you
-take, you see the old peering out boldly through the new and the late.
-Here is a patch of rich and deep-stoned mosaic, which has escaped a
-thousand destructive forces, and still stands as a witness to the time of
-remote Christianity, when Mohammed was not yet born. The stained windows,
-with glass so somber and subdued that one can hardly see even this
-blazing Syrian sun’s rays through it, are few in number, but they must
-have been made by Christian hands, in the far gone and fading Byzantine
-times. Even the Roman peers through the Christian, and one sees strong
-evidences of the times when the star had not yet stood over the manger
-at Bethlehem, and when the Greek paganism ruled from the Mediterranean
-to the borders of India. Here is an archway with only one stone missing,
-which is as perfect a bit of Greek architecture as Athens can furnish
-to-day.
-
-One of the most singular features of this building is this—the respect
-which the Mohammedan shows here for Christianity. I have seen nothing
-equal to it elsewhere. There is here, belonging to the Greek mosque, the
-Madinet ’Isa, or “Minaret of Jesus,” and the Mohammedans have a belief
-that when the Christ comes he will appear on this minaret. Bloody as
-has been the history of Damascus, and violent as has often been the
-treatment of the Christians by the natives, the Mohammedans have been
-compelled to respect the Christians, and to remember the relation of this
-wonderful city to early Christianity.
-
-Let me give another illustration of how the old still looks through the
-new. To the dragoman I said, when he seemed to have shown us everything:
-
-“Where is that Christian inscription?”
-
-“Oh,” he replied, “nobody goes there much now. It is dangerous to get to
-it. You have to leap across a bazar, from one house-top to another. It is
-very dangerous.”
-
-There were two ladies in our little party, and they were not at all
-frightened by the outlook. It was simply a dragoman’s excuse to save
-himself a little trouble. We all agreed that Franz must show us the
-inscription. We went out of the mosque, down the street, then into the
-silver bazar, then up a rickety stairway, and finally out over the flat
-roofs of various buildings back to the outer wall of the mosque. We were
-at the limit, and either had to leap over a deep span, the width of a
-narrow street, or put a wide board across it. A couple of piasters soon
-provided the board from a man who was just waiting to serve us, and in
-one minute more we were reading, along the architrave of one side of the
-old mosque, these words from David, in early Greek:
-
-    “Thy kingdom [O, Christ] is an everlasting kingdom, and thy
-    dominion endureth throughout all generations.”
-
-This inscription has stood here through all the years since they were
-put there first by the Christians of the fourth century, after they had
-changed the temple into the church. The letters are as clear as the sun
-in the heavens.
-
-It is, perhaps, the only illustration where Mohammedanism has permitted
-a Christian inscription to stand. It is not likely to be removed in the
-future, but will come into use when all the mosques are again made into
-Christian temples.
-
-It is not an easy climb to the top of one of these lofty minarets. But
-we resolved to do it. The picture never fades from the mind. Toward
-the west we could see, as though within arm’s length, Ubel Sheikh, or
-Mount Hermon, with its great folds of snow, that make his perpetual
-turban of spotless white. Out from the sides of the Anti-Libanus burst
-the Abana and Pharpar, which go singing down to the desert, and produce
-the damascenes of all the countries. Yonder is the Christian quarter,
-there the Jewish, and in another direction the Mohammedan. Far off to
-the northeast lies Palmyra. But we can not see it. It is a four days’
-camel journey distant. The illimitable desert stretches east and south
-and north, and these two “better rivers” of Damascus lose themselves
-in those two little lakes, whose silver surface just glistens a little
-in this perfect sun. Fruit trees are everywhere in bloom. The almond,
-the plum—the damson takes its name from Damascus—and the apricot, are
-everywhere in full blaze, and make the city one vast nosegay. The murmur
-of fountains rises from a thousand courts, while the streets are alive
-with the streams which have been vexed and teased away by many a device
-from these living rivers. You get weary with the view.
-
-We now descend. How shall we see the way down the dingy steps? By the
-same lamp which had guided us up. Yes, it is a veritable coal-oil
-lantern. Think of it—the mixing up of the centuries! My Anglo-Saxon
-feet have been guided to the topmost point of one of the world’s oldest
-buildings here in grand and hoary Damascus, by the aid of a kerosene
-lantern, every drop of whose petroleum has come from Oil City or its
-neighborhood.
-
-DAMASCUS, March 8, 1885.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-I do not pretend that books are everything.… Some day I may say some very
-hard things about people who keep their books so close before their eyes
-that they can not see God’s world, nor their fellow men and women. But
-books rightly used are society.—_E. E. Hale, in “How to Do It.”_
-
-
-
-
-THE BOSTON MUSEUM OF FINE ARTS.
-
-BY CLARENCE COOK.
-
-
-SECOND PAPER.
-
-Before proceeding to describe the contents of the second floor of the
-Museum, I must say a few words about the School of Drawing and Painting
-which, for the present, has its home in the building.
-
-Although it is generally thought by those who hear of this school, and
-always in connection with the Museum, that it is a department of the
-institution, yet in fact it is only partially under the control of the
-trustees.
-
-It will be remembered that the Museum was not made all at once, and out
-of whole cloth, so to speak, but was formed by bringing together certain
-collections already existing—the Athenæum casts and pictures, and the
-Gray collection of engravings, for instance, and by offering hospitality
-to certain projects connected with the study of the arts, which were in
-the air, but which could not take shape without some such help as an
-institution could give.
-
-As my readers know, the Museum became a fact in 1876, but two years
-earlier, in 1874, there had been earnest talk about a school of drawing
-and painting, and though nothing was actually done, yet the ground was
-prepared by much discussion for establishing such a school on right
-principles of theory and practice when the time should come for doing
-something. The Museum once established, the trustees conferred with those
-of their fellow-citizens who had been urging the foundation of a school;
-the trustees offered rooms in the new building, the others raised the
-necessary funds to equip the school, and on Tuesday, January 2, 1877, the
-school was opened.
-
-The school is under the control of a permanent committee, consisting
-of four painters, three architects, the three principal officers of
-the Museum, and two other gentlemen. The rooms occupied by the school
-are in the basement of the building; they are well lighted, warmed,
-and ventilated, and are furnished with all the necessary means and
-appliances for instruction, while the pupils have, in addition to the
-excellent teaching provided for them in the school itself, the advantage
-of free access to the permanent collections of the Museum, as well as
-to the special exhibitions that, from time to time, take place in the
-building. The school holds a high rank among similar institutions in the
-country; it is under the able and high minded management of Mr. Frederic
-Crowninshield, and it is sincerely to be hoped that before long it may
-find itself in quarters more ample, and better suited to the dignity
-of so important a factor in the culture of the community. At the same
-time the hope may be expressed, that the school and the Museum may never
-part company, but that their relations, on the contrary, may grow closer
-and stronger, and that in time the school may become an active part of
-the foundation, and be put under the complete control of the trustees.
-There could not be a better place for students than an institution like
-this, where daily seeing the finest forms of antique art, and constantly
-increasing opportunities for acquaintance with good modern work,
-illustrate and strengthen the lessons learned in the school itself.
-
-Immediately in front of the visitor as he enters the Museum rises the
-ample staircase that leads to the upper rooms. The stairs mount in a
-broad flight in the middle of the hall, to the first landing, where they
-divide, and returning on themselves finish the ascent in two flights, one
-at the right hand and the other at the left. On this first landing was
-at one time placed a handsome original example of the carved settles
-or benches of the Italian Renaissance, but this has now been replaced
-by a cast of the reclining female figure called Cleopatra, but to which
-the name of Ariadne is now more commonly given. The original marble is
-in the Vatican. This cast is one of those purchased with the bequest of
-the late Charles Sumner. On the walls of the staircase and of the upper
-hall several pictures are hung, among them a few that have, at least for
-Americans, a historic interest. Here are the “Belshazzar’s Feast” of
-Washington Allston, a picture at one time much talked and written about,
-and which played an important part in the artist’s life; the “St. Peter
-delivered from Prison,” by the same painter; the “King Lear” of Benjamin
-West, and the “Sortie from Gibraltar” of Jonathan Trumbull. Of course
-these pictures are only placed here for a time, until the Museum building
-shall be enlarged, for when all deductions have been made on the score of
-artistic merit that sound criticism can demand, they will still remain as
-monuments in our development, and as such deserve to be hung where they
-can be better seen.
-
-Lack of room crowds into the hall of this second story a number of small
-works, such as the collection of water-color copies from the pictures
-of Dutch and Italian masters made for the late Mr. Douse, and by him
-bequeathed to the Athenæum. They are of little value except as memoranda,
-and might as well be removed from their frames, mounted, and consigned to
-the custody of portfolios in the print-room.
-
-Of far more value are the drawings in chalk, in pencil, and in pastel
-by the late J. F. Millet, belonging to Mr. Martin Brimmer; they were
-among the first things loaned to the Museum, and they still remain among
-the most valuable for delight and for instruction. At the same end of
-the hall, and so placed that the light from the large window is most
-advantageous to it, is placed a cast of the second of the Gates, made by
-Lorenzo Ghiberti for the Baptistery in Florence.
-
-At the left hand, as we leave the stairs, is the entrance to the
-extensive loan-collections which fill all but one of the rooms on this
-side of the building. Although they are directly over the rooms on the
-first floor, the space they occupy is not so subdivided; we have only
-four rooms above the five below. The apartment we first enter is a large
-one, fifty-five feet long by thirty-two wide, and was formerly given up
-to the pictures which have since been transferred to the answering room
-on the opposite side of the building. The room opening out of this, at
-the western end, and of nearly the same size, is devoted to the same
-object, but it would be impossible within our narrow limits to give an
-adequate notion of their contents, particularly since, owing to want of
-space, no scientific arrangement is possible, and the dazed spectator
-moves about among objects of great value and interest, brought from every
-clime and belonging to every age, but deprived of much of their value
-because the key which order gives, is wanting.
-
-The department of textiles, embroideries and laces is full, and of great
-value, and includes some Italian stuffs and embroideries purchased by the
-Museum under the direction of the late Alessandro Castellani. There are
-some fine Flemish tapestries which came from the Château de Neuilly, and
-a few other pieces of value, but the Museum is richest in that part of
-the loan collection which belongs to Japan. Dr. W. S. Bigelow has loaned
-to the Museum his magnificent collection of objects from that country,
-and it may be said of it that in the field of embroideries, lacquers,
-swords, sword-mounts, bronzes, ivories, and ceramics, it exhausts the
-subject. It is now greatly to be desired that some one should undertake
-the collection of the works of the Japanese artists in painting—a field
-of great importance, and strangely neglected.
-
-The Museum is rich in specimens of pottery and porcelain of Oriental
-and European manufacture. In the latter field it is richer than the
-Metropolitan Museum of New York, but the Avery collection of Chinese
-and Japanese porcelain in the New York Museum is finer in quality and
-more complete in its representative character than anything the Boston
-Museum has. It is also far more attractively displayed. The collection
-of Captain Brinckley, of Japan, of eight hundred and forty-two pieces of
-Chinese and Japanese porcelain, loaned to the Boston Museum since 1884
-is, however, an acquisition of great value and artistic interest, and
-although not particularly well displayed is instructively arranged and
-classified.
-
-In the large western room there is a considerable number of small objects
-of the period of the Italian Renaissance, some bronzes belonging to the
-Athenæum, and some medals loaned by Mr. Charles C. Perkins; there is
-also a considerable number of reproductions of Italian medals, made by
-Elkington, of London, which serve a useful purpose in the absence of
-original specimens. There are also, in this room, several good pieces of
-Italian majolica; two specimens of the Della Robbia ware—one attributed
-to Luca, the other to Andrea, both loaned by Mr. Perkins. The collection
-is not rich in glass, either antique or modern. There are a few pieces
-of old Venetian glass, but they are neither very interesting nor very
-valuable.
-
-On the south side of this division of the Museum are two rooms, one of
-which is occupied with a miscellaneous collection of objects in carved
-wood and ivory, Italian marriage chests, cabinets, tables, etc., etc.,
-with some Japanese objects, chiefly swords, while the other is fitted
-up with carved oak of the sixteenth century, the lining of a room in
-some English house, with additions from other quarters. This is an
-extremely interesting apartment, and, besides the wood-carving, contains
-six portraits painted on panel, and forming a part of the original
-decoration of the room; among them heads of Henry VIII., Edward VI., and
-Queen Elizabeth. There are several pieces of antique furniture in this
-room, and in the center a glass case containing some good illuminated
-manuscripts. The mantelpiece, in the style of the period, is a modern
-reproduction.
-
-Returning to the stair-case hall, and crossing to the eastern side of
-the building, we find ourselves in the picture-galleries. The shape and
-disposition of these rooms are similar to those in the opposite wing,
-but owing to the greater height of the sculpture-gallery on the ground
-floor at the eastern end, the space above it, divided into two rooms, is
-several feet higher than the rest of the wing. The great height of the
-upper story permits this division be to made without injury to the effect.
-
-The pictures belonging to the Museum are not without interest, although
-their value is not very great, if reckoned in money. The early American
-pictures include portraits by Copley, Stuart, Allston, and West, but
-with the exception of the well-known portraits of Washington and Mrs.
-Washington, by Stuart, there is nothing here of particular interest,
-although there are often pictures loaned to the Museum by old residents
-of Boston, which are historically valuable. It is much to be desired that
-the collection of portraits by Copley in the Museum of Harvard College
-could be deposited in the Museum. There ought to be in this institution
-as complete a representation of the early art of the country as can
-be procured, and it would be comparatively easy to accomplish this at
-the present time. It must not be inferred that the authorities of the
-Museum have neglected this portion of their mission. On the contrary,
-they have rendered important service in this direction, and the special
-exhibitions have been of interest, and of great importance. Beside
-miscellaneous loan collections, there have been exhibitions of the works
-of Allston, of William M. Hunt, and of George Fuller, and every year the
-visitor finds representative pictures by artists of repute at home and
-abroad, which excite interest, discussion, criticism, and keep the flame
-of art and the love of art burning, even if—and this by no fault of the
-institution—comparatively few avail themselves of the light. The French
-school of painters which had its seat near the Forest of Fontainebleau,
-and which is associated with the names of Millet, Corot, Rousseau, and
-Diaz, is better represented here than any other of the modern schools,
-although Courbet and Couture are both seen in good examples, Courbet
-especially, of whom there is a fine picture, “La Curée”—the huntsman
-winding his horn to call the chase together to cut up the stag. The
-Couture is the Heads of Two Soldiers seen in profile, and though of no
-importance as subject, is a good example of his method.
-
-The school of Fontainebleau, or more properly speaking, of Barbizon,
-is represented by the large “Dante and Virgil,” a companion in size to
-the “Orpheus” of the Cottier collection in New York, but by no means so
-fine a work. There is no important work by Millet at present, although
-there have been here some good examples from time to time, and especially
-his “Sower,” the fine _replica_ of that picture belonging to Mr. Quincy
-A. Shaw, with other smaller subjects, particularly a Sheep-shearing, a
-picture in which all that is best in Millet was to be seen.
-
-The picture gallery at the Museum is such a movable feast that it
-would be useless to attempt a catalogue of its contents. Just now the
-“Automedon taming the Horses of Achilles,” by Baptiste Regnault, the
-“Joan of Arc,” by Bastien Lepage, and “The Walk by the River Side,” by
-Henri Lerolle, are among the most noticeable of the contents of the
-large room, although there are a number of smaller pictures that are
-well worth looking at. There is an effort making to purchase the picture
-by Regnault, and the Lerolle was presented to the Museum in 1884 by Mr.
-Francis C. Foster.
-
-The remaining rooms in this portion of the building are a small one
-in which some fine old Dutch paintings are exhibited, and those which
-contain the Gray collection of engravings. The Dutch pictures, it is
-hoped, will one day belong to the Museum; they will form a valuable
-addition to its collection.
-
-The Gray collection fills the room which runs along the southern side of
-this wing answering to the large picture gallery which is parallel with
-it on the north. This collection, formed for the late Francis C. Gray
-by M. Thies, a German connoisseur, is one of the two or three important
-collections of prints that are owned in America, and in some departments
-is excelled by none, while the fact that there is a fund derived from
-moneys left by Mr. Gray, which is devoted to the maintenance and increase
-of the collection, gives it the advantage over all others here, and
-ensures its one day becoming of national importance. It is already very
-rich in Rembrandts and Dürers, but the aim of those who have it in charge
-is to make it representative in its character, not of any one school in
-particular but of all the schools and styles of engraving which have
-existed. The collection is under the intelligent care of Mr. Edward
-H. Greenleaf, who makes the contents of the portfolios useful to the
-public by a series of exhibitions of the finest specimens of the various
-schools, accompanied with titles, notes, and instructive memoranda, so
-that in default of proper space for doing full justice to the collection
-in any permanent way, the course of the year brings before the eyes of
-students and visitors a considerable number of the prints, and thus makes
-no slight contribution to general enlightenment on the subject.
-
-The next paper in this series will take up the Metropolitan Museum of New
-York.
-
-
-
-
-SANITARY CONDITION OF SUMMER RESORTS.
-
-BY THE HON. B. G. NORTHROP, LL.D.
-
-
-The progress of modern civilization is marked by increasing attention to
-the sanitary condition of cities, towns and homes. Barbaric races are
-comparatively puny and short lived. Very old men are seldom found among
-savages, and the rate of mortality bears some proportion to the degree of
-barbarism, while early deaths everywhere diminish as the art and science
-of sanitation advance. The increase of knowledge and the influence of
-Christianity have greatly lengthened human life. Science is constantly
-showing how many diseases and deaths are preventable. These facts are
-abundantly established by statistics in all the most educated nations,
-and, more recently, by the careful investigations of life insurance
-companies and public boards of health. There has been a far greater
-advance in sanitary science during the last fifty years than in any
-previous century. But the popular appreciation of this science, though
-steadily advancing, has not kept pace with its discoveries. The pressing
-demand now is the diffusion of the art of sanitation—the practical
-application of its methods by the people at large. The public press, the
-daily, weekly and monthly journals are doing much in this direction.
-Some of the most widely circulated religious journals have a column
-regularly devoted to this subject. Our schools are helping on this good
-work, and here the art of promoting health and prolonging life should be
-learned and then applied in the family. Such principles, though they seem
-truisms to the scientist, should be taught to our youth, who should early
-memorize mottoes like the following: “Health is the prime essential to
-success.” “The first wealth is health.” “The health of the people is the
-foundation upon which all their happiness and all their power depend.”
-“The material precedes and conditions the intellectual.” The school
-may do more to popularize sanitary science than any other one agency.
-When this work is once done here, it will not long be true that a large
-proportion of our people are still living in ignorance and violation of
-so many of the essential laws of health. The _popular_ neglect of such
-laws should not be overlooked in our gratification at their discovery.
-
-Our wisest sanitarians affirm that more than one fourth of the diseases
-which still afflict modern life are preventable. Great prominence has
-recently been given to this subject in England and other European
-countries. Dr. Simon, chief medical officer of the English Privy Council,
-says that “the deaths which we in each year register in this country
-(now about five hundred thousand) are fully a hundred and twenty-five
-thousand more numerous than they would be, _if existing knowledge_ of
-the chief causes of disease, as affecting masses of population, were
-reasonably well applied throughout England.” With our larger population,
-probably a still larger number of lives in America might be prolonged by
-the more general observance of the laws of health. If 125,000 needless
-deaths occur annually, that implies 3,500,000 needless sicknesses, there
-being on an average twenty-eight cases of sickness to every death. Saying
-nothing of the hopes thus blasted and the hearts and homes desolated, the
-mere money value of the lives thus prematurely ended every year would
-amount to many millions of dollars, often involving the abandonment of
-lucrative enterprises, and inducing poverty if not pauperism. In this
-lowest view, it costs to be sick and it costs to die.
-
-Modern civilization relates specially to the homes and social life of the
-people, to their health, comfort and thrift, their intellectual and moral
-advancement. In earlier times and other lands men were counted in the
-aggregate and valued as they helped to swell the revenues or retinues
-of kings and nobles. The government was the unit, and each individual
-only added one to the roll of serfs or soldiers. With us the individual
-is the unit, and the government is _for_ the people, as well as by the
-people. This interest in the people has been manifested in new laws for
-protecting their health, and by the general organization of State and
-local Boards of Health.
-
-Their investigations have embraced not only the needs of cities, towns
-and individual homes, but have revealed startling facts as to the
-unsanitary condition, and consequently the peril, of certain summer
-resorts. Cases of loss of life from the burning of hotels have led to
-the enactment of laws requiring fire escapes. On account of disasters
-by the explosion of steam boilers, all steamboats are required to get a
-“bill of safety” from an official expert examiner. But the violations of
-sanitary laws in boarding houses, hotels and summer resorts have produced
-annually far more sickness and death than have such fires and explosions.
-The circumstantial horrors connected with these sudden and terrible
-disasters produce a deep and lasting impression, and prompt to stringent,
-preventive laws, while the deaths from bad sanitary conditions, though
-more numerous, are so isolated as to attract little notice. The patronage
-of summer resorts is already so large, and is so rapidly increasing from
-year to year, as to multiply their number and increase their attractions.
-This summer migration from city to country is more than a fashion, and
-is favored by such substantial reasons as to insure its permanence and
-growth. Even city clerks have their fortnight’s vacation for rest and
-refreshment by the seaside or among the hills and mountains. There is a
-greater exodus of teachers and members of all professions during their
-longer vacations—still more, families, and especially those having
-young children, seek this escape from the heat, dust, and miasmatic
-exhalations of the crowded city. Though their children may have attended
-the kindergarten in the city, they find the best sort of kindergarten
-in the open fields and varied objects of the country, with its wider
-range for rambles and those freer sports that are so attractive to every
-wide-awake boy, such as boating, fishing, hunting, watching turtles,
-gathering bugs and butterflies, roaming in the woods, taking long
-excursions on the lakes or rivers, climbing steep hills and rocky cliffs,
-loving flowers, observing the properties of plants and trees, and the
-names, habits, retreats and voices of the birds. Living much in the open
-air, nature becomes the great educator, and for the summer at least, the
-country proffers superior advantages for the physical, mental and moral
-training of youth. The boy, for example, who observes the birds so as to
-distinguish them by their beak, claws, form, plumage, song or flight has
-gained an invaluable habit of accurate observation never acquired while
-cooped up in a city.
-
-The apprehension of cholera during the present summer is likely to
-increase the patronage of rural resorts. The condition of some dense
-centers of population invites this pest. Its most terrible ravages last
-summer in Naples, Marseilles and Toulouse occurred in the squalid dens
-so long the reproach of those cities. Our summer retreats should all
-be health resorts in fact as well as in name. Yet many of them—little
-villages in winter, with a population of a few scores or hundreds—are too
-often ill-prepared to be suddenly expanded into cities with a population
-of many thousands, during the hottest and most trying months of the year.
-Several State Boards of Health, within a few years, have examined many
-watering-places and have been reluctantly compelled to make startling
-statements as to their unsanitary conditions.
-
-In some cases these unwholesome and unwelcome discoveries, though a
-surprise and regret to the owners, were accepted as facts, and the
-needful remedies promptly applied. In other instances, such disagreeable
-revelations awakened resentment and were treated as absurd alarms or
-slanderous attacks, and ignorance and prejudice held their ground
-undisturbed.
-
-In regard to one famous resort the State Board of Health of Massachusetts
-said six years ago: “The unsanitary grounds invite a pestilence. They
-violate the plainest teachings of hygienic common sense. There is no
-adequate provision for the removal of refuse, and the wells and privies
-are everywhere in close proximity, and some of the latter are immense
-and offensive affairs, emptied only once a year, in the absence of the
-summer boarders. At a large boarding house the sink drain empties on the
-ground within three feet of the well, and at another, the well is within
-a foot of an open trough sink drain, so filled and obstructed that the
-water sets back, and a filthy puddle surrounds the well.” These were
-mostly driven wells, reaching water from eight to twenty feet below the
-surface. The theory was, that the foulest water would be fully filtered
-by the soil above and around a driven well. The peddlers of this patent,
-with their boastful advertisements, are in a measure responsible for
-this mischievous error, which I have met in many states. I found a large
-hotel beyond the Missouri River, where, instead of even a cess-pool,
-the kitchen drainage gathered in a surface pool close to the well. At
-a bakery in another resort the sink drain and cess-pool are but twelve
-feet from the well. Twenty-four privies and thirteen cess-pools are
-within a radius of 140 feet of a well used by many families. When the
-water from forty wells was analyzed, the chemical examination proved that
-sixteen of them were bad and unsafe. The official State report for 1879
-contains many pages of similar details. In fifteen days after the State
-Board of Health called attention to the results of this investigation,
-the citizens held a town meeting, at which it was _unanimously_ voted
-that the Board of Health of this town should adopt all proper methods
-to perfect and enforce stringent sanitary regulations, and promising
-them their most cordial support in all reasonable efforts they may
-make in the furtherance of this end. The Board of Health of another
-well-known resort, after a careful examination of the sanitary condition
-of Oak Bluffs and Martha’s Vineyard Camp-grounds, frankly said that
-“unless proper remedial measures were carried out, the abandonment of
-the place, as a residence for health, is but a question of time.” The
-State Board subsequently commended this local board for adopting wise
-sanitary regulations and carrying them out with such energy that the high
-reputation of the place as a health resort might be preserved.
-
-The same report says: “It must not be taken for granted that this
-condition of things is confined to one place. Visits to various seaside
-resorts of a similar character on both north and south shores show little
-change for the better. Many individual cases are worse.”
-
-The official inspection of many such summer resorts revealed sickening
-details connected with the large hotels and boarding houses. One hundred
-and fifty summer houses examined were, almost without exception,
-objectionable, on the score of danger to health, due in part to foul air,
-but more to contaminated well water. There is always a risk in the use
-of such water, and the only safe rule is to make privies and cess-pools
-absolutely tight, and frequently empty and disinfect them, so that they
-_can not_ poison the water supply. Nearly every State health report
-abounds in instances of the outbreak of typhoid fever due to bad well
-water, and one affirms that the majority of wells in the rural districts
-of that state are tainted.
-
-As is my custom, in order to adapt my lectures on “Village Improvements”
-to local needs, I made a cursory inspection of the streets and private
-grounds in the town of ⸺, which revealed a prolific source of peril to
-its citizens. Though I had heard nothing of the actual experience of the
-place, I spoke in strong terms of the danger of an early outbreak of
-typhoid fever and diphtheria, from the proximity of vaults and wells.
-After the lecture I was informed that such a dire visitation had already
-desolated many homes, but it was regarded as “a mysterious visitation
-of Providence,” and nothing was done to abate the obvious cause of the
-pestilence. I find it exceedingly difficult to convince men of any danger
-from their water supply. They are apt to resent a disparagement of their
-wells as they would of their children, and yet I seldom inspect a town
-where there is not found urgent need of the warning, “LOOK CAREFULLY
-TO YOUR WELLS.” Gross sanitary defects are often found even around the
-homes of isolated farmers, with every natural advantage for drainage and
-healthfulness. Hence I advise that securing “better sanitary conditions
-in our homes and surroundings” be made prominent among the various
-objects of the “Village Improvement Associations” organized in many
-states, and now numbering nearly three hundred.
-
-The unsanitary condition of Memphis invited the terrible scourge of
-yellow fever in 1878. The occurrence of four thousand deaths in one
-season compelled attention to the cause and remedy. If Memphis was then
-the filthiest and sickliest city of the South, it now claims to be the
-healthiest. The case demanded and received “heroic treatment.” Over
-forty-two miles of sewers have been built, on the most approved plan,
-with one hundred and ninety automatic flushing tanks, each discharging
-one hundred and twelve gallons of water twice a day. While collecting
-facts for a lecture there on “The Needs of Memphis,” I inspected the
-city, and especially the “man-holes,” in company with the city engineer,
-who had supervised their construction, and found in none of them any
-offensive odor. These improvements were costly, but the recent rapid
-growth of this city in population and wealth proves that these liberal
-expenditures were wise investments. The “death-pool” of 1878 now justly
-aspires to be a health resort. An excellent sewer system, with automatic
-flushing tanks, is now in use in Denver, Colorado. I made a similar
-examination of the man-holes there last October, with similar results,
-and received the testimony of a prominent physician, to the marked
-diminution of zymotic diseases since the completion of the new sewers.
-
-Cumulative evidence on the danger of using tainted water might be given
-to an indefinite extent, like the following: Thirty-one out of one
-hundred inmates of a convent in Munich, affected with typhoid fever; the
-outbreak of typhoid fever in Princeton, New Jersey, two years ago; the
-fearful epidemic at Waupun, Wisconsin, in April last, and the terrible
-pestilence now desolating Plymouth, Pa. are all attributed to infected
-water. In Plymouth nearly one hundred persons have already died, and
-over one thousand have been prostrated—in the opinion of the physicians,
-poisoned by water pollution. Such facts should everywhere prompt to
-sanitary precautions, and enforce the motto, “Eternal vigilance is the
-price of public health.”
-
-In a popular summer resort of Massachusetts there occurred eighty cases
-of typhoid fever during 1881, out of a population of only 1,500. The
-citizens were alarmed, and prompt and thorough investigation discovered
-and removed the cause. The mischief had been done mainly by tainted
-water. The remedies suggested by the board of health—clearing of
-premises, securing of better drainage and plumbing, removing of all
-decomposing matter, abolishing all cess-pools and leaching vaults,
-draining marshes and pumping out and cleansing all wells and cisterns
-that afforded chemical evidence of being tainted—were energetically
-applied. The owners of these beautiful cottages and villas spared no
-effort or expense to restore this attractive resort to its former
-salubrity. If any community of its size was ever more earnest, prompt and
-united in such a work of restoration, I should be glad to learn its name.
-In the face of peculiar difficulties on this rocky peninsula, nearly
-five miles of sewers were constructed. Hundreds of chemical analyses of
-the drinking water were made. Of the wells and cisterns so examined,
-nearly sixty per cent. contained water unfit for drinking or cooking. As
-a result of this renovation, the local board of health is quoted in the
-Massachusetts report for 1883 as saying: “These vigorous correctionary
-measures completely checked the epidemic, and not a single case of the
-fever has since appeared here that could not be traced to some other
-locality for its origin.”
-
-Another seaside city, much resorted to in summer, with a regular
-population of over 3,000, after suffering severely from zymotic
-diseases, especially typhoid fever, requested the State Board of Health
-to investigate the cause of this excessive mortality. Nine tenths of
-the population here are crowded in one village of small area, having
-many narrow streets, with small house lots, necessitating a dangerous
-proximity of cess-pools, privy vaults and wells. This danger is increased
-by the nature of the soil, mostly sand or gravel, that facilitates
-rapid percolation. The climate itself is pronounced more equable and
-salubrious than that of any other part of the State, and therefore
-specially attractive to the health-seeker. The mean winter temperature is
-seven degrees warmer than that of Cambridge. The insular position of the
-town, and the sensible proximity of the Gulf Stream lend their combined
-influence to modify the extremes of temperature, such as exist in the
-inland parts of the State. The summer temperature of the water upon its
-shores renders sea-bathing recreative, invigorating and pleasurable, even
-to the delicate invalid. With such rare natural advantages for salubrity,
-the high death rate is traced to preventable causes. The water of eleven
-wells showed, on chemical analysis, a great degree of pollution. The
-remedial plans, prepared at the suggestion of the State Board of Health,
-were submitted to the action of the town meeting held February, 1884,
-and were favorably received. But at a subsequent meeting, this favorable
-action was reconsidered, and since that time no action has been taken.
-
-The last two reports of the State Board of Health of New Jersey contain
-valuable accounts of the sanitary investigations of the health resorts
-of that state. The following statements are abbreviated from these
-volumes. Within thirty miles of New York City is to be found half the
-population of the state of New Jersey. Of this number, according to the
-judgment of engineers, chemists, physicians, and boards of health, not
-one half are supplied with water fit to drink. As our risks from impure
-water are even more than those from ordinary impure air, it behooves
-all to guard against any contamination of potable water. If there is
-a neglect of sanitary care, and especially of a good water supply, it
-is too late to adopt the policy of concealment, or to point to a death
-rate of from twenty-six to thirty as a justification, when so large a
-city as London can point to a death rate of only twenty per thousand,
-and many an English town of 30,000 inhabitants, to a death rate of only
-sixteen or eighteen. The sea coast of New Jersey, more than that of
-any other state, abounds in popular summer resorts. The State Board of
-Health has carefully inspected these resorts, notified the proprietors
-of existing defects, and reported them to the public when they were not
-remedied. Their first visits were often occasions of protest, and even of
-denunciation on the part of proprietors, many of whom, on sober second
-thought, were convinced of the truth, and corrected the evils complained
-of. The latest inspection says that the sanitary condition of most of
-these places has been greatly improved. In 1883 it is said of ⸺, where
-are six hotels and over one hundred cottages, “This locality shows no
-improvement in its care of sanitary conditions. No skilled attention is
-given to drainage. The water supply is mostly from driven wells, which
-are generally surface wells. Privy vaults are of the crudest description.
-Slop water is disposed of in cess-pools, often in close proximity to
-wells. This sanitary lawlessness has not been without its deleterious
-results.” The last report speaks of the same place as improving, but
-there are still some sanitary defects.
-
-One popular resort shows some marked improvements. While some of the
-large hotels have still rows of cess-pools, they are kept in better
-condition than formerly. Still it has not equaled expectation in its
-efforts to provide a much needed system of sewerage. The hotels exhibit
-some of the very best and some of the very worst methods for the disposal
-of water-closet refuse. In one hotel enormous brick vaults had no modes
-of ventilation, and nothing but the shortness of the season protects
-the inmates. These New Jersey resorts are no worse than those in other
-states, and as a rule are salubrious and most desirable retreats, but
-the self-satisfied carelessness of some wealthy owners of hotel property
-has made light of these defects, and they have been tardy in their
-correction. Visitors in such hotels, before taking rooms, should have an
-expert make a sanitary inspection in their behalf.
-
-These facts from different states clearly show that the sanitary
-condition of summer resorts is the question of first importance to all
-who frequent them, and that a rural location, naturally salubrious,
-has often proved a death-pool when made the home of a dense crowd in
-the hottest months of the year. This frequent outbreak of preventable
-diseases in large watering places proves the necessity of applied hygiene
-in such resorts, where the management often betrays gross ignorance or
-carelessness on this vital point.
-
-In this respect the Assembly grounds at Chautauqua form a happy
-exception. Some details may suggest the changes and plans needed
-elsewhere. Last summer, while meeting lecture appointments there, I made
-a cursory inspection of the grounds around each of the four hundred
-and twenty-eight cottages in this “city in a forest,” including its
-numerous boarding houses. The village is very compact, and the cottages
-are sometimes too closely crowded together. But everywhere the sanitary
-conditions are admirable. The three essentials—pure air, pure soil, and
-pure water—are well assured. Special effort is made to guard these three
-“Ps.” No old fashioned privies are _now_ allowed. The last two nuisances
-of this sort were removed while I was on the grounds. Some ten public
-vaults are located at convenient points, each built of stone or brick,
-laid in cement, and thus made water tight. Each is _daily_ supplied with
-disinfectants, and emptied every other night, and then well cleansed with
-water. There are sixty-seven private vaults, made in like manner, water
-tight, and frequently emptied. The water-closet pipes emptying into them
-are said to be all carefully trapped. The waste is conveyed by night to
-farms far away from the grounds.
-
-Every family is required to provide a barrel for garbage, kitchen slops
-and wash water, which is emptied _daily_. No soiled water may be thrown
-on the grounds. The daily inspection detects any violation of this rule.
-There are no alleys, lanes, back yards or dumping grounds where garbage
-can be thrown and secreted. There is no filth-saturated soil, and the
-atmosphere is not tainted with the gases of decay. The decaying leaves,
-so abundant in this forest city, are removed or burned.
-
-Numerous wells, carefully guarded from surface drainage, and eight
-springs furnish pure water. Borings some thirty feet deep, near the
-engine house by the lake, have opened three flowing springs, the water
-in five-inch pipes rising seven feet above the lake. This proves to be
-a mineral water (pronounced by Dr. Edwards, the lecturer on chemistry,
-a wholesome chalybeate tonic), is forced into a large tank on the hill,
-and thence distributed in pipes near the surface over the grounds free
-to all. There was little to criticise in the sanitary condition of the
-grounds, and the few suggestions which I made were promptly carried out
-by the efficient superintendent.
-
-
-
-
-WAYSIDE HOMES.
-
-BY HELEN CAMPBELL.
-
-
-No form of charitable work undertaken in this busy century holds more
-perplexity and uncertainty than that for women, who, whether for great or
-small offenses, have come under the ban of the law, and who pass from the
-shadow of the prison to confront a public feeling which is, in the main,
-so absolutely antagonistic as to leave small chance for reform, or hope
-of making new and better place.
-
-It is certain that there is much justification for such feeling. There
-are few in whom the missionary spirit is strong enough to enable them to
-accept undaunted, the possibilities involved in receiving as a member
-of the family, a woman whose desire for reform may be outweighed a
-thousand times by the power of her appetites, and whose influence may
-bring contamination to all within its reach. Even in less dangerous
-cases, where youth and ignorance are the excuses for the violation of
-law, there is always the fear that association with older offenders has
-given a knowledge of evil that will work equal disaster, and thus the
-door is as effectually closed against the slight as against the confirmed
-transgressor. It is part of the popular conviction that work for women
-is far less productive of results than work for men, a conviction that
-has a certain foundation of truth. Even in the Water Street Mission of
-New York, in which the most apparently hopeless class was reached and
-held, McAuley was constantly baffled by this fact, and in time accepted
-it as inevitable. He did not question, more than other workers have done,
-why this was so, or how far the world was responsible for the state of
-things he bewailed, but came at last, by almost unconscious steps, to the
-conclusion given in a talk with the writer.
-
-“You’ve wondered, at times, that we didn’t have more women here,” he
-said, a year or two before his death. “Don’t you know that you can haul
-in a hundred men to one woman? What it means, the good Lord only knows,
-but they don’t stay put. They cry an’ promise, an’ promise an’ cry,
-an’ you do for ’em with all your might, an’ all at once they’re off,
-an’ may be you never see ’em again.… When a girl’s once down, it isn’t
-once in five hundred times that you can pull her out. Take that very
-one you was so sorry for. She’s been to every meeting ’round here, an’
-cried an’ begged to be helped. She’s been taken first to one ‘Home’ an’
-then to another, an’ she’s run from every one back to her old life. The
-system’s wrong. That’s my opinion. You take a ‘Home’ where a lot are in
-together, an’ the devil’s let loose. They chew tobacco an’ chew snuff,
-an’ get drunk on the sly, an’ the old ones tell the young ones all their
-lives, an’ the last end is worse than the first, for they learn a lot of
-deviltry to add to their own. There ain’t but one way, as I can see, to
-save ’em. Keep ’em apart. Let Christian families that can, make up their
-minds to take one at a time; hedge her round; give her enough to do, an’
-get her interested, an’ pray night an’ day she may be kept. That will
-save a good many, for it’s mostly worked where it’s been tried. But there
-ain’t anything in our work so discouragin’ as this very thing. What you
-going to do? These girls comin’ out of homes where a dozen, may be, has
-herded in one room, what do they know of decency or cleanliness? What
-can they know, I’d like to know? No, I tell you; the work’s got to begin
-at the beginning. Get hold of the children. Send them off. Do anything
-that’ll train them differently. They’re born in sin and born to sin, and
-the Lord only knows what’ll come if good men and women don’t wake up and
-take hold.”
-
-Admitting the serious nature of the difficulties involved, it is quite
-certain that many of them have been born of an utterly false estimate
-of the relative degrees of guilt in men and women. Neither time nor
-space allows discussion of this point beyond the suggestion that in the
-present White Cross movement, and the questions that at once arise as
-the first necessity in any understanding of its nature or need, may be
-found the secret of much that has made against women. Simple justice, the
-last acquired and, it would seem, the hardest won of all virtues, makes
-chastity as binding an obligation upon man as upon woman, and gives to
-both, when repentant, the same pardon and the same hope for a future.
-Thus far, charity has ignored the woman, forcing her to bear not only the
-pain and sorrow of unblessed motherhood, but the sentence of perpetual
-banishment from the society whose laws she has defied.
-
-It is at this stage that workers among the poor most often find her,
-hopeless, and in the large proportion of cases driven back to crime as
-her only resort. They form a great proportion of the inmates of any
-prison for women. Every town and village has its quota of candidates for
-reformatory or jail, and mourns, collectively and individually, over the
-terrible tendencies of this class, with small thought that prevention
-may be easier than cure, and that if children born to such conditions
-come into the world, society is bound to see that their training shall,
-as far as possible, neutralize the results of such inheritance. Society
-has no time for prevention. It proposes to pay for prisons rather than
-for industrial schools; to labor with full fledged criminals, rather
-than to crush out vice while still in embryo, and congratulates itself
-on the magnificent liberality of its provision for the criminal, and the
-remarkable success of the prison system as a whole.
-
-Women are supposed to be merely occasional offenders, and that there
-are, in every state, hundreds outside of the prison who are habitual
-law breakers, and an equally large proportion within its walls, is a
-proposition received as incredible. Yet it was not till Massachusetts
-found herself forced to deal with eight hundred per year of such cases,
-that the first reformatory was organized, in 1865, and the number has
-increased steadily with the increase in population. County prisons,
-of which there were twenty-one, were, too often, simply nests for
-propagating vice. In a few of the larger ones great order and system
-prevailed. In the smaller ones there was next to none, and male and
-female prisoners, dirty, ragged and obscene, mingled together and
-interchanged lessons in new forms of vice. In all of them three classes
-of offenses were to be found, women convicts being sentenced usually for
-drunkenness, unchastity, or larceny; the relative prevalence of the three
-being indicated by the order in which they are given. The first class,
-wherever found, are most often Irish women, at, or past, the middle age.
-They are not criminals, though at times, in some cases, dishonest or
-unchaste. Often they are eager to reform, and yield to the temptation to
-drink as many men yield, for the momentary relief from grinding care and
-anxiety. Many of them become accustomed to the short sentences usually
-given by magistrates for this offense, and there are countless women
-who have had thirty, forty, and even fifty short imprisonments. A long
-term, or, in aggravated cases, imprisonment for life, affords the only
-security, the mere smell of liquor being often enough to awaken appetite
-and bring on a wild debauch. The three crimes can in almost every case be
-traced back to a neglected childhood.
-
-“My mother died whan I was a bit of a child, an’ my father drank and beat
-me,” is the story of nine tenths of these cases, and will remain the
-story. The life of a single great tenement house, if told in full, as
-it has recently been done, shows how the seed is sown, and what harvest
-we may expect, and prison systems, however admirable, can touch but the
-smallest proportion of those who come within their walls. And even here,
-in this system, which deserves all the eulogy it receives, women have had
-but the most meager share of the benefit intended. It is only here and
-there that, spurred on by some great souled woman, wrought to white heat
-of indignation at the suffering and ignominy heaped upon these weak and
-most miserable sisters, there has grown up a better system of treatment,
-or a refuge in which reform has been made possible. Even to-day, in
-cities where reform is supposed to have perfected itself, there are
-Houses of Detention, at the mention of which compassionate judges shake
-their heads, and use any and every pretext to avoid condemning, for even
-a week, a young girl guilty of some first and slight offense, to their
-unspeakably infamous walls. Who enters there leaves hope behind, and
-life in any real sense, is over, once for all, for the sad soul that has
-learned what awaits it there.
-
-In a little town of Massachusetts, many phases of this question have long
-since been answered. The work is so quietly carried forward that few
-save those interested in philanthropic problems have any knowledge of
-its nature or scope. In the belief that its story will awaken, not only
-interest, but stronger faith in the possibilities of reform, its outlines
-are given here. From its success grew the greater work which makes the
-title of the present article, a work which would have seemed well nigh
-impossible had not such demonstration first been made of its entire
-feasibility.
-
-Practically, its foundation was laid in Dedham, thirty years or more
-ago, where a temporary asylum was afforded to women just discharged from
-prison, and much the same methods were adopted in the Springfield “Home
-for Friendless Women.” But as one of the most efficient workers wrote at
-the time: “The more thoughtful saw from the first that they were working
-only at the top of the tree, and must go to the root to accomplish real
-good in large measure. The necessity of making the term of imprisonment
-one also of instruction, was apparent; also the vital need of purifying
-the corrupted by personal contact with pure and good women, laboring
-among them in a spirit of love and sympathy.”
-
-It was not until 1870 that, after a preliminary meeting in Boston,
-officered by some of her most earnest citizens, a memorial was presented
-to the legislature, in which the need was set forth of better prisons for
-women, and of a reformatory discipline for all criminals. This was called
-“The Memorial of the Temporary Asylum for Discharged Female Prisoners in
-Dedham, and of the Springfield Home for Friendless Women and Children,
-and of others concurring with them.” The names of Whittier, Henry Wilson,
-Bishop Eastburn, and many others equally noble, were affixed, and the
-almost immediate result was the establishment of the Prison Commission
-of the state, and a few years later, the building of the separate prison
-for women at Sherborn. Thirty acres of land were purchased here, and the
-prison was placed upon a knoll, from which one of the finest views in
-the county may be had, a neighboring pond giving a full supply of pure
-water, and the facilities for drainage being excellent. The form chosen
-for building was a cross, with two more transverse sections, one at the
-front, and one for hospital purposes, at the rear. But forty-eight strong
-cells for the more refractory class were built, the majority occupying
-small, separate rooms, divided by brick partitions, and each owning a
-window. The basement has two large laundries, one for prison, the other
-for outside use, the latter bringing in a comfortable income toward
-the support of the prison. Over this laundry is the prison kitchen and
-bakery, the work in both being done by the prisoners, under supervision.
-Above this, in the third story, is the large hall used as a chapel, and
-a library adjoining it, while the second story contains two large work
-rooms, one for sewing, and the other for making chair bottoms. Sewing
-machines are in the first one, and here all the clothing for the prison
-is made, as well as a good deal for another institution. A school room is
-also on this floor, occupied six hours a day, the women going to it in
-classes, each class having an hour’s instruction a day. Here many take
-their first lessons in reading and writing; easy arithmetic and geography
-are also taught.
-
-The prison has four divisions, for the classification of convicts, the
-three higher ones each containing what is known as a “privilege room,”
-the prisoners who have obeyed the rules being allowed to spend an hour
-each evening under the supervision of the matrons, before they are
-locked in for the night. Four cheerful dining rooms are provided, and
-unlike the county jails, where prisoners eat alone from a tin pan, the
-women gather, under the supervision of matrons, each with neat plate and
-basin, learning order and decorum, and in many cases having their first
-experience of clean and palatable food. The matrons have comfortable
-rooms, commanding a view of the corridors, and a private dining room and
-kitchen in the basement. A parlor on the second floor is also at their
-disposal, thirty matrons and assistants using it in such intervals of
-leisure as come.
-
-The chief officers may be either men or women, at the pleasure of
-the Governor, these being superintendent, steward and treasurer, the
-remainder being all women, and including a deputy superintendent, a
-chaplain, a physician, school mistress, and clerk. The wishes of the
-founders were carried out in making the superintendent a woman, Mrs.
-Edna C. Atkinson’s name having become the synonym for patient and most
-faithful labor in this untried field. There are others as worthy, but
-with her, they shrink from any public recognition, content to have laid
-silently the foundation of a work which is copied in detail wherever the
-same results are desired.
-
-The hospital is a model of its kind, three stories in height, and
-thirty-two feet wide by seventy-seven long. The dispensary and wash
-room, the doctor’s sitting room and some small wards for special cases
-are on the first floor. The second one has a large ward, sunny and airy,
-with space for twenty beds, and at one side bath rooms, and a small
-room where the dead are laid until burial. The convalescent ward is on
-the third floor, and in each and all, is the exquisite neatness which
-is a revelation to every occupant. Of the physical misery that finds
-alleviation here, one can hardly speak. “Intemperance, unchastity, abuse
-from male companions, neglected childbirth, hereditary taints, poor food
-and clothing,” have all done their work, and demand all the skill the
-physician can bring to bear. The work is hard and often repulsive, but
-the sick prisoner is especially susceptible to influence, and often, when
-all means have been tried in vain, yields at last under the pressure
-of pain and gratitude for its relief, and goes out from the ward a new
-creature spiritually as well as physically.
-
-From the beginning they are made to feel that here is one spot where love
-and sympathy are certain. There is no convict dress branding them at once
-as infamous. Each division has its own; blue check of different patterns
-being chosen to distinguish the different grades. The upper ones have
-neat white aprons for Sundays. Night dresses and pocket handkerchiefs
-are provided to teach neatness, and every woman is required to have
-smooth hair and a well-cared-for person. In the nursery, an essential
-department of a woman’s prison, the babies show well fed, happy faces,
-and are as neatly and warmly clothed as the mothers. This department
-has sixty rooms, each ten by twelve, with a bed and crib for mothers
-with infants, while above it is a lying-in ward, with all necessary
-appliances. Often there is not the slightest hint of maternal instinct,
-and the mother must be watched to prevent the destruction of the child,
-but more often it is strong, and desire for reform is first awakened with
-the longing that the child should know a better life. The bright, clean
-quarters, the regular employment, the sympathy and encouragement, on
-which, no matter how skeptical or scoffing in the beginning, they come
-to depend, all foster this desire. Indifferent even to common decency
-in the beginning, unknown instincts awaken, and here is one answer to
-the argument sometimes made, that criminals have no right to attractive
-quarters. Here, again, the same worker already quoted may speak: “In the
-first place, the loss of liberty is a terrible privation, especially when
-the term of confinement is long. Most persons will bear any hardship
-rather than be confined, even in a pleasant place. The depraved women
-of our prisons are indifferent, at first, to the things which please a
-higher taste. The dark and filthy slums of Boston are far more charming
-to them than the clean and sunny prison. The work is hateful to their
-idle habits, and being unpaid, it has no motive to incite them to
-performance. The silent, separate rooms, the quiet work room, try them
-inexpressibly. There is no danger that the prison will be too tempting.
-They long for the intoxicating drink, the low carousals of their usual
-life, and when discharged from an ordinary prison, with no reformatory
-influence, eagerly rush into the old haunts, and begin anew the foul
-life.… Ferocious, indeed, are they, when long habits of intoxication,
-joined to ignorance and strong passions, are subjected to the restraints
-of a prison.”
-
-“No woman can govern a ferocious woman,” was asserted in the
-beginning, by a well known Senator; but that point settled itself
-years since, women having proved better able to control women, no
-matter how brutalized, than any man has ever been. In one case a woman
-was sent from a neighboring prison, who came determined to create
-disturbance. Insurrection seemed inevitable, such passion of revolt
-had she communicated to many, but wise management quelled it at once.
-Three strong men were necessary to convey her from the yard to the
-punishment cell, but this was done under the personal direction of the
-superintendent, and the men were allowed no violence or abuse. For days
-she remained unsubdued; then quieted, and at the end of ten was conquered
-and transformed into a quiet, orderly, obedient worker.
-
-“She was that patient and kind she did all she could for me,” was her
-comment on the superintendent, and her case is illustrative of dozens of
-the same nature. Nothing impresses them more than the unselfish nature
-of the care bestowed, and as their skill in manual labor develops,
-their interest grows with it, and they begin to take pride in what may
-be accomplished. They are ready, when the term of confinement ends, to
-lead decent lives, but they must be shielded for a time, else ruin is
-inevitable.
-
-Here, then, comes in the mission of a “Wayside Home.” The thought of
-such shelter came many years ago, to the man who gave all his life to
-making paths plainer for sinning and suffering souls, and who in the
-“Isaac Hopper Home,” as often called the “Father Hopper Home,” solved
-the problem in a degree. Even here, however, admission was conditioned
-on a letter or word of endorsement, and there was no spot in all the
-great city in which a homeless and friendless woman, without such word,
-could find temporary refuge. It remained for Brooklyn to offer such a
-possibility, and the quiet home that in the early spring of 1880 opened
-its doors, asked but three questions:
-
-“Do you need help?”
-
-“Are you homeless?”
-
-“If taken in, will you remain a month, keep the necessary rules of the
-house, and do your share of its work?”
-
-These question are “the hinge on which the door swings, and when once a
-woman crosses its threshold she stands on her honor, and is trusted just
-as far as she will allow.”
-
-Cramped for room, dependent upon voluntary contributions for furnishing,
-provisions, and all the running expenses of such an undertaking,
-the first year found them without debt, and with ninety-nine women
-sheltered and protected, sixty-two of whom found places, and, with
-but few exceptions, proved faithful and worthy of trust. During the
-second year two hundred and twenty-four were helped, cramped quarters
-forcing the managers to refuse many applications. Half of the income
-for that year was earned by the inmates, in laundry, sewing room, and
-days’ work outside. A larger house was taken, but the same principle of
-free admission continued. Many who left the Home voluntarily, and some
-even who had been expelled, returned, penitent and sorrowful, and were
-received again, and given another chance, the only bar to return being in
-the discovery that the influence of a woman in some cases did more harm
-than could be counteracted in the Home, in which case there is written
-across her name, “Not to be admitted again.”
-
-A matron and two assistant matrons are employed, the matron having
-general charge of the house, keys, and work; the first assistant, of
-sewing room and laundry; and the second of the kitchen and all household
-supplies. But thirty women can be accommodated at any one time, and it
-is hoped that a building especially for the purpose may soon give the
-added facilities so imperatively demanded. The work holds little poetry,
-and the expression of some of its subjects is so debased and apparently
-hopeless, that one gentleman, accustomed to give freely, remarked: “I see
-nothing better to do than to tie a rope round their necks and pitch them
-into the river.”
-
-The poor souls were themselves much of his mind, but a month or two gave
-a very different aspect to affairs, work and the certainty of sympathy
-bringing new life. Undisciplined and weak, in the power of appetite
-both inherited and acquired, they have fought battles whose terror the
-untempted can never know; fought and won, the roll now holding hundreds
-of names. Working against perpetual obstacle and disadvantage, the story
-of the five years is one of triumph for managers as well as managed. “We
-began,” said one of the workers, “holding in one hand the key to an empty
-house, for which the rent was paid for one month, and in the other hand
-all our worldly possessions—five dollars—and since that time we have
-bought our present home, and furnished it comfortably for our work. It
-accommodates thirty-five women, and three matrons, and we have paid on
-it $5,000, carrying a mortgage of $9,000. None of these things are the
-ultimate of our work. They are but means to an end, and that end the
-saving of the lives and souls of these women.”
-
-Effort of as extended a nature is possible only for a body of earnest
-workers, but this mere hint of its nature and results may perhaps
-convince some who have doubted its possibility, and serve as the clue
-to companion methods in country towns. Faith in possibilities, both
-human and divine, has been the condition of success for what is already
-accomplished, and the village may test these no less than the city.
-Reports filled with every practical detail may be had by addressing a
-note to “The Wayside Home, 352 Bridge Street, Brooklyn, N. Y.,” and the
-writer stands ready, at any time, to answer questions as to methods,
-assuring all doubters that, for all patient workers, success is certain.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-The finest pleasures of reading come unbidden. In the twilight alcove
-of a library, with a time-mellowed chair yielding luxuriously to your
-pressure, a June wind floating in at the windows, and in your hand some
-rambling old author, good humored and quaint, one would think the Spirit
-could scarce fail to be conjured. Yet often, after spending a morning
-hour restlessly there … I have strolled off with a book in my pocket to
-the woods; and, as I live, the mood has descended upon me under some
-chance tree, with a crooked root under my head, and I have lain there
-reading and sleeping by turns till the letters were blurred in the
-dimness of twilight.—_From Prose Writings of N. P. Willis._
-
-
-
-
-SUNDAY READINGS.
-
-SELECTED BY CHANCELLOR J. H. VINCENT, D.D.
-
-
-[_Sunday, July 5._]
-
-THE INFLUENCE OF JESUS.—(I note again, as a characteristic of the
-morality of sonship, the way in which it secures humility by aspiration,
-and not by depression.) How to secure humility is the hard problem
-of all systems of duty. He who does work, just in proportion to the
-faithfulness with which he does it, is always in danger of self-conceit.
-Very often men seem to have given up the problem in despair, and they
-lavish unstinted praise upon the vigorous, effective worker, without any
-qualifying blame of the arrogance with which he flaunts the duty that he
-does in the world’s face. “The only way to make him humble,” they would
-seem to say, “would be to make him idle. Let him stop doing duty and
-then, indeed, he might stop boasting. His arrogance is only the necessary
-price that the world and he pay for his faithfulness.” To such a problem
-the Christian morality brings its vast conception of the universe. Above
-each man it sets the infinite life. The identity of nature between
-that life and his, while it enables him to emulate that life, compels
-him, also, to compare himself with it. The more zealously he aspires
-to imitate it, the more clearly he must encounter the comparison. The
-higher he climbs the mountain, the more he learns how the high mountain
-is past his climbing. It is the oneness of the soul’s life with God’s
-life that at once makes us try to be like him, and brings forth our
-unlikeness to him. It is the source at once of aspiration and humility.
-The more aspiration, the more humility. Humility comes by aspiration.
-If, in all Christian history, it has been the souls which most looked
-up that were the humblest souls; if to-day the rescue of a soul from
-foolish pride must be not by a depreciation of present attainment, but
-by opening more and more the vastness of the future possibility; if the
-Christian man keeps his soul full of the sense of littleness, even in
-all his hardest work for Christ, not by denying his own stature, but by
-standing up at his whole height, and then looking up in love and awe and
-seeing God tower into infinitude above him—certainly all this stamps the
-morality which is wrought out within the idea of Jesus with this singular
-excellence, that it has solved the problem of faithfulness and pride, and
-made possible humility by aspiration.
-
-And yet, once more, the morality of Jesus involves the only true secret
-of courage and of the freedom that comes of courage. More and more we
-come to see that courage is a positive thing. It is not simply the
-absence of fear. To be brave is not merely not to be afraid. Courage is
-that compactness and clear coherence of all a man’s faculties and powers
-which makes his manhood a single operative unit in the world. That is
-the reason why narrowness of thought and life often brings a kind of
-courage, and why, as men’s range of thought enlarges and their relations
-with their fellowmen increase, there often comes a strange timidity. The
-bigot is often very brave. He is held fast unto a unit, and possesses
-himself completely in his own selfishness. For such a bravery as that
-the man and the world pay very dear. But when the grasp that holds a
-man and his powers is not his self-consciousness, but his obedience
-to his Father, when loyalty to him surrounds and aggregates the man’s
-capacities, so that, held in his hand, the man feels his distinctiveness,
-his distinctive duty, his distinctive privilege, then you have reached
-the truth of which the bigot’s courage was the imitation. Then you have
-secured courage, not by the limitation, but by the enlargement of the
-life. Then the dependence upon God makes the independence of man in which
-are liberty and courage. The man’s own personality is found only in the
-household of his Father, and only in the finding of his personality does
-he come to absolute freedom and perfect fearlessness.—_Phillips Brooks._
-
-
-[_Sunday, July 12._]
-
-TRUE CHRISTIANITY.—Lord Jesus Christ, thou eternal and only Prince of
-Peace! Thou most blessed and truest rest of faithful souls! Thou hast
-said, Come unto me all ye that labor and are heavy laden, and ye shall
-find rest to your souls. In the world ye shall have tribulation, but in
-me ye shall have peace.
-
-Alas! how often have I sought for rest in this world, but have not found
-it! For my soul, being immortal, can not rest or be satisfied with
-anything but thee alone; O immortal God, thou and thou alone art the rest
-of our souls. The world and all that is in it is hastening to decay; they
-all wax old as doth a garment, and as a vesture shalt thou change them,
-and they shall be changed; but thou art the same, and thy years shall not
-fail. How then shall my soul find rest in such fleeting and changeable
-things?… O God, my soul can not be satisfied but in thee, the supreme
-good. My soul hungereth and thirsteth after thee, and can not rest till
-it possess thee.…
-
-O thou rock of my salvation! in which my soul trusteth and is at rest.…
-
-O Lord Jesus, how ardent is thy charity! how pure, how free from deceit!
-how perfect! how spotless! how great! how exalted! how profound! In a
-word, how sincere and hearty is thy love! Suffer, I beseech thee, my soul
-to rest in this thy love.… Here let my poor soul rest free from fear of
-danger or disquiet. In thee let all my senses rest, that I may hear thee
-sweetly speaking, O thou highest love! Let my eyes behold thee, O thou
-celestial beauty! Let my ears hear thee, thou most harmonious music! Let
-my mouth taste, thou incomparable sweetness! Let the refreshing odors
-of life breathe upon me from thee, thou most noble flower of paradise!…
-Let my heart rejoice in thee, my true joy! Let my will desire thee
-alone, thou only joy of my heart! Let my understanding know thee alone,
-O eternal wisdom! Lastly, let all my desires, all my affections rest in
-thee alone, O blessed Jesus, who art my love, my peace, and my joy!
-
-Take out of my heart everything that is not thyself. Thou art my riches
-in poverty; thou art my honor in contempt; my praise and glory against
-reproaches; my strength in infirmity; and in a word, my life in death.
-And how, then, should I not rest in thee, who art my all in all? My
-righteousness against sin; my wisdom against folly; redemption from
-condemnation; sanctification from my uncleanness.…
-
-Let me, I beseech thee, surrender my whole heart to thee, since thou hast
-given me all thine. Let me go out of myself, that I may enter into thee.
-Let me cleanse my heart and empty it of the world, that thou mayest fill
-it with thy celestial gifts, O Jesus, the rest of my heart, the Sabbath
-of my soul! Lead me into the rest of a blessed eternity, where there are
-pleasures at thy right hand for evermore. Amen.—_Arndt, “A prayer for
-obtaining true rest and tranquility of soul.”_
-
-
-[_Sunday, July 19._]
-
-    For Prayer is a
-      Conversing with God,
-      The Key of Heaven,
-      The Flower of Paradise,
-      A Free Access to God,
-      A Familiarity with God,
-      The Searcher of His Secrets,
-      The Opener of His Mysteries,
-      The Purchaser of His Gifts,
-      A Spiritual Banquet,
-      A Heavenly Enjoyment,
-      The Honey-comb of the Spirit,
-      Honey Flowing from the Lips,
-      The Nurse of Virtues,
-      The Conqueror of Vices,
-      The Medicine of the Soul,
-      A Remedy against Infirmities,
-      An Antidote against Sin,
-      The Pillar of the World,
-      The Salve of Mankind,
-      The Seed of Blessing,
-      The Garden of Happiness,
-      The Tree of Pleasure,
-      The Increase of Faith,
-      The Support of Hope,
-      The Mother of Charity,
-      The Path of Righteousness,
-      The Preserver of Perseverance,
-      The Mirror of Prudence,
-      The Mistress of Temperance,
-      The Strength of Chastity,
-      The Beauty of Holiness,
-      The Fire of Devotion,
-      The Light of Knowledge,
-      The Repository of Wisdom,
-      The Strength of the Soul,
-      The Remedy against Faint-heartedness,
-      The Foundation of Peace,
-      The Joy of the Heart,
-      The Jubilee of the Mind,
-      A Faithful Companion in this Earthly Pilgrimage,
-      The Shield of a Christian Soldier,
-      The Rule of Humility,
-      The Forerunner of Honor,
-      The Nurse of Patience,
-      The Guardian of Obedience,
-      The Fountain of Quietness,
-      The Imitator of Angels,
-      The Conquest of Devils,
-      The Comfort of the Sorrowful,
-      The Triumph of the Just,
-      The Joy of the Saints,
-      The Helper of the Oppressed,
-      The Ease of the Afflicted,
-      The Rest of the Weary,
-      The Ornament of the Conscience,
-      The Advancement of Graces,
-      The Odor of an Acceptable Sacrifice,
-      The Encourager of Mutual Good-will,
-      The Refreshment of this Miserable Life,
-      The Sweetening of Death,
-      The Foretaste of the Heavenly Life.—_Arndt._
-
-
-[_Sunday, July 26._]
-
-SERMON ON LUKE iv, 1-13.—The _weapons_ of Jesus?—say we rather _the
-weapon_—for he has but one, it is the _Word of God_. Three times tempted,
-three times he repels the temptation by a simple quotation from the
-Scriptures, without explanation or comment. “_It is written_”—this one
-expression tells upon the tempter like a tremendous discharge upon an
-assaulting battalion. “It is written”—the devil withdraws for the first
-time. “It is written”—the devil withdraws for the second time. “It
-is written”—the devil gives up the contest. God’s word is the weapon
-which Satan most dreads—a weapon before which he has never been able
-to do aught but succumb. Most justly does Paul call it the “Sword of
-the Spirit;”[A] and John describes it, in the Revelation, as “a sharp,
-two-edged sword, proceeding out of the mouth of the Son of man.” With
-that “Sword of the Spirit” in our hands, our cause becomes that of the
-Holy Spirit himself, and we shall be as superior in strength to our
-adversary, as is the Spirit of God to the spirit of darkness. Without
-it, on the contrary, left to ourselves, we shall be as much below him as
-is man’s nature below that of angels. Adam fell, only because he allowed
-this sword to drop. Jesus triumphs, because no one can wrest it from his
-hand. But why is it that the Son of God, instead of meeting the enemy
-with some new sword brought from the heavens whence he came, took up only
-our own weapon, from that very earth where Adam had, with such cowardice,
-left it? This is for our example. From what that weapon accomplished in
-his hand, we must learn what it can do in ours. Let us, then, take it
-up in our turn; or, rather, let us receive it from him, resharpened as
-it were, by his victory, and we shall have nothing to fear. To all the
-adversary’s attacks let us oppose a simple “_It is written_,” and we
-shall render vain his every endeavor.… If after having heard him on the
-theater of temptation, scoffing at the word of God, we could (allow me
-the expression) follow him behind the scenes, and hear him confess to his
-accomplices that he is lost if he can not succeed in wresting from our
-hands this irresistible weapon! If we did but know all this, and if, like
-the valiant Eleazar, “we could keep hold of our sword till our hand clove
-unto it”—oh, then we should be invincible, yea, _invincible_!—_Monod._
-
-[A] Revelation i:16; ii:16; xix:15-21; Hebrews iv:12, “The word of God is
-quick and powerful, and sharper than any two-edged sword, piercing even
-to the dividing asunder of soul and spirit, and of the joint and marrow,
-and is a discerner of the thoughts and intents of the heart.”
-
-
-
-
-“WE SALUTE THEE, AND LIVE.”
-
-BY MARY MATHEWS-SMITH.
-
-
-     Soldiers brave, in days of old,
-     Facing dangers manifold,
-     Looked unto their king to cry—
-    “Thee we do salute, and die.”
-
-     Service for an earthly king
-     Other ending can not bring;
-     Whatso’er thy record be,
-     Death is all it gives to thee.
-
-     Christian brave, where’er thy way,
-     Thine it is with joy to say—
-    “King, to whom our hearts we give,
-     Thee we do salute, and live.”
-
-     Service for the heavenly King,
-     Love and life eternal bring;
-     He alone true life can give,
-     Him we may salute, and live.
-
-
-
-
-A GROUP OF MUMMIES.
-
-BY OTIS T. MASON.
-
-
-Whenever the word mummy is mentioned almost everybody thinks of Egypt
-and the ancient embalmers, with their tedious processes and costly
-ceremonials. The term does include the Egyptian prepared bodies, but it
-does not exclude some found elsewhere. Indeed, in Washington, there will
-be seen in close proximity, in the Smithsonian building, an exceedingly
-dry company, made up of individuals from Alaska, Arizona, Mexico,
-Kentucky, Peru, and Egypt.
-
-Whoever has marked the tender solicitude with which the things around us
-seem to beckon us in this way or in that will understand that even the
-disposal of the dead has been influenced by such suggestions. Passing
-through a dense forest one seems to hear the branches and undergrowth
-say: “Come this way, pass along here, we are opening to make way for
-you.” Well, it is so in every human art; natural objects supply the
-materials, the tools, and suggest the simplest forms. There can be no
-potters where there is no clay, no chipped arrow heads where there is
-no stone to flake, no wood carving in the arctic regions where grows no
-timber. Yet the good people in all these places have arts, they make
-excellent baskets in which they carry water and boil their meat, polished
-spearheads and axes of volcanic stone, and most delicate carvings in
-ivory or antler.
-
-As to the disposal of the dead in different regions and ages, all we
-have space to say is that the voices of nature around each people have
-told them how to perform this sad rite. In the frozen regions, where the
-ground is never thawed, no graves are dug. By the seaside the primitive
-fisherman is launched upon the wide expanse in his own canoe. In rocky
-regions cairns and cists conceal the wasting form. On the soft prairie
-mounds cover the dead out of sight. In those arid regions where the
-rainfall does not affect the atmosphere to any extent the process of
-desiccation takes place more rapidly than chemical changes. The water,
-which forms the greater part of the human body, soon removes and leaves
-but a few pounds of bones, dried flesh and skin. This may be called
-natural mummification, the process of which is aided either by extreme
-cold, extreme aridity, or preservative elements in the soil.
-
-In the National Museum there is the body of a little boy, lying on his
-back, his feet drawn up, and all sorts of curious relics hanging in the
-case with him. The body was discovered in one of the cliff ruins of the
-Cañon de Chelly, Arizona. The particular ruin referred to is on a benched
-recess, seventy-five feet above the cañon, and extends backward about
-thirty feet. The ancient Pueblo people, driven by some invading force,
-constructed their cliff houses along only a part of this bench. About
-fifty feet from the walls Mr. Thomas Kearn found a little oven-like
-cist composed of angular bowlders laid in clay. The rooflet consisted
-of sticks supporting stones and clay. At the bottom lay the little
-child, and the remains of other burials, together with grave deposits.
-Here, in this last resting place, the waters escaped so quickly and so
-quietly from the body that even the form of life was not disturbed nor
-any chemical changes awakened. So perfectly dried is this little fellow
-that even the coatings of the eye remain. This is natural embalmment
-by desiccation simply. In the Peabody Museum, at Cambridge, are dried
-bodies from Mexico, preserved in the same manner. Around them were their
-clothing and utensils, silent and patient watchers, waiting all these
-centuries to give in evidence as to how those dead people dressed, ate,
-drank, worked, and warred.
-
-In the palmy days of our grandparents there was a desiccated body
-discovered in Mammoth Cave, Kentucky. This, also, has had the good
-fortune, after many peregrinations, to find its way into the Smithsonian.
-Now, Mammoth Cave is a damp place, but the earth accumulated on the floor
-is in places full of nitrous and other preservative salts. Indeed, the
-Kentucky cave subject may be called a natural pickle.
-
-To Mr. William H. Dall we are indebted for bringing to light mummies
-from the frozen regions. At the time of their discovery by the Russians,
-the Aleuts of Unalashka had a process of mummification peculiar to
-themselves. Mr. Dall informs us that they eviscerated the bodies of
-those held in honor, removed the fatty matter, placed them for some
-time in running water, and then lashed them into as compact a bundle as
-possible. A line was placed around the neck and under the knees, to draw
-them up to the chin. If any part stuck out, the bones were broken so
-as to facilitate the consolidation. After this the body was thoroughly
-dried and packed in a wooden crate, wrapped round and round with seal,
-sea-otter, and other precious furs, enough to make a fashionable belle’s
-head swim. Over these were wrapped coarser skins, waterproof cloth of
-intestines, and fine grass mats. This crate was slung to upright poles,
-or hung, like a wall-pocket, to a peg driven into a crevice in some cave.
-In 1874 Captain E. Hennig, of the Alaska Commercial Company’s service,
-found in a cave on the island of Kagamil, near Unalashka, a number of
-these framed mummies, all but two of which the company presented to the
-Smithsonian Institution.
-
-The Egypt of America for mummies is Peru. Scarcely a museum in the world
-is without its dried dogs, guinea pigs, parrots, and human beings wrapped
-in costly cloths, and the last mentioned wearing the greatest profusion
-of gold and silver jewelry. Along with these bodies are found corn,
-beans, peanuts; pottery, gourds, and silver vases; pillows, haversacks
-and masks; knives, war clubs and spearheads; needles, distaffs, spindles,
-work-baskets and musical cradles. Thousands and thousands of the most
-interesting things turn up, almost as expressive of ancient Peruvian life
-as was the library of Sennacherib, exhumed by Layard at Kouyunjik, of
-Assyrian life.
-
-Beyond the care of the Peruvians and Bolivians in the clothing and
-encysting of the dead, it is almost certain that they left them to the
-atmosphere to manipulate. The work was done most effectually. Nothing
-can be dryer than a Peruvian mummy. It is perfectly useless to dust the
-cases containing them, and those who handle them are in a steady sneeze,
-as though invisible spirits, filled with indignation, held impalpable
-snuff-boxes to the nose. It is still more wonderful that insects have not
-done their destructive work upon these bodies. The wrappings doubtless
-were so securely made as to prevent their inroads, and must have
-contained some substance to keep them away.
-
-In the National Museum, finally, are two Egyptian mummies. It is hard to
-tell how they got into such outlandish boxes and mountings. There they
-stand, nailed and screwed into narrow, white boxes, side by side, with
-mouths open, as if Pompeian convulsions had seized and embalmed them by
-instantaneous mummification just as the curtain was falling on a grand
-duet. Now, these two bodies were really embalmed (embalsamed); all the
-other mummies were simply dried up.
-
-The Egyptians, Peruvians, and perhaps the Alaskans preserved the bodies
-as integral parts of the individual, that would be needed again. The
-others simply dried up, their depositors cherishing no belief in the
-resurrection of the body.
-
-
-
-
-A TRIP TO MT. SHASTA.
-
-Report of a lecture delivered in the National Museum of Washington, D.
-C., by Prof. J. S. Diller, of the U. S. Geological Survey.
-
-
-The Great Basin Country is bounded to the westward by the Cascade Range
-in Oregon and the Sierra Nevada Mountains in eastern California. The axes
-of these two mountain ranges make an angle of over 140° with each other,
-and at their point of intersection in northern California rises Mt.
-Shasta, one of the most conspicuous and imposing topographical features
-of the Pacific coast, above which it rises 14,440 feet. Early in the
-days of western exploration its summit was declared to be inaccessible,
-but whether this assertion was made to inspire greater respect for the
-abode of the Indian gods, or to excuse a disinclination to physical
-exertion, must ever remain a matter of conjecture. Certain it is that
-the ascent, frequently made within the last few years by ladies is not a
-remarkable feat of mountaineering. Under the direction of Captain Dutton
-of the Geological Survey, a detailed exploration of the mountain has been
-accomplished.
-
-The belt of territory bordering upon the Pacific embraces two parallel
-mountain chains, the Sierra Nevada and Cascade Range on the east, and
-the illy-defined Coast Range on the west. Between these lies the valley
-region of the Willamette and Sacramento rivers, whose headwaters are
-among that complex group of mountains through which the Klamath River, in
-a deep cañon, finds its way to the sea.
-
-Of all the volcanic regions of the world, the one to which Mt. Shasta
-belongs is the largest. It extends from Lassen’s Peak, in California,
-north through Oregon to Mt. Rainier in Washington Territory, and eastward
-far into Idaho, covering an area larger than that of France and Great
-Britain combined. Within this wide expanse are extensive plains, whose
-broad surfaces indicate that the basaltic lava beneath at the time of
-its eruption possessed such a high degree of fluidity that it spread
-out far and wide like the waters of a lake. Upon the western border the
-more viscous lavas built up the Cascade Range, whose mammoth arch is
-surmounted by numerous mighty volcanoes, among which Mt. Shasta is one of
-the most prominent.
-
-Seen from all sides Mt. Shasta presents a remarkably regular outline, and
-its beautiful conoidal form has excited the admiration of many observers.
-Its slopes are exceptional for the high angle and graceful curves of
-their inclination. The upper 3,000 feet of the mountain, where cliffs are
-most abundant, dips away toward all points of the compass at an average
-angle of 37°. Further down the mountain the slope gradually decreases in
-inclination to 20°, then to 15°, 10°, and finally the long, gentle slope
-about the base of the mountain deviates but 5° from a horizontal plane.
-In all directions from the summit of Mt. Shasta its flanks increase in
-length as they decrease in angle of inclination, presenting a curved
-mountain side concave upwards, and has the greatest curvature near the
-top. Mr. Gilbert, in his excellent monograph of the Henry Mountains,
-shows that such a curve is the natural result of erosion. In the case of
-some volcanic mountains, however, an important coöperative cause may be
-found in the fact that at each successive eruption the lava decreased in
-quantity and became more viscous. The grandest approach to Mt. Shasta
-is from the north, in the broad valley of the same name, where it is
-presented to full view, and the deepest impression of its colossal
-dimensions is experienced. It stands at the head of Shasta valley, above
-which it rises 11,000 feet, with a volume of over 224 cubic miles, and
-presents, in strange contrast with the sterility of the valley, the
-luxuriant vegetation of the forest belt. The timbered slopes lie between
-the altitudes 4,000 and 7,000 feet above the sea, and belong to the
-most magnificent forest regions of the world. Above the forest belt the
-mountain rises more than a mile into the heights of eternal snow, and its
-brilliant white slopes present an imposing contrast to the deep green of
-the pines beneath. Viewed from the southeast, Mt. Shasta appears to be
-surmounted by a single peak, but seen from the north, the upper portion
-is found to be double. The smaller of the two cones, broad topped and
-crater shaped, has been designated Shastina, to distinguish it from the
-other acute cone, which rises 2,000 feet higher and forms the summit of
-Shasta proper.
-
-The influence of temperature upon precipitation, and the limits which it
-throws about arboreal vegetation, are here most forcibly illustrated.
-In Shasta valley, at an elevation of about 3,000 feet above the sea,
-where the average temperature is high as compared with that upon the
-mountain itself, the precipitation is always in the form of rain,
-but not sufficient in quantity, especially on account of its unequal
-distribution throughout the year, to support more than a scanty growth
-of stunted trees. In the autumn storm clouds gather about the summit,
-and showers become frequent, spreading over the land in copious rains.
-Before the spring eight ninths of all the annual rain has fallen and the
-country is brilliant with living green. As summer advances the refreshing
-showers disappear and the cloudless sky affords no protection from
-the burning sun; the bright green fades away and the earth gradually
-assumes that uninviting seared aspect which pervades all nature in the
-season of drought. Upon the lower slopes of the mountain, by its cooling
-influence upon the atmosphere, the rainfall is greatly increased, and
-the vegetation is luxuriant. The vegetation is almost wholly coniferous.
-Among nearly a score of species the sugar-pine is monarch, frequently
-attaining a diameter of twelve and a height of over two hundred feet.
-Farther up the mountain these gradually give way to the firs, whose
-tall, graceful forms are in perfect keeping with the majestic mountain
-behind them. Their black and yellow spotted trunks and branches, draped
-in long pendant moss, present a weird, almost dismal aspect, making a
-fit promenade for the mythical deities supposed by the aborigines to
-inhabit the mountains. To assume that in the timber belt the slopes of
-the mountain are everywhere covered with majestic trees, would certainly
-be wide of the truth, for within the forests are large treeless tracts,
-sometimes hundreds of acres in extent. From a distance these green,
-velvety acres appear to be very inviting pastures, and present the most
-desirable path of ascent. A closer examination, however, discovers to the
-observer that instead of grass these green fields are clothed in such a
-dense shrubbery of manzanita, ceanothus, and other bushy plants, as to be
-almost impassable. One attempt to cross a patch of chaparral, or “Devil’s
-acre,” as it is sometimes appropriately called in western vernacular,
-will convince the traveler that his best path lies in the forest.
-
-As the timber gradually dwindles away from the foot of the mountain
-to almost nothing in Shasta valley, so also it diminishes in stature,
-from an altitude of 7,000 feet upwards to the snow region, where the
-precipitation is generally, if not always, in a solid form of snow in
-winter and sleet in summer.
-
-Of the tree-like vegetation, one of the pines reaches farthest up
-the slopes. Its stem grows shorter and the top flattens until, at an
-elevation of about 9,000 feet, the branches are spread upon the ground,
-so that not unfrequently the pedestrian finds his best path upon
-the tree-tops. Beyond these, on the snowless slopes, are found only
-scattered blades of grass, and the welcome little hulsea, the edelweiss
-of our Alpine regions, with its bright flowers to alleviate the arctic
-desolation of the place. The red and yellow lichens cling to the
-rocks and the tiny prolococcus flourishes in the snow, so that one is
-frequently surprised, upon looking back, to see his bloody footsteps.
-
-In the Alps, between the forests and the snow, are often found extensive
-pastures where the herds which furnish milk for the celebrated Swiss
-cheese are grazed during the milder seasons of the year. In northern
-California similar pastures do not occur about the snow-capped summits,
-probably on account of the unequal distribution of the annual rainfall.
-
-To those who are fond of novelty, the greatest interest of the upper
-portion of Mt. Shasta attaches to its glaciers. They are five in number,
-and all are found side by side upon its northern half, forming an almost
-continuous covering above 10,000 feet for that portion of the mountain
-point. Upon the northern and western slope of the mountain is the Whitney
-glacier, with its prominent terminal moraines. Next to the eastward is
-the Bulam glacier, with the large pile of debris at the lower end. Then
-comes the broad Hottums glacier and the Wintum. The Konwakitong, which is
-the smallest of the group, lies upon the southeast side of the mountain.
-Whitney glacier is more like those of the Alps than any other one of the
-group. Its snow-field lies upon the northwestern slope of the mountains,
-from whence the icy mass moves down a shallow depression between Shasta
-and Shastina. Mr. Ricksecker, who has made a careful topographical survey
-of the mountain, has measured the dimensions of all its glaciers. The
-limits of the Whitney glacier are well defined; its width varies from
-1,000 to 2,000 feet, with a length of about two and one-fifth miles,
-reaching from the summit of the mountain down to an altitude of 9,500
-feet above the sea. It is but little more than a decade since the first
-glaciers were discovered within the United States, and we should not be
-disappointed to learn that the largest of them, about the culminating
-point of the Cascade Range, would appear Liliputian beside the great
-glacier of the Bernese Oberland, and yet the former are as truly glaciers
-as the latter. In the upper portion of its course, passing over prominent
-irregularities in its bed, the Whitney glacier becomes deeply fractured,
-producing the extremely jagged surface, corresponding to the surfaces of
-the Alpine glaciers. Lower down the crevasses develop, and these, with
-the great fissure which separates it from the steep slopes of Shastina,
-attest the motion of the icy mass. They frequently open and become
-yawning chasms, reaching 100 feet into the clear, green ice beneath. Near
-its middle, upon the eastern margin, the Whitney glacier receives large
-contributions of sand, gravel and bowlders, from the vertical cliffs
-around which it turns to move in a more northerly direction. In this way
-a prominent lateral moraine is developed. From the very steep slopes
-of Shastina, upon the western side, the glacier receives additions in
-the form of avalanches. Here the snow clings to its rocky bed until the
-strain resulting from accumulation is great enough to break it from its
-moorings and precipitate it upon the glacier below. The most striking
-feature of the Whitney glacier, and that which is of greatest interest
-from a geological point of view, is its terminal moraine, which appears
-to be fully a mile in length. Its apparent length is much greater than
-the real, from the fact that the glacial ice extends far down beneath the
-covering of detritus. It is so huge a pile of light colored debris, just
-above the timber line, that it is plainly visible from afar off.
-
-In comparing the morainal material about Mt. Shasta with that of Alpine
-glaciers, a feature that is particularly noticeable is the smallness
-of the bowlders. Upon Alpine glaciers they frequently have a diameter
-greater than ten feet, but about the Whitney and other glaciers of Mt.
-Shasta they are rarely as much as three feet in diameter. This is readily
-explained by the fact that the glaciers of Mt. Shasta do not move in
-deep valleys bounded by long, deep slopes, with many high cliffs which
-afford an opportunity for the formation of large bowlders. Although the
-Whitney glacier has its boundaries more clearly defined than any of the
-other glaciers about Mt. Shasta by the depression in which it moves,
-the valley is very shallow, and one looks in vain along its slopes for
-traces of polished rocks like those so magnificently displayed on the way
-from Meiningen to Grimsel, in the valley of the Aar. Below the terminal
-moraine the milky water of Whitney creek wends its way down the northern
-slope, plunges over a fall hundreds of feet high, into a deep cañon, and
-near the base of the mountain is swallowed up by the thirsty air and
-earth. The presence of marginal crevasses, lateral and terminal moraines,
-and the characteristic milky stream which issues from the lower end, are
-proofs that the Whitney glacier still moves, but the rate of motion has
-not yet been determined. The row of stakes planted last July were covered
-with snow before the party could reach them again in the latter part of
-October.
-
-Upon the northwestern slope of the mountain, besides the Whitney glacier,
-there is the Bulam, differing chiefly in that it is contained in a
-broader, less definite valley, and forming an intermediate step toward
-the Hottum glacier, which is one of the most important and remarkable
-of the group. Unlike ordinary glaciers, it has no valley in which it is
-confined, but lies upon the convex surface of the mountain. Its upper
-surface, instead of being concave anywhere, is convex throughout from
-side to side, and its width (123 miles) is almost as great as its length
-(162 miles). At several places the surface of the glacier is made very
-rough by the inequalities of its bed. This is especially true of its
-southern portion, where prominent cliffs form the only medial moraine
-discovered upon Mt. Shasta. Throughout the greater part of its expanse
-the glacier is deeply crevassed, exposing the green ice occasionally
-to the depth of a hundred feet. The thickness of this glacier has been
-greatly overestimated. In reality, instead of being 1,800 to 2,500 feet
-thick, it does not appear where greatest to be more than a few hundred,
-for at a number of places it is so thin that its bed is exposed. Its
-terminal moraine is a huge pile, nearly half a mile in width, measured in
-the direction of glacial motion.
-
-Next south of the Hottum glacier is the Wintum, which attains a length of
-over two miles, and ends with an abrupt front of ice in a cañon. Upon the
-southeastern slope of Mt. Shasta, at the head of a large cañon, is the
-Konwakitong glacier. Notwithstanding its diminutive size, its crevasses
-and the muddy stream it initiates indicate clearly that the ice mass
-continues to move. The amount of moraine material upon its borders is
-small, and yet, of all the glaciers about Mt. Shasta, it is the only
-one which has left a prominent record of important changes. The country
-adjacent to the west side of the Konwakitong cañon has been distinctly
-glaciated so as to leave no doubt that the Konwakitong glacier was once
-very much larger than it is at the present time. The rocks on which it
-moved have been deeply striated, and so abraded as to produce the smooth,
-rounded surfaces so common in glaciated regions. At the time of its
-greatest extension the glacier was 5.8 miles in length and occupied an
-area of at least seven square miles, being over twenty times its present
-size. Its limit is marked at several places by a prominent terminal
-moraine. The thickness of the glacier where greatest was not more than
-200 feet, for several hills within the glaciated area were not covered.
-The striated surfaces and moraines do not extend up the slopes of those
-hills more than 200 feet above their bases. The thinness of the glacier
-is completely in harmony with the limited extent of its erosion, although
-the rocks are distinctly planed off, so that the low knobs and edges have
-regularly curved outlines. It is evident that a great thickness of rock
-has been removed by the ice, and that the period of ice erosion has been
-comparatively brief. During the lapse of time, however, there have been
-important climatic oscillations, embracing epochs of glacial advance and
-recession. None of the glaciers about Mt. Shasta, excepting the Wintum,
-terminate in cañons, but all of them give rise to muddy streams which
-flow in cañons to the mountain’s base. The cañons are purely the product
-of aqueous erosion, and contain numerous waterfalls, whence the streams
-in descending leap over the ends of old lava flows 50 to 300 feet in
-height.
-
-In strong contrast with the arctic condition of Mt. Shasta to-day,
-are the circumstances attending its upbuilding, when it was an active
-volcano belching forth streams of fiery lava that flowed down the slopes
-now occupied by ice. It is the battlefield of the elements within the
-earth against those above it. In its early days the forces beneath were
-victorious, and built up the mountains in the face of wind and weather,
-but gradually the volcanic energy died away and the low temperature
-called into play those destructive agents which are now reversing the
-process and gradually reducing the mountain toward a general level. A
-microscopical examination of the rocks of Mt. Shasta reveals the fact
-that it is composed chiefly, if not wholly, of three kinds of lava.
-Several small areas of metamorphic rocks occur within its borders, but
-there is no evidence to show that they form any considerable portion of
-the mountain.
-
-The range in mineralogical composition of the lavas is not extensive.
-There are only four minerals which deserved to be ranked as essential and
-characteristic constituents: they are plagioclase, feldspar, pyroxene,
-generally in the form of hypersthene hornblende, and olivine. The kind
-of lava which has by far the widest distribution upon the slopes of Mt.
-Shasta is composed essentially of plagioclase, feldspar and hypersthene,
-with some angite, and belongs to the variety of volcanic rocks which,
-on account of composition, and the place where first discovered, has
-been designated hypersthene andesite. Lava of this type has been shown
-by Messrs. Cross and Giddings of the Geological Survey to be widely
-distributed beyond the Mississippi. Upon the western slope of the
-mountain, especially in the vicinity of the prominent volcanic cone, the
-form of which suggests its name sugar loaf, the lava contains prominent
-crystals of hornblende instead of so much hypersthene and angite, and
-closely resembles the celebrated hornblende andesite lava from among
-the extinct volcanoes of central France. The third variety of lava
-which enters into the structure of Mt. Shasta is familiar to every
-one as basalt. It occurs in relatively small quantities, and has been
-extruded low down upon the slopes of the mountain. From the fact that
-there are three kinds of lava in the structure of Mt. Shasta, it must
-not be concluded that they all issued from the same volcanic vent, nor
-that they were effused from three separate and distinct openings. In
-reality, contributions to the upbuilding of Mt. Shasta have been made by
-over twenty volcanic orifices, of which two have been principal and far
-more prolific than all the parasitic events combined. This enumeration
-does not include those large fissures in the side of the cone, which are
-evidently attributable to the hydrostatic pressure of the molten mass
-within. The small number of parasitic cones on the slopes of Mt. Shasta
-is somewhat remarkable, especially when we compare it with the largest
-volcano in Europe. Although it is much higher than Etna, its base is less
-expansive, and its size about half that of the mighty monarch of the
-Mediterranean. Upon the irregular slopes of Etna there are 200 prominent
-subsidiary cones, beside over 400 of smaller size. On the contrary, Mt.
-Shasta has but a score of such accessories, and the remarkable regularity
-of its acute form forcibly expresses the highly concentrated type of
-volcanic energy which it represents.
-
-From none of the vents upon its slopes have all three kinds of lava
-escaped, but from the summits of Shasta and Shastina, which are the
-products of the two largest and most prolific vents, both hornblende
-and hypersthene andesite have been effused. All the other orifices were
-subordinate, and each furnished but one kind of lava; from seven of them
-came hypersthene andesite; eight, hornblende andesite; and the remaining
-five, basalt. The relative age of the cones which mark the position of
-the volcanic vents is indicated by the amount of degradation which each
-has suffered. Judged by this criterion, those of hornblende andesite
-are the oldest and those of basalt the youngest. The latter are for
-the most part made of lapilli, and are not crater-shaped as is usually
-the case in other portions of the Cascade Range, but are elliptical in
-form, with dome-shaped summits. The presence of considerable piles of
-ejectments about the subsidiary vents indicates that the eruptions from
-these orifices were often of a violent character. On the other hand there
-are some without a trace of lapilli, or anything else to indicate an
-interruption in the quiet flow of lava welling out of the depths.
-
-Upon the eastern slope of the mountain the cañon, excavated by Mud
-creek, brings to light the oldest Shasta lavas now exposed, and they
-are seen under such circumstances that their succession can be readily
-understood. The oldest lava known is hornblende andesite, which is now in
-an advanced state of disintegration, and it seems probable that in the
-early stages of its development a large proportion of the lavas ejected
-from Mt. Shasta were of the same mineralogical constitution. These were
-succeeded by extensive effusions of hypersthene andesite. Later in its
-history, several small streams of hornblende andesite again burst forth
-from the northeastern side of the cone, but the final effort of the
-volcanic energy was spent in the ejection of hypersthene andesite. The
-conditions which determine the oscillation in mineralogical composition
-of the lavas are as yet conjectural, but when discovered, and their
-influence demonstrated, an important step forward will have been made in
-determining the relations of many volcanic rocks.
-
-A striking feature in the structure of Mt. Shasta is the paucity of
-volcanic ashes, lapilli, and other ejected matter. Only one important
-deposit of the kind has been discovered. It clings about the summit of
-the mountain, and is evidently the product of its last eruption. The
-summit of Shastina is so regular in outline, and the shape of its crater
-so well preserved, that many have supposed it to be composed chiefly of
-scoria and ashes; but this is not the case, for its slopes are of angular
-fragments of compact lava.
-
-Mt. Shasta is almost a pure lava cone, and its remarkably regular form
-is a matter of wonder. That it is so regular is a sequence of several
-favorable circumstances. Although a score of parasitic cones spring from
-the side of the mountain, and have contributed to its upbuilding, yet
-their additions have been so small compared with the vast effusions from
-the summit craters Shasta and Shastina, as not to greatly modify the
-outline of the mountain. More important circumstances are to be found in
-the non-explosive character of the eruptions and the successive changes
-in the physical properties of the erupted lava, as the development of the
-mountain progressed.
-
-It is well known that among the volcanoes of the Hawaiian Islands the
-eruptions are quiet and effusive. The fiery streams of liquid lava course
-down the gentle slopes for many miles.
-
-Although the mountain is 14,000 feet high, its lavas have such a high
-degree of liquidity, and retain their mobility so long after eruption,
-that the base of the mountain spread by them has a diameter of about
-seventy miles, and an average slope of 5° 1,800 feet below its summit.
-Mauna Loa is nearly twenty miles in diameter. On the contrary, at a
-corresponding position its greatest diameter is less than two miles, a
-very remarkable difference, which is due chiefly to the unequal fluency
-of the two lavas. The very oldest lavas of Mt. Shasta lie buried within
-its mass, and we know nothing of their physical properties, but from an
-examination of the oldest ones now visible, it is evident that at the
-time of their eruption they possessed a higher degree of fluidity, and
-were more voluminous than those of later date. The long, gentle slopes
-about the base of the mountain are formed by comparatively old lavas.
-Ascending the mountain, one goes up as if upon a giant staircase, with
-long, inclined steps rising abruptly over the ends of successive shorter
-and newer lava flows.
-
-It is evident in comparing the older and newer lava flows of Mt. Shasta
-that there has been a more or less regular decrease in the quantity of
-lava extruded during successive eruptions, and this is exactly what
-we should expect when we consider that as the pipe is lengthened by
-successive effusions, the hydrostatic pressure of the columns of lava
-within is gradually augmented. The increased compress of the lava flows
-toward the summit of the mountain indicates that the lava of successive
-extrusions became more and more viscous until at last the eruptions
-became explosive, and gave rise to the ejectments now clinging upon the
-upper slopes of the mountain to evidence the character of the final
-outburst.
-
-It is not only possible, but very probable that the increased viscosity
-of lava toward the closing scenes of the volcano is correllated to the
-diminution of temperature. Since the beginning of the historic period
-there have been no eruptions from Mt. Shasta, but the freshness of its
-lavas indicate that not many centuries ago, with other volcanoes of the
-Cascade Range, it was in a state of vigorous activity, and groups of
-hot springs and fumeroles about the summit still attest the presence of
-smouldering volcanic energy, which may perhaps some day break through its
-confining walls.
-
-The upbuilding of Mt. Shasta is but a matter of yesterday, as compared
-with the lapse of ages, since the birth of some of its neighbors. The
-complex group of mountains to the westward, embracing the Scott, Trinity,
-Salmon and Siskiyou, are composed in large part, at least, of ancient
-crystalline rocks of both aqueous and igneous origin; through these the
-rivers have cut deep cañons, the Klamath, on its way to the Sacramento
-southward, from the very base of Mt. Shasta to its broad valley
-stretching from the Sierra Nevada to the Coast Range. The cañon of the
-Sacramento was cut down to nearly its present level, and the mountains
-sculptured into existing forms long before the eruptions of Mt. Shasta
-had ceased, for a fiery deluge escaping from the southern slope of Mt.
-Shasta entered the Sacramento cañon, and as a lava stream 200 feet deep
-followed its course for over fifty miles.
-
-Towering more than a mile above its neighbors, perhaps the youngest of
-the group, Mt. Shasta is the end of a long series of volcanoes in the
-Cascade Range, stretching northwest to Mt. Tacoma. This range, composed
-chiefly of volcanic material, is cut across by the cañons of the Columbia
-and the Klamath rivers, in the former of which, beneath a thickness of
-3,500 feet of lava, are found strata containing Tertiary fossils. At the
-southern base of Mt. Shasta, in the cañon of the McLoud River, similar
-beds of volcanic debris are found, but without fossils, nevertheless it
-is evident that the main mass of the Cascade Range and its volcanoes
-originated in recent geologic times, and from the fact that solfataras,
-fumeroles, and hot springs are still abundant upon their slopes, they can
-not be reckoned among those which are wholly extinct.
-
-A frontiersman in Washington Territory tells of an outburst of Mt. St.
-Helens in the winter of 1841-2.
-
-Upon somewhat more trustworthy authority it is said that to the southward
-of Mt. Shasta, about forty miles, a small cone which may be considered
-parasitic to Lassens Peak, has been in eruption as late as January,
-1850, ejecting considerable ashes and cinders, and pouring forth a mass
-of lava, which gradually spread, attaining a circumference of over four
-miles, and presenting an abrupt embankment-like termination upon all
-sides eighty to ninety feet in height. Trees, blackened by the fiery
-stream, are still standing to furnish incontestable evidence of its
-recency.
-
-The country is full of rumors of subterranean rumblings, and the people
-are prone to attribute them to the dying throes of volcanic energy.
-
-One of the most striking features of the region is the strongly
-contrasted types of volcanic action in Mt. Shasta. Both have
-approximately the same area. In the valley there have been many scores of
-volcanic vents, among which the energy has been so widely diffused that
-none of them have furnished lava sufficient to form a hill more than a
-few hundred feet in height.
-
-On the contrary, the mountain represents a small number of vents, and the
-volcanic was nearly all concentrated in one place, so that the extrusions
-were all piled up, one upon another, and resulted in the upbuilding of
-one majestic elevation.
-
-Thus it has been from a small beginning, probably in early Tertiary
-times, that by successive boilings over, so to speak, additions have
-been made to the mountain until it attained a height beyond its present
-altitude. The constructive agents reached their limit, dissipated their
-energy, and gave way to destructive ones, which are gradually undoing the
-work.
-
-Mt. Shasta must ever be one of the most popular mountains among tourists
-of the West. It is easily accessible from a main line of travel which
-passes by its base, at Berryvale, where comfortable quarters and
-necessary outfit for the ascent can be obtained.
-
-The streams are filled with trout, and the forest with game, so that the
-region affords many attractions for the sportsman.
-
-Several hours’ travel by a good trail brings the party to Camp Ross,
-at the timber line, from which the ascent can easily be made in a day
-without danger.
-
-
-
-
-REASSUREMENT.
-
-BY ADA IDDINGS GALE.
-
-
-    Fear not, heart—though round thee ply
-    Battle’s emblems—far and nigh.
-    Though thy comrades round thee fall—
-    Ensigns totter on the wall—
-    Though the long battalions grim
-    Seem to cloud thy future’s rim.
-    If amidst the wild affray
-    Thou grow sick, and turn away—
-    Pause: that would be worst of all,
-    If in fleeing, thou should’st fall.
-    Stand fast, girt with sword and shield—
-    If thou fall, fall in the field.
-    What matters it if sad defeat
-    Meet thy eager, hurrying feet;
-    What, if when the banners wave
-    Thou should’st find a shallow grave.
-
-    Foeward, bravely turn thy face,
-    Seek no measure small of grace;
-    And when loud the trumpets call,
-    Bravely stand or bravely fall.
-    Whether vict’ry or defeat,
-    Laurel wreath or winding sheet
-    Be thy meed—’twill differ not,
-    Soon or late ’twill be forgot.
-    Only thou, heart, e’er shalt know
-    Thy deserved praise here below.
-    Thou, and One that on his throne
-    Ne’er forgets to watch his own,
-    One that marks where sparrows flee,
-    Thee will guard with equity.
-    Then be brave with all thy might—
-    This thy guerdon—for the right.
-
-
-
-
-WILL IT PAY?
-
-BY CHARLES BARNARD.
-
-
-There are some people who always ask this question. You may suggest
-anything, a book to read, a science to be studied, or some new work to be
-done, and, though they may not be so rude as to say so, they will wonder
-how it will pay. “Better not go into farming, my boy. It doesn’t pay.”
-“Better not do this or do that. It won’t pay you.” After a little more
-of this sort of thing you wonder if it pays to be born, or to live, or
-to do anything whatever. Now, what do they mean by this question? By far
-the larger part of those who ask it mean that the work, whatever it may
-be, does not pay a handsome return in money. A few mean something quite
-different. They know all about it, they have seen the world, and it is
-all a hollow show, and their favorite dolls are full of sawdust. These
-people are dead, but they have forgotten it.
-
-Let us see about this. If there is any one business in the world about
-which the people in it are sure it does not pay, it is farming. “It does
-not pay.” So many people have said this that people who are not farmers
-have really come to think it must be so. Is it true? Here is an ear of
-field corn with twelve rows of grains, and twenty grains to a row. Fair
-average corn, with 240 grains to the ear. We can take off one grain
-and plant it in the ground, and within six months have two ears of the
-same corn, or 480 grains from one grain. How big a profit is that? One
-grain increases to 480 grains. Is there any manufacturing business, art
-or profession that pays such an enormous return? In spite of this they
-say it does not pay. Then there must be something the matter with the
-business. Nature has provided that the increase of plants shall be very
-great. One seed may increase a hundred fold, or five hundred fold, or a
-thousand fold. Clearly the work of raising plants with such advantages
-in its favor ought to pay, and if it does not, it is equally clear that
-something is wrong, some one to blame.
-
-The city housekeeper finds at her store on the avenue a head of lettuce.
-Rather wilted and damaged by rough handling. Six cents. You can plant
-43,560 heads of lettuce on one acre of ground. At six cents a head that
-is $2,613.60 taken out of one acre of land inside of eight weeks. And
-yet this person gravely tells us lettuce raising does not pay. What can
-the matter be, and where has all this money gone? A city like New York
-will calmly eat 40,000 heads of lettuce in a day or two, and pay out over
-$2,000 for it, and be ready to eat and pay as much more the next week.
-The money is certainly paid to somebody, and if the farmer still insists
-it does not pay to raise the lettuce, there must be a reason for it.
-
-Ask the groceryman. He replies that he must live and must have a good
-slice out of the money to pay him for buying the lettuce down town and
-bringing it up to his store. It isn’t so evident that he must live as he
-fancies, because there was a time when there were no storekeepers and
-the world got along beautifully without them. However, he is convenient,
-and we will allow him his slice out of the profits. The teamster, the
-wholesale dealer, the freight handler, the railroad people all say that
-they too must live, and to please them we will admit that is so, though
-there is not much to prove it. They must share in the $2,000 paid for
-the acre of lettuce. Lastly, the farmer gets what the others decide he
-may have after they have had what they decide is their share. If we ask
-each one of this row of men, it is quite possible each one will say it
-does not pay, but, somehow, none except the farmer says anything about
-it. The last man, the actual producer of the lettuce, is the only one to
-complain. His business is the only one concerned that people say does not
-pay.
-
-There was once a young man who started out bravely in life, resolved
-to reform the world. After trying for some time he gave it up and was
-ever after entirely contented if he paid his board regularly every week.
-It is useless to think we can reform this matter all in a day. The day
-will come when these things will be changed and equity and justice will
-take the place of the utter selfishness that now marks competition in
-business. Our best plan is to see what we can do to become producers
-ourselves. We want the lettuce ourselves. We must pay the retail price
-for it, and if at this price there is a big profit in raising it, we
-would like the entire profit placed in our hands. The people in these
-United States are divided into two great classes—the producers and the
-consumers—those who raise things to eat, and those who are in other
-trades and eat without producing. The producers are the farmers and
-fishermen. The consumers make all the rest of the people. The producers
-also eat, but their food costs them very much less than the food used
-by the non-producers. Of course we can see there must be non-producers
-or the trades and arts would perish, and the nation would become a mere
-agricultural community, content with sleeping and eating. At the same
-time, we must observe that a very large proportion of those who produce
-nothing live in small towns and villages and own land. We see everywhere
-in our smaller cities and towns hundreds of homes having gardens about
-the house. A little discouraged grass, a dyspeptic tree or two, a forlorn
-grape vine straggling over the fence, plenty of dusty gravel, and a
-mortgage on the house and lot. Within the house bitter complaints against
-the high price of food, much fretfulness and weariness at the scant,
-monotonous bill of fare. Boys and girls growing up with white hands and
-narrow chests (to say nothing of stomachs that they should be ashamed to
-own) and the storekeeper saving money on the next corner.
-
-This is the reason it does not pay. We want to have white hands and be
-genteel and all that. We want to be consumers, and we unwittingly combine
-to get all we can out of the selling and handling of food and leave the
-producer as little as we think he can be forced to take. We must get rid
-of this imported nonsense about work. (It all came from Europe, and is
-wholly un-American.) We must make the land give us more food. Our boys
-and girls must go out of doors, must learn to be producers. They should
-be shown that it is disgraceful to live in a mortgaged house, that it is
-disgraceful to stand on any part of God’s ground and complain that food
-is scarce or high when that food might come out of the very ground under
-our ungrateful feet. The Chinese, the Japanese, the Dutch, the French,
-the Swiss cultivate every rod of ground they own. No barren yards about
-their houses, taxed and yet paying no return. Why, in England even the
-strips of waste land along the railway tracks are cultivated, and the
-trains move between rows of cabbages half a hundred miles long.
-
-This is the way for thousands of families to make it pay. Produce your
-own food and sell it to yourselves. A head of lettuce grown on your own
-ground and eaten on your own table saves the retail price of a head of
-lettuce, and if there is a profit on it for all the people who touch it,
-clearly you have the entire profit for yourself. On reading this about
-five hundred people will calmly remark that this is not so. They have
-tried it and it cost more to raise their own vegetables than it did to
-buy them at the stores. The wages of the gardener come to more than all
-the things were worth. So much the worse for the gardener. You should
-be your own gardener. Where are your boys and girls? At the base ball
-grounds, or the rink, or at the foolish piano—doing nothing—earning
-nothing and trying to be genteel? Garden work is hard on the back and
-hurts the hands. Yes, because your hands are weak and your back is not
-strong, and of these things you should be ashamed.
-
-The price of land in this country is steadily rising. All the best farm
-land is being taken up. The cost of food is advancing. It will never
-again be as cheap as it has been in the past. The time has come when we
-must economize. We can not longer afford to carry those neglected garden
-plots and waste spaces about our houses. They must produce food for the
-people who own them. We must be our own producers. We must study plants
-and animals. These represent food and wealth, and it is simply an untruth
-to say it will not pay to raise them. If your garden costs more than the
-retail price of food in your neighborhood the fault is your own. There
-is something the matter with your soil or your seeds, or your method
-of culture. Think of the profit of raising lettuce at $2,000 an acre,
-and yet that is the return that an acre will produce if paid for at the
-retail price. Moreover, the lettuce would be removed from the ground in
-ample time for another crop, likewise bringing a profit. Of course, if
-your land is worth five dollars a foot, the interest on one foot would
-be more than the value of the single lettuce plant you could raise upon
-it. In such a case you had better sell out and buy cheaper land. For
-the majority of homes where there is a garden the land is cheap enough
-to produce more or less of the food needed in the house, and there is no
-reason whatever why it may not be raised at a handsome profit.
-
-The Chautauqua University recognizes the importance of this matter. Its
-aim is to help, to guide, and to instruct, and it is now, through the
-liberality of its friends, able to help, guide and instruct all who wish
-to learn something of the art of producing food and saving money. It sees
-hundreds of boys and girls totally ignorant of these common things. It
-sees young people wondering what they shall do, perplexed and worried
-over this question of earning a living, and discouraged at the high cost
-of living, when a part of their living is going to waste beneath their
-feet. The Chautauqua Town and Country Club was formed to help those
-who wish to help themselves. It aims to show by simple lessons how to
-raise plants of all kinds, how to care for animals, how to take care of
-your garden so that it will be a source of pleasure and profit. Half
-a thousand people have already joined the club and are now at work in
-good earnest. Should you wish to know more about it, write to Miss K. F.
-Kimball, Plainfield, N. J.
-
-All this is meant for you.
-
-What are you going to do about it?
-
-
-
-
-GEOGRAPHY OF THE HEAVENS FOR JULY.
-
-BY PROF. M. B. GOFF,
-
-Western University of Pennsylvania.
-
-
-THE SUN,
-
-Of which so much has been said in these pages, continues to be
-discussed with increasing interest by astronomers of both hemispheres,
-who every day supply their quota of new ideas as the result of their
-investigations. In THE CHAUTAUQUAN for March, 1884, the statement was
-made that “it has already been demonstrated that the colored prominences
-may be examined at any time when the sun can be seen; and it is believed
-that Mr. Huggins has accomplished the difficult feat of photographing
-the corona, so that it, too, may be scrutinized _at leisure_.” In the
-April number of the _Nineteenth Century_, we find a very interesting
-account by Mr. Huggins himself, of his operations in this line. As yet
-the experiments have not been in all respects satisfactory; but so much
-has been done as to leave no doubt of the final result. As Mr. H. tells
-us, the great obstacle to overcome is the immense curtain of air, which
-“hangs” between us and the sun, and absorbs some forty per cent. of the
-sun’s light (and heat). This absorption renders our atmosphere as light
-at least as the sun’s corona, and makes it as difficult of observation
-as a lesser light placed behind a greater. The same atmosphere being as
-bright, or brighter, than the stars, prevents our seeing the latter in
-daylight. During an eclipse of the sun, the shadow of the moon affords
-us a long, funnel shaped tube through this great air curtain (which may
-be forty, or one hundred, or more miles in thickness) and we are enabled
-through it to see the sun’s corona. But “on an average, once in two years
-this curtain of light is lifted for from _three_ to _six_ minutes”—a very
-contracted period in which to obtain a knowledge of a phenomenon that
-we know is constantly changing. If we had a Joshua, who could command
-sun, moon and earth to stand still for the space of a few hours even, we
-might discover what we so much wish to know, what is this corona. Or, if
-we could go beyond this atmosphere of ours—place it between us and the
-earth, we might do without a Joshua. But we can not get outside. Then the
-next best thing is to get as nearly outside as possible. Dr. Copeland
-tried this by climbing an elevation of 12,400 feet. Prof. Langley
-ascended Mt. Etna, and on Mt. Whitney ascended to the height of 15,000
-feet; but at these heights the curtain was still too heavy, and no view
-of the corona was obtained; or, as Prof. Langley expressed it, he “met
-with entire non-success.” From reports in regard to observations made
-in Egypt of the total eclipse of 1882, Mr. Huggins conceived the idea
-of making a photographic plate so sensitive that it would distinguish
-differences imperceptible to the eye, and on this plate take a picture
-of the corona, and then examine it as one would the “photo” of a friend,
-and mark its peculiarities. He made his first experiment in 1882, and
-as a result “there seemed to be good ground to hope that the corona had
-really been obtained upon the plates.” In 1883, a second attempt, under
-more favorable circumstances was made, and “images of the sun exquisitely
-defined, and free from all sensible trace of instrumental imperfection
-were obtained.” On the 6th of May of the same year (1883) a total eclipse
-of the sun occurred at Caroline Islands, and was there photographed by
-Messrs. Lawrence and Woods, photographers of the Royal Society; and on
-a comparison of these photographs of the sun’s corona during an eclipse
-with his own taken both before and after the time of the eclipse (which
-was not visible to Mr. H.), he had the satisfaction of seeing so strong
-a resemblance as to convince him that he had photographed the corona
-without an eclipse. Although having no doubt of the success of his
-experiment, yet, on account of the unfavorable conditions of the climate,
-it was determined to try a higher elevation; and the Riffel, near
-Zarmatt, Switzerland, was selected as a suitable place to make further
-trials. Mr. Ray Wood was selected as artist, and reached Riffel in July,
-1884. But unfortunately, the “veil of finely divided matter of some
-sort,” “of which we have heard so much in the accounts from all parts
-of the earth of gorgeous sunsets and after-glows” seriously interfered
-with the work; nevertheless, a number of plates were obtained on which
-the corona showed itself with more or less distinctness. Not satisfied
-with these results, Mr. Woods was deputed to go to the Cape of Good Hope,
-where, under the direction of Dr. Gill, he is to make, or is, perhaps,
-now making daily photographic representations of the corona, and laboring
-fully to realize the anticipations of the esteemed Mr. Huggins.
-
-Meantime our sun makes his accustomed rounds, bringing with him the usual
-accompaniments, hot weather and the “dog days.” He will on the 1st rise
-at 4:34 a. m. and set at 7:33 p. m.; on the 16th, rise at 4:43 a. m., set
-at 7:28 p. m.; and on the 30th, rise at 4:56 a. m., and set at 7:17 p. m.
-During the month the length of the day will decrease from 15 h. 1 m. on
-the 1st to 14 h. 21 m. on the 30th. The declination will in the same time
-decrease four degrees and forty-three minutes.
-
-
-THE MOON
-
-Enters upon its last quarter on the 5th, at 7:18 a. m.; new moon occurs
-on the 12th, at 12:07 a. m.; first quarter on the 18th, at 7:11 p. m.;
-full moon on the 26th, at 9:14 p. m. In perigee, or nearest the earth, on
-the 11th, at 8:24 p. m.; in apogee, or farthest from the earth, on 25th,
-at 4:18 a. m. Reaches its greatest elevation above the horizon, 66° 55′,
-on the 11th; least elevation, 30° 7′, on the 23d. On the 1st, rises at
-10:00 p. m.; on the 16th, sets at 10:26 p. m.; on the 30th, rises 9:05 p.
-m.
-
-
-MERCURY
-
-On the 13th, at 6:57 a. m., is 5° 39′ north of the moon; on the 17th, at
-9:00 a. m., 11′ south of Venus; and on the 26th, at 2:00 a. m., 11′ south
-of _Alpha_ in the constellation _Leo_, a very interesting conjunction,
-but not visible to the naked eye. Mercury has a direct motion during the
-month of 51° 51′; and his diameter increases from 5″ to 6.8″. On the 1st,
-he rises at 4:56 a. m., and sets at 7:56 p. m.; on the 16th, rises at
-6:23 a. m., and sets at 8:31 p. m.; on the 30th, rises at 7:16 a. m., and
-sets at 8:22 p. m.
-
-
-VENUS
-
-Makes but little show this month, being too near the “Source of Light.”
-She will be evening star throughout the month, growing brighter as the
-days pass by; her diameter increasing from 10.4″ on the 1st to 11.2″ on
-the 30th. She has a direct motion of 38° 8′ 45″. On the 1st, rises at
-5:50 a. m., sets at 8:34 p. m.; on the 16th, rises at 6:25 a. m., sets at
-8:33 p. m.; and on the 30th, rises at 6:57 a. m., sets at 8:23 p. m. On
-the 13th, at 10:21 p. m., 5° 22′ north of the moon; on 17th, at 9:00 a.
-m., 11′ north of Mercury.
-
-
-MARS
-
-Will be a morning star during this month. On the 1st rising at 2:30 a.
-m., and setting at 5:08 p. m.; on the 16th, rising at 2:11 a. m., setting
-at 5:01 p. m.; and on the 30th, rising at 1:54 a. m., setting at 4:50 p.
-m. His diameter increases one tenth of a second of arc, and he makes a
-direct motion of 22° 56′. On the 9th, at 3:44 p. m., he is 5° 1′ north of
-the moon.
-
-
-JUPITER.
-
-_Et tu, Jupiter_, art on the wane. Each day he sets more nearly with the
-sun, and his diameter grows smaller, though monarch still of all the
-planets. He rises on the 1st, 16th and 30th, at 9:00, 8:14, and 7:33 a.
-m., respectively, and sets on the corresponding days at 10:19, 9:28, and
-8:39 p. m. He makes a direct motion of 5° 25′ 42″. On the 15th, at 2:02
-a. m., is 3° 7′ north of the moon.
-
-
-SATURN.
-
-Those who have not improved the past few months to obtain a view of the
-beauties of this planet can not blame the writer. Their attention has
-been called to the fact that his rings stand more widely open now than
-they will again for fifteen years. But they need not despair; for in the
-delightful coolness of a summer morning they may still improve their
-opportunities; for Saturn rises the latter part of this month nearly with
-the dawn, and those who care to leave their “downy couch” can catch him
-before the rising of the sun. 3:56, 3:05, and 2:18 a. m., on the 1st,
-16th and 30th will find him “at home;” and in August an earlier hour
-will suit as well. During the month his diameter increases two tenths
-of a second. On the 10th, at 5:48 p. m., he may be found 4° 7′ north of
-the moon; and on the 20th, one minute south of the star _Eta_ in the
-constellation _Gemini_.
-
-
-URANUS.
-
-This planet, on the 1st, rises at 11:14 a. m., and sets at 11:20 p. m.;
-on the 16th, rises at 10:17 a. m., sets at 10:23 p. m.; on the 30th,
-rises at 9:25 a. m., sets at 9:29 p. m. No change in diameter, which
-remains at 3.6″. On the 16th, at 6:37 p. m., 34′ north of the moon.
-
-
-NEPTUNE.
-
-This slow motioned body, of which we know so little, and which not more
-than one person out of 10,000 ever saw, makes a direct motion during the
-month of 42′ 55″; its diameter is 2.6″; and on the 8th, at 6:59 a. m.,
-its position is 2° 33′ directly north of the moon. It may be interesting
-to know that it will be a morning star which “will _not_ light the
-traveler on his way,” during the entire month. Its times of rising are
-1:52 a. m. on the 1st; 12:57 a. m. on the 16th, and at midnight on the
-30th.
-
-
-
-
-HOW AIR HAS BEEN LIQUEFIED.
-
-BY J. JAMIN,
-
-Of the French Academy.
-
-
-In the interval between 1602 and 1626 four philosophers were born who
-seem to have been divinely appointed to teach men the mysteries of air.
-These were a German, Otto von Guericke (1602); two Frenchmen, Mariotte
-and Pascal (1620, 1623), and finally an Englishman, Boyle (1626). Pascal
-conceived the idea that air being material must have weight like other
-materials, and consequently that the earth must be pressed upon by its
-atmospheric envelope, and he proved this by the celebrated experiment at
-Puy de Dôme.
-
-Soon after, Otto von Guericke, having invented the air pump, succeeded in
-exhausting the air from a vessel and confirmed Pascal’s idea that air was
-really heavy, while Mariotte and Boyle at the same time, each in his own
-country, and by almost identical experiments, proved that air is elastic,
-that its volume decreases by pressure, and generally in proportion to the
-weight to which it is subjected. Mariotte modestly called this discovery
-a rule of nature. We call it a physical law, and very suitably name it
-in France “Mariotte’s Law,” and in England “Boyle’s Law.”
-
-It seemed necessary for science to collect her thoughts after this great
-achievement. She seemed to think there was nothing more to discover.
-Boyle and Mariotte would have been very much astonished if some one had
-told them that this air, whose properties they had been demonstrating,
-could be reduced to a liquid like water, and even to a solid like snow.
-Nearly two centuries passed before the world was prepared for this new
-discovery. We ourselves were ignorant of it until the month of April,
-1883, when the Academy of Sciences received from Cracow these two
-dispatches:
-
-    “Oxygen completely liquefied; the liquid colorless as carbonic
-    acid.” (April 9th.)
-
-    “Nitrogen frozen, liquefied by expansion; the liquid colorless.”
-    (April 16th.)
-
-                                                        WROBLEWSKI.
-
-Thus air has been reduced to a volume a thousand or fifteen hundred
-times less than under ordinary conditions. It ceased to be a gas and took
-the appearance of water. This astonishing result is only the last in a
-long list of experiments which for a long time were fruitless; it is the
-finishing touch to a building begun long ago, and on which many workmen
-have labored. What has been the work of each of them? It is a long story.
-
-Van Marum, a philosopher and chemist of Harlem, is celebrated as the
-constructor of an electric machine, the largest known, but he is more
-justly celebrated for having been the first to liquefy a gas. Wishing
-to know if ammonia would obey Mariotte’s law, he compressed it. Under a
-pressure of six atmospheres it changed quickly to a transparent liquid.
-Van Marum did not foresee the consequences of his experiments, and is
-honored only as being the first successful performer of the experiment.
-But Lavoisier, whose keener mind grasped all that these results implied,
-did not hesitate to declare the general law that all substances were
-capable of existing in three different states, and he illustrated his
-belief most forcibly. “Let us consider for a moment what would happen to
-the different substances which form the earth, if the temperature should
-be quickly changed. Let us suppose that the earth were suddenly placed in
-a region where the temperature would be much above that of boiling water;
-soon the air, all liquids which can be vaporized at a temperature near
-that of boiling water, and many metallic substances even, would expand,
-be transformed into air-like fluids, and form part of the atmosphere.
-
-“On the contrary, if the earth should be suddenly placed in a very cold
-temperature, for example, that of Jupiter or Saturn, the water of our
-rivers and seas, and, probably, the greatest number of liquids which we
-know would become solid.”
-
-“Air,” according to this supposition, or at least a part of the air-like
-substances which compose it, “would doubtless cease to exist in its
-present form; it would be changed to a liquid state, and this change
-would produce new liquids of which we know nothing.”
-
-Lavoisier was mistaken about the temperature of Jupiter and Saturn, but
-was right in his supposition that air would become a liquid; however,
-as experiment did not prove the theory, the prediction was forgotten
-and the question dropped. It slept a long time, for it was not until
-1823 that it was revived by Faraday. The first experiments of this great
-philosopher were on this subject. He was but twenty-two when he made
-his first discovery, the liquefaction of chlorine. The details of this
-experiment have been told by Tyndall. It is well known that when chlorine
-gas and cold water are united, crystals are formed which contain to every
-molecule of chlorine ten molecules of water. Faraday put some of these
-into a closed tube and heated them until two separate liquids appeared;
-one was water, the other floated on the surface of the water, and a
-certain professor of Paris declared that it could be nothing but oil
-carelessly left in the vessel. Faraday having opened the tube, found that
-this substance began to boil, and then changed with an explosion into a
-green gas. It was chlorine. Faraday, who was quick-tempered, immediately
-took his revenge on the professor, to whom he wrote: “You will be pleased
-to know, sir, that the oil left by carelessness in my apparatus was
-nothing less than liquefied chlorine.”
-
-This first success decided the career of the young chemist. He announced
-that all gases could be reduced to this state if subjected to a
-sufficient pressure, and he undertook a series of experiments, of which
-the success was doubtful, but the danger certain. He operated in this
-way: He took a thick glass tube in the form of an inverted U; one branch
-was left empty, in the other the materials for producing the gas to be
-studied were placed and the whole closed. Obliged to gather in the empty
-branch, the gas continually increased in pressure, and there were two
-possible results to the experiment; either the gas would not change its
-state, and the pressure would increase until the vessel broke, or when a
-certain limit of pressure was reached, then the liquid would appear and
-would continue to accumulate as long as the gas was disengaged. A dozen
-gases were reduced in this way; among them were the following, which we
-shall need: Ammonia, sulphurous acid, carbonic acid, and protoxide of
-nitrogen, which at a temperature of ten degrees required a pressure equal
-to sixty atmospheres.
-
-This pressure leaves no doubt about the danger which one runs in carrying
-on such researches. If we remember that steam boilers generally support
-a pressure of no more than ten atmospheres, if we recall the number and
-the horror of their explosions we can hardly understand how a simple
-glass tube could resist a pressure five or six times as great. When a gas
-reaches the point of liquefaction, then the pressure ceases to increase,
-but if it does not change from that condition the pressure increases
-until an explosion necessarily occurs, and the debris of the vessel is
-scattered as powder scatters the fragments of a shell. In the course of
-Faraday’s researches he had thirty explosions. They did not stop him, but
-it is easy to see that they did not encourage others.
-
-Happily there is a less dangerous method of reaching the same result,
-it is to freeze the gas. In the same way that the vapor of water is
-condensed when the temperature is lowered, so gases, which are really
-vapors, will yield to sufficient cold. In 1824, Bussy succeeded in
-condensing sulphurous acid gas. The gas was introduced into a balloon,
-which was plunged into a freezing mixture of ice and salt. The gas was
-liquefied and could be preserved indefinitely, if the balloon were
-enclosed in an enamel vessel. In heating, it gave off vapors which, by
-their pressure kept the remainder of the fluid, providing the glass was
-strong enough. Thus, in two ways, by cold and by pressure, and still
-better, by both combined, it is possible to liquefy a large number of
-gases.
-
-When water is heated, it remains immovable up to 100 degrees Centigrade,
-but then it is changed into vapor, or boils. This boiling is
-characterized by a peculiar feature, the temperature remains fixed at
-100 degrees. It must be concluded, therefore, that the heat produced by
-the furnace and absorbed by the liquid is simply used in transforming
-the water into vapor. This fact was first discovered by the English
-philosopher, Black, who, not being able to explain the phenomenon, was
-content to demonstrate it and to speak of the heat as _latent_. He saw
-that it took five and a half times as long to change water into vapor
-as to heat it from zero to 100 degrees, and that consequently it must
-require five and a half times as much heat to work the change. Such is
-the law of boiling in the air, but let us see what it is in a vacuum.
-
-It is clear that the pressure of the atmosphere on water is a hindrance
-to its expansion into vapor, and that this hindrance increases or
-diminishes with the pressure. In a vacuum, of course, the liquid is
-free from the pressure, so that boiling ought to take place at a lower
-temperature.
-
-And experiment teaches that this is the case; water boils at a
-temperature of 82° or 65°, as the pressure is reduced to one half or a
-quarter of an atmosphere, it boils at zero, and even below, in a vacuum.
-And we reach this remarkable result, that the boiling and freezing points
-unite, and that ice is formed while vapor is set free. But, although the
-boiling is advanced, although it takes place at zero instead of at 100
-degrees, although the vapor is cold instead of hot, and the change takes
-place in a vacuum instead of in the air, it is a general law that a large
-quantity of heat is used, becomes latent, and enters into the formation
-of vapor.
-
-Supposing that we fill a bronze vessel of very thick sides with water,
-close it with a lid and fit into it a valve loaded with lead. Place this
-in a furnace whose temperature has been raised to, say, 230 degrees. The
-water will reach this temperature, and vapor will accumulate until it
-reaches a pressure equal to more than twenty-seven atmospheres.
-
-Let us now open the valve, the vapor will escape, and as it carries with
-it the heat necessary for its expansion, the temperature of the water
-will gradually fall until it reaches 100 degrees, after which the boiling
-will continue slowly and regularly; thus the water has been cooled and is
-kept below the temperature of its surrounding wall because it must absorb
-the extra heat which is required to change it to vapor. This apparatus is
-called Papin’s digester.
-
-There is a similar experiment, but performed in a vacuum at the ordinary
-temperature. Put some water into a closed decanter which is connected by
-a tube with an air pump. As soon as a vacuum is produced the water begins
-to boil and to freeze, for the vapor can only be formed by borrowing
-heat, and there is nothing to take it from but the water itself, which
-soon reaches zero and is frozen. This apparatus makes a very simple ice
-house, as useful as convenient, and it proves, first, that boiling takes
-place at the lowest temperatures providing the pressure is sufficiently
-diminished; secondly, that it is always accompanied by a loss of heat;
-and thirdly, that it lowers the temperature of the liquid below that of
-the surrounding envelope, and the more as the vacuum is more complete.
-
-Just as opening the valve lets the vapor accumulated above the water in
-Papin’s digester escape, and causes a fall in the temperature, so, by
-opening the reservoirs in which one has confined a liquefied gas, one
-sees it fall back to the boiling point. For example, take the liquid
-obtained from the compression of sulphurous acid gas. As soon as the
-reservoir containing it is opened the liquid begins to boil, and a
-vapor is formed, it is the gas which re-forms. It absorbs the latent
-heat necessary, taking it from exterior objects by radiation from the
-liquid itself, from the vessel which holds it, and from the materials
-into which it has been placed. It cools these until the point at which
-sulphurous acid gas boils is reached, twelve degrees below zero; then the
-liquid remains balanced between the radiation which tends to heat it and
-vaporization, which cools it. The final result is that the temperature is
-lowered and remains fixed at twelve degrees below zero. This is not all:
-just as the boiling point of water is lowered below zero in a vacuum,
-in the same way that of sulphurous acid gas falls below twelve degrees.
-Bussy brought it down to sixty-eight, where it remained; not only water,
-but mercury may be frozen by this means.
-
-Finally, the boiling of liquefied gases will freeze all neighboring
-substances, and the greatest cold which one could obtain is produced
-by their boiling in a vacuum. This property of sulphurous acid was
-discovered in a still greater degree in protoxide of nitrogen, which was
-changed into a liquid at a temperature of 0 degrees, and under a pressure
-of thirty atmospheres. If allowed to boil in a vacuum, a temperature of
-one hundred and ten degrees below zero was obtained. When science has
-sown trade reaps the harvest; since by allowing liquefied gases to boil,
-a temperature of one hundred and ten degrees below zero can be obtained,
-and since the vapors which they give off carry away an enormous amount
-of heat from the surrounding bodies, it is possible by means of this
-cold produced to freeze water, make cold drinks, solidify mercury, cool
-cellars, prevent food from decay, and to do many other things of similar
-nature. A new art became possible, that of making cold. To-day it is
-at the height of success. It is founded on this general principle: to
-liquefy the gas by means of pressure, taking care that it does not become
-heated, to introduce it into a freezer, where it is allowed to boil,
-and from which it absorbs the heat, to carry off the gas and introduce
-it again into the vessel, where it will by pressure be liquefied. The
-action is constant, the same gas acts indefinitely, and there is no other
-expense than that which is caused by running the pumps. In spite of these
-fine results and the extraordinary efforts put forth, the end was not
-attained. To be sure, some gases had yielded, but still there was a large
-number which resisted every effort. Was it necessary to give up the idea
-that the law of liquefaction of gases was general, or was it true that
-the exceptions were only the results of insufficient means? Faraday had
-never varied in his belief. One easily returns to the affections of his
-youth, and he believed that the time had come for making fresh efforts
-to prove his theory. After a rest of twenty-two years he determined to
-again take up the liquefaction of the rebellious gases. Means were not
-wanting. Thilorier had taught him how to solidify easily large masses
-of carbonic acid, and by mixing this solid with ether make a powerful
-freezing mixture; protoxide of nitrogen could be prepared with the same
-ease and abundance, and would boil regularly in a vacuum at a temperature
-of one hundred and twenty degrees below zero. Thus he was able to secure
-a degree of cold before unknown. For compression, he had a pump formed
-of two parts; one took the gas at its generation, and accumulated it in
-a reservoir under a pressure of fifteen atmospheres; the second part
-then received it; here it was subjected to a much greater pressure in a
-strong glass vessel which was plunged into carbonic acid or protoxide of
-nitrogen. Cold and pressure were thus combined. At that time nothing more
-could be done; fortunately this was enough to subdue most gases. Faraday
-had the satisfaction of liquefying nearly all gases, and of extending the
-law which he had announced, but still six, only six, refused to give up;
-among them were marsh gas, oxygen, nitrogen, and hydrogen. Science is a
-battle which must be continually renewed; the more the gases resisted,
-the greater the efforts made to conquer them. At first, new and energetic
-means of pressure were invented. Aimé, a professor in Algiers, secured a
-pressure of four hundred atmospheres, without result. M. Cailletet used a
-hydraulic press which exerted a force equal to seven hundred atmospheres,
-and afterward increased this to one thousand atmospheres, but still the
-gas resisted. At last it was found that pressure alone, however enormous
-it might be, could not liquefy the gases.
-
-An English philosopher, called Andrews, put a new face on matters.
-He took carbonic acid gas at a temperature of about thirteen degrees
-and compressed it. The gas began to diminish in volume, and under a
-pressure of fifty atmospheres was suddenly liquefied, taking quickly
-a very great density, and falling to the bottom of the vessel, where
-it remained separated from its vapor by a surface as plainly marked
-as that which marks water and air. Andrews afterward tried the same
-experiment at a higher temperature, about twenty-one degrees. The same
-results were produced with but one difference: the liquefaction was less
-sudden. At a temperature of thirty-two degrees, instead of a separate
-and distinct liquid, undulating striæ appeared as the only signs of a
-change in condition which was not completed. Finally, at a temperature
-of above thirty-two degrees there was neither striæ nor liquefaction,
-but still it seemed as if a trace was preserved, for under certain
-pressure the density increased more quickly, and the volume diminished
-more rapidly. Thirty-two degrees is then the limit, a point between the
-degrees which permit and which prevent liquefaction. It is the _critical
-point_ which marks the separation between two very different conditions
-of a substance; below, we have a liquid; above, there is no change in
-appearance, but there enters a new condition, whose characteristics I
-will describe.
-
-Generally a liquid is more dense than its vapor; for this reason it
-falls to the bottom, and the two are separated by a level surface.
-But supposing that we heat the vessel which contains them. The liquid
-expands little by little, until it equals, or even surpasses, the
-expansion of the gas, so that an equal volume weighs less and less. On
-the other hand, a continually increasing quantity of vapor is formed,
-accumulates at the top of the vessel, and becomes constantly heavier.
-Now, if the density of the vapor increases, or if that of the liquid
-diminishes under the right temperature, the two densities become equal.
-Then there is no longer a reason for the liquid falling, the vapor
-rising, or for a surface of separation. The two are mingled. Neither are
-they any longer distinguished by their different degrees of heat. When
-this critical point is reached, it is impossible to tell whether it is
-liquid or gas, since in either state it has the same density, the same
-heat, the same appearance, the same properties. This is a new state, a
-gaseous liquid state. The discovery of these properties showed why all
-the attempts to liquefy air had been useless. At an ordinary temperature
-the gas is in a gaseous liquid condition. Liquefaction can take place
-only when the liquid is separated from the vapor by its own greater
-density. The next step was therefore to lower the temperature below that
-of the critical point. This was understood and carried out about the
-same time by MM. Cailletet and Raoul Pictet. On the 2nd of December,
-1877, M. Cailletet subjected oxygen in a glass tube to a pressure of
-three hundred atmospheres, and reduced its temperature to twenty-nine
-degrees below zero. The gas did not change in appearance, and was in all
-probability in the gaseous liquid condition. Nothing but more cold was
-wanting to liquefy it. The valve was turned, the gas escaped, and the
-temperature fell two hundred degrees, and the characteristic whitish
-mist was seen. Oxygen had been liquefied, perhaps solidified. The same
-result was reached with nitrogen, but nothing was done with hydrogen.
-While M. Cailletet performed this decisive experiment at Paris, M. Raoul
-Pictet achieved the same at Geneva. He had at his command all necessary
-materials, so that he subjected the oxygen to a pressure of three hundred
-and twenty atmospheres, and to a temperature of one hundred and forty
-degrees below zero. In this condition the gas was probably below the
-critical point, and when the reservoir was opened suddenly it began
-to boil and was thrown in every direction. M. Pictet believed that he
-liquefied, and even more, had solidified hydrogen, but he was doubtless
-mistaken. These results, however, were not satisfactory. M. Cailletet was
-preparing a new experiment when the Academy received the two telegrams
-given at the beginning of this article.
-
-Wroblewski and his colleague, Olszewski, had boiled ethylene, a gas
-similar to that used for heating purposes, in a vacuum. The temperature
-fell to one hundred and fifty degrees below zero. It was the greatest
-degree of cold yet obtained, and was sufficient. The success was
-complete. The oxygen, previously compressed in a glass tube, became
-a fixed liquid. It was like the others, in the form of a colorless
-and transparent liquid, like water, but of a little less density. Its
-critical point was at one hundred and thirteen degrees below zero,
-forming itself below, never above, this temperature, and boiling rapidly
-at a temperature of one hundred and eighty-six degrees below zero. A few
-days after this the two Polish professors succeeded, in the same way, in
-liquefying nitrogen.
-
-But if the question was settled for air was it also for nitrogen? M.
-Pictet, in his experiment, had used a weight of three hundred and twenty
-atmospheres, and cold of one hundred and forty degrees below zero. When
-he opened the reservoir a jet of gas, mingled with mist of steel gray
-color, burst forth. At the beginning of the experiment, solid fragments
-accompanied the jet; these fell to the floor with a sound like that
-of grains of lead. Naturally, M. Pictet thought that he had not only
-liquefied, but even solidified hydrogen, but unfortunately the experiment
-was not wholly satisfactory. For perfect success still more acute cold
-was needed, and here was oxygen and nitrogen to get it from. Nitrogen,
-the most refractory, was taken, and a degree of cold undreamed of before,
-attained; in the open air it reached one hundred and ninety-four degrees
-below zero, and in a vacuum two hundred and thirteen degrees below. These
-temperatures were so low that it was necessary to invent new methods
-for measuring them. A mercury thermometer was useless, because it froze
-at forty degrees, and alcohol because it became a solid at one hundred
-and thirty degrees. No liquid is able to resist such temperatures, so
-electric, or hydrogen thermometers, were employed.
-
-Wroblewski and Olszewski have but lately achieved success. Having
-compressed the hydrogen in the above named manner, they froze it by
-means of nitrogen boiling in a vacuum. Still it did not liquefy. It was
-yet in a gaseous liquid state, but when the tube was opened then there
-appeared a transparent and colorless liquid. At last the question of
-the liquefaction of gases, which has been discussed so long, has been
-settled. When we think of the simplicity of these final experiments, it
-seems strange that the problem was so difficult to solve. The trouble lay
-in the fact that at the start there was everything to find out; there
-was the critical point and the means of freezing to discover. It was
-necessary to proceed by steps, using each gas for the reduction of the
-one more stubborn than itself. Really, as Biot says, nothing is so easy
-as what was discovered yesterday, nothing so difficult as what must be
-discovered to-morrow. It might be asked whether the result is worth the
-trouble necessary to collect these liquids. The answer must be left to
-the future. The chemist will take up this new law of gases, and art will
-adapt it to its purposes. For the present, all that it amounts to is
-that the natural philosopher has proven that all kinds of materials may
-exist in three conditions, and obey the same common laws.—_Abridged and
-Translated from “Révue des Deux Mondes” for “The Chautauquan.”_
-
-
-
-
-AMERICAN DECORATIVE ART.
-
-BY COLEMAN E. BISHOP.
-
-
-Among the many so-called “booms” that followed the civil war, as the
-result of the wonderful intellectual, moral and material impulse that
-it gave the country, one of the most marked and promising of influence
-on the national character is the advancement in decorative art that
-this generation has seen and felt. Its presence and influence are
-observable in the general demand for more artistic interior finishing
-and furnishing: for better form and coloring in wall paper, frescoing,
-painting, floor-coverings, upholstery and drapery, and in that broader
-study of the harmonious wholes of which these are related parts.
-
-It is not an art renaissance, so much as a new birth of popular art
-feeling; a creation, rather than a revival. Facts seem to indicate the
-beginning of the long-talked-of American school of art. It is a peculiar,
-and peculiarly-encouraging circumstance that this new development is
-native and popular instead of imported and select.
-
-For, we may be very sure that any movement that is to abide and have
-much power over our people must be one that touches the average citizen.
-To reach him it must be American. It need not be divergent from, and
-it should not be antagonistic to established art principles; but, not
-the less, in its sympathies, subjects, and methods it must be national.
-An art that is to live with any people must be _of_ that people. With
-us this requirement of popularity is doubly strong, because we are so
-intensely national; because all institutions live and move and have their
-being in the commonalty, and because the citizen is the only source of
-living patronage of art here, where the state does not foster art as
-foreign states do. The artist must eat, and the people must feed him.
-Before they will pay for art, they must have sufficient culture to
-care for it dollars’ worth, and it must be of a nature to reach their
-sympathies. Even in monarchial England, Ruskin perceives the necessity
-for beginning at the bottom to upbuild national taste, and he addresses
-volumes of letters upon art “To the Workmen and Laborers of Great
-Britain” (see “Fors Clavigera”).
-
-We have not much to hope for in the way of education of American taste
-from imported art, for this can never reach or touch the people. A few
-_dilettanti_ in our cities can do very little toward creating, or even
-influencing a national taste. They have no _rapport_ with true American
-culture; they offend national sensibilities by unreasoning rejection of
-everything undertaken here; and, above all, if they be brought to the
-test, it will be found that they generally have no fixed art principles
-back of their opinions and—prejudices. If the average American could
-not appreciate foreign works, he was not much helped to a better
-understanding of them by their admirers; and he came to think himself at
-least quite capable of correctly estimating devotees who could no more
-give good reasons for worshiping everything foreign than they could for
-scorning everything indigenous.
-
-The most hopeful augury for this new interest is in the fact that it
-relates to that department of art which goes most directly into the lives
-and the homes of the people: and that it has been the first to take on
-marked American characteristics. Moreover, its commercial features will
-be potent influences for its spread and growth. It is capable of being at
-once the refiner, the educator and the almoner of thousands.
-
-Confidence in the inherent genius of my countrymen, led me years ago to
-predict that all that was needed for the establishment of a school in
-any art was (1) the foundational training of mind or hand; (2) a belief
-that it can be done; (3) a market for it. The last most important of
-all, because demand inspires originality and creates supply, and because
-recompense is the great stimulus to inspiration. Genius in this age is
-pretty apt to have an eye to the main chance.
-
-For all these reasons we are prepared for the conclusion that the impulse
-given to decorative art by the organizations known as the “Decorative Art
-Society,” and the “Associated Artists,” all of New York City, is the most
-valuable of anything that has been done since the nation’s new sense of
-the beautiful awoke. These are the parts of one movement possessing these
-characteristics:
-
-It is distinctively American.
-
-It has compelled recognition at home and abroad as well of its indigenous
-originality as of its artistic correctness and merit.
-
-It has begun the production of exclusively American materials, designed
-and manufactured in this country, which are unequaled by anything foreign.
-
-It is commercially successful.
-
-By virtue of all these achievements, it is doing a missionary work for
-American art by encouraging similar efforts in other cities and other
-countries; by demonstrating that “good _can_ come out of Nazareth;”
-by putting in the way of thousands of talented women, suffering under
-repression and lack of opportunity or for inspiration of hope, the
-opening for culture and compensation combined.
-
-It is to celebrate what has been accomplished, and haply, to suggest the
-opportunities open to others, that this narration is essayed.
-
-The movement was, indeed, patriotic in its birth. It was inspired by the
-Centennial Exposition at Philadelphia. The specimens of decorative art
-from the South Kensington School in the English exhibit impressed Mrs.
-Thomas M. Wheeler, of New York, by their lack of originality and freedom,
-insomuch that she declared, “We can do better than that in this country
-without any school!” and she set about doing it in genuine American
-spirit. The first organization, The Decorative Art Society, which she
-instituted, was composed of several hundred ladies of New York. The plan
-was national, philanthropic and commercial—to serve art, help women,
-beat the British, and make money. Ladies in a large number of cities
-were influenced by correspondence and other efforts to form auxiliary
-societies. The seed of the new art interest thus widely sown is still
-bearing crops.
-
-From this nucleus there were before long offshoots in two directions—in
-a higher and in a more rudimentary line. The Woman’s Exchange was
-organized to provide a market for the large surplus of handiwork of
-all kinds that was pressed upon the society; and a less numerous, more
-compact organization was originated to attempt a higher development
-of the work—this being called the Associated Artists. Thus they had
-three efficient agencies occupying ground in this order, artistically
-considered—The Woman’s Exchange, The Decorative Art Society, The
-Associated Artists. Each of these is still doing its appointed work, but
-our present purpose has to do only with the most advanced—The Associated
-Artists.
-
-It should be said, however, of the Woman’s Exchange, that it has spread
-the most widely; because it deals with the simple forms of ornamentation
-which require but little training, but it produces articles that are
-salable. Thus it has become a bread-and-butter enterprise to a large mass
-of women. Not only do all of our leading cities now boast of Exchanges,
-but Princess Louise, after her first visit to this country, caused one to
-be formed in Canada. This “Yankee notion” has also been transplanted to
-Germany and Sweden.
-
-The Associated Artists, as first organized, was directed by Mrs. Wheeler
-and three gentlemen, artists like herself—Mrs. Wheeler having charge of
-the needlework department; one gentleman, of interior wood decoration;
-another, of glass painting, and the third, of the color scheme, painting,
-etc. They undertook the interior finish of rooms and houses upon entirely
-new decorative notions. Among their public undertakings, also, were the
-entire interior decoration of the Madison Square Theater, including the
-drop curtain; the finish of the “Veterans’ Room” in the Seventh Regiment
-Armory, and parts of the Union League Club House.
-
-The business success of the Associated Artists grew on the managers. The
-educational and philanthropic aims were in danger of being overshadowed
-by the commercial consideration, and New York gave them abundant
-employment without their going into all the world and preaching the
-gospel of beauty and self-help to all women. Moreover, Mrs. Wheeler’s
-department in the work grew so rapidly and opened out possibilities of
-development and creation so great, that she decided to make it a special
-and separate enterprise. This she did three years ago, retaining the
-name, Associated Artists.
-
-Success has vindicated the wisdom of the segregation, while the other
-members of the older organization have not suffered by the separation.
-From that time to the present the enterprise has been managed and worked
-by women only.
-
-The gentlemen formerly of the Associated Artists are working on
-independent lines. The decoration of the new Lyceum Theater, New York, is
-the latest and greatest triumph of one of them.
-
-The Associated Artists now have to do with decoration as using or applied
-to textile fabrics, including as well all upholstery as the hangings,
-draperies, tapestry and applied decoration of any part of a room. In
-the building which they occupy in East Twenty-third Street, there are
-large exhibition and salesrooms, the studios or designing rooms, the
-departments of embroidery, of tassels, fringes, etc., of tapestry, and
-the curtain department—an entire floor. There are about sixty employes.
-
-This is an art school as well as a business house. Many women come
-to them with no other preparatory training than the drawing lessons
-of our public schools afford. The best talent is furnished by the
-Women’s Art School of Cooper Union. Aside from such preparation, the
-Associated Artists furnish the education of their own designers and
-workers. Unendowed, small, modest and young as it is, we shall see in
-what respects this American school has outstripped the great English
-institution.
-
-One of the most serious obstacles that the effort to create American
-design has had to meet, is the lack of suitable materials to work with.
-All imported textiles were found to be, in color, texture and pattern,
-unsuited to the new uses and ideas; and American manufacturers were so
-much under tutelage to European tastes, that nothing different was to be
-had from them. It is a fact as lamentable as it is astonishing, that a
-carpet, wall paper or textile mill in this country rarely has an American
-designer of patterns and colors. The schemes of color made by the
-Associated Artists were out of harmony with French, English and American
-fabrics and embroidery materials. The colors of these were too sharp,
-strong and cardinal for the blending of tones that was sought.
-
-To meet this case a Massachusetts silk mill was engaged to manufacture,
-first embroidery silks of the desired shades; and, that being
-accomplished, to undertake the coloring of fabrics. The greater step to
-the manufacture of special fabrics was next taken. Now the Associated
-Artists use only materials made for them in this country.
-
-There are three different mills engaged on their work, one of which last
-year supplied them with $30,000 worth. The work is a great advertisement
-to a mill—such recognition have these fabrics gained, here and in
-Europe, for fineness, design and beauty. Several European decorators of
-first rate have sent for samples of them. Foreign artists and designers
-visiting this country regularly have in their note-book memoranda to see
-the wonderful new American fabrics at the Associated Artists. These goods
-have also been used for garments. Mrs. Langtry, Mrs. Cornwallis West and
-Ellen Terry bought largely of them for their wardrobes. Felix Moschelles,
-artist, and son of that Moschelles who was the biographer of Mendelssohn,
-declared that there was nothing in Europe to compare with these joint
-products of American artists and artisans. Truly, there is nothing on the
-shelves of dry goods men on either continent to match them; they revive
-the traditions of the wonderful products of Oriental looms.
-
-Another _chef d’œuvre_ of these artists is their tapestry work. It has
-the definiteness and freedom of drawing, and the delicacy and feeling
-of color of an oil painting; nay, deft fingers with a needle and thread
-can produce effects in colors that the painter’s brush can not, because
-colored threads reflect and complement each other. This work is done
-upon the surface of a canvas, the stitch being similar to that used
-upon “honey comb canvas,” all surface work. To make it more effective,
-a fabric has been woven with a double warp, the embroidery being run in
-under the upper thread, somewhat like darning. The process and fabrics
-were invented by Mrs. Wheeler and are protected by letters-patent in this
-country and Europe.
-
-A portrait was woven in this way, thread by thread, so faithful as to be
-preferred by the family, to the best work they had of photographer or
-painter. A piece of this tapestry has been under the hands of from one
-to three embroiderers—or darners, if you please—every day for nearly a
-year. It is one of ten large needle-work pictures of American subjects
-now in preparation. One of them is a Zuni Indian girl, by Miss Rosina
-Emmett, and another, “Hiawatha,” a typical Indian girl of the North, by
-Miss Dora Wheeler. (These two artists are directors of the Association.)
-The pictures are life size, and are very characteristic studies. The
-remaining eight tapestries are mainly upon events of American history.
-Only close examination would convince any one that they were not oil
-paintings. After seeing this work I am inclined to think less of the
-famous Bayeux tapestry and all other pictorial needlework. William the
-Conqueror was unwise not to have deferred his exploits until Yankee girls
-could embroider them. The best we can now offer William is to invade and
-conquer England over again—with American tapestry.
-
-These high-class works are mentioned simply to show the height that this
-line of decorative art has reached, in a short time, by the efforts of
-native genius and mechanical skill.
-
-Nor is the story yet all told of the relation of design to manufactures.
-One of the largest manufacturers of paper hangings in this country not
-long since offered prizes amounting to $2,000 for the best four designs
-for wall paper. The competition was great, sixty designs being entered by
-European artists, and many times more by American. When the awards were
-opened the examining committee, as well as the donors, were astonished to
-learn that the Associated Artists had taken all the prizes, the European
-trained talent none. Now, the freshest, best-selling patterns for wall
-paper are of American design.
-
-There is more still to tell that is gratifying to patriotism. These
-efforts have discovered to the world, as a fact, what was before the
-cherished theory of a few, viz.: that an American school of art already
-existed, dominant in brains and hands, waiting to be awakened to
-activity. There is a distinctive character in all that has been done
-in decoration, different from anything seen in other people’s work. It
-has a nationality in choice of subjects and materials, an originality
-in conception, a freedom and freshness in treatment, that fairly mark
-the beginning of a new school. More than that, when the work of native
-designers has come in comparison with that of the Kensington or other
-schools, it has justified the opinion that was expressed at the outset as
-to the ability of our women to surpass the latter.
-
-When the Decorative Society was organized, it sent to Kensington for a
-teacher, and employed the one that was the most highly recommended by the
-management there. At the close of the very first lesson that was given by
-this instructor to the leading ladies of the society, she was overcome
-by the reception her teaching had met. “Why,” she said, ruefully, “these
-ladies have got from me, in a single lesson, all that I know. _I have
-nothing more to teach them._” This incident reveals the reason for the
-contrast in work—gives the explanation of the stereotyped forms and stiff
-designs of the foreign school. The difference is in the human material
-that enters into the work in either case—the difference of development
-and general culture back of special art training. The English girl who
-is forced to earn a livelihood by needlework, and qualifies therefor at
-Kensington, represents a different order of preparatory training, general
-culture, social position and aims, from those leaders in art who engage
-in the work _con amore_ in this country. But there is, also, a race
-difference that runs through all society in both countries. The American
-woman is a thinker—the English an observer; the American woman is by
-nature an innovator, the English conventional; the one an originator,
-the other an imitator. The same climatic, dietary, social and political
-influences that make the American artisan the most inventive and free
-handicraftsman in the world; the American business man the most daring
-and rapid, have conspired to make their sisters, and their cousins, and
-their aunts the most original and apt pupils of art in the world. We
-may confidently look to them, and the sons that they shall give their
-country, to go on and create for it a school of art as free and as
-characteristic as are all our institutions.
-
-The movement is but in the embryo stage. All this is the result of a
-single effort, and it is still young. Time is of the essence of art
-culture, and the United States offers ample verge and scope enough for a
-wonderful work in the future. The field for invention in decorative art
-is boundless, because genius may touch every item and phase of home and
-carry into the innermost life of the whole people the refining influence
-of Beauty.
-
-
-
-
-SOME MODERN LITERARY MEN OF GERMANY.
-
-
-Professor George Ebers, the distinguished Egyptologist, strange to
-say, is known in America more by his novels than by his scientific
-attainments. He had a severe attack of rheumatism, or something similar,
-which confined him to his bed for a long time, but did not prevent him
-from using his mind, and during this tedious suffering he undertook, as
-I think he himself relates, in the preface of his first novel, to put
-into story facts and history with which his mind was so richly stored.
-The work grew and fascinated him, and now I dare say it has not only
-become remunerative but beguiling. Since the death of Prof. Lepsius, the
-distinguished scholar of Egyptian history, George Ebers will doubtless
-stand in his stead as the next best informed man in Germany, on Egypt.
-The deceased Lepsius thought highly of one of our countrymen, Dr. Joseph
-P. Thompson, as a successful student under him, and here we pay a tribute
-of respect to this generous man who never failed to escort party after
-party of Americans through the Egyptian department of the Berlin Museum,
-explaining the tombs and reading the inscriptions. “The Egyptian King’s
-Daughter” is the title of Ebers’s most elaborate novel, and if one is
-disposed to read it carefully and observe all the foot-notes, there is
-quite a chance for the reader to feel delighted with himself for all he
-can acquire in this way about Egypt, and to have an inexpressible longing
-for more. And what a power of enchanting one these Egyptians have, with
-their gloomy and mystified learning, and their frequent contemplation of
-death. To give the reader an idea of Ebers’s style, in romance writing
-and subject matter, we quote what accurate pictures he gives of all the
-state of affairs in Egypt. Speaking of the schools or universities,
-in his novel entitled “Uarda,” he says: “The lower school was open to
-every son of a free citizen, and was often frequented by several hundred
-boys, who also found night quarters there. The parents were, of course,
-required either to pay for their maintenance or to send due supplies of
-provision for the keep of their children at school. This university, or
-school, was connected with the House of Seti, or one of the sanctuaries
-of the Necropolis, founded by Rameses I, and carried on by his son
-Seti. High festivals were held there in honor of the god of the gods of
-the under world. This extensive building was intended to be equal to
-the great original foundations of priestly learning at Heliopolis and
-Memphis; they were regulated on the same pattern, and with the object
-of raising the royal residence of Upper Egypt, namely, Thebes, above
-the capitals of Lower Egypt, in regard to philosophical distinction.”
-“Many proficient in the healing art,” he tells us, “were brought up in
-the house of Seti, but few need to remain after passing the examination
-of the degree of Scribe. The most gifted were sent to Heliopolis, where
-flourished in the great “Hall of the Ancients,” the most celebrated
-medical faculty of the whole country, whence they returned to Thebes,
-endowed with the highest honors in surgery, in ocular treatment, or in
-any other branch of their profession, and became physicians to the king,
-or made a living by imparting their learning, and by being called in
-to consult on serious cases.” From this short extract from Ebers any
-one can see that he treats his situations, although lying so remote in
-history, in the most simple and natural manner. Egypt, with her enormous
-architecture, her ponderous institutions, peculiar beliefs and somber,
-heated atmosphere, is not to him the dark “sorceress of the Nile,” but a
-real, breathing and tangible thing—he has so seriously studied her that
-he writes of her as he would of a familiar friend in whom he is intensely
-interested.
-
-Ebers not alone excels in historical pictures and accurate descriptions,
-but he has, as a novelist, much feeling, and makes clear comments on
-human nature—for example, in writing of Nebsecht, the learned surgeon,
-in his novel “Uarda,” he says: “Nebsecht was of the silent, reserved
-nature of the learned man, who, free from all desire of external
-recognition, finds a rich satisfaction in the delights of investigation;
-and he regarded every demand on him to give proof of his capacity, as a
-vexatious but unavoidable intrusion on his unanswering but laborious and
-faithful investigations.” Then he remarks Nebsecht loved Pentaur, who
-possessed all the gifts he lacked, manly beauty, child-like lightness of
-heart, the frankest openness, artistic power, and the gift of expressing
-in word and song every emotion that stirred his soul.
-
-Again, behold the picture or a glimpse into a feast of the best
-Egyptians. In an open court, surrounded by gaily painted wooden pillars,
-and lighted by many lamps, sat the feasting priests in two long rows, on
-comfortable arm chairs. Before each stood a little table, and servants
-were occupied in supplying them with the dishes and drinks which were
-laid out on a splendid table in the middle of the court. Joints of
-gazelle, roasted geese and ducks, meat pasties, artichokes, asparagus,
-and other vegetables and various cakes and sweet-meats were carried to
-the guests, and their beakers well filled with the choice wines of which
-there was never a lack in the lofts of the house of Seti. In the spaces
-between the guests stood servants with metal bowls, in which they might
-wash their hands, and towels of fine linen.
-
-“Tante Therese,” a drama in four acts by Paul Lindau, is a cleverly
-conceived and brightly written thing, showing that the writer is full of
-pathos and wit. The audience cried and laughed and applauded the first
-night it was given in Berlin. In fact, Lindau is so sharp a critic and
-so talented a writer, that, as editor of _Die Gegenwart_, a neat and
-pungent weekly, he was a great potentate in Berlin society. His pen
-spared no one—musician, artist, soldier—and even royalty fell under
-its point if he, Lindau, was not in sympathy with their productions or
-actions. He is the life of a dinner party, the most interested musician
-and art connoisseur, and among journalists and in the literary coterie
-he is the star which lights or exposes the objects around. His reviews
-in _Die Gegenwart_ (The Present) are somewhat after the matter of the
-reviews in _The Nation_—a little pessimistic or hypercritical, but always
-accomplishing their object, and whatever comes from his pen is looked
-for with eagerness. With a lovely home, and a beautiful young wife to do
-its honors, he attracts about him many brilliant companies. He was once
-thrown into prison for having written something which was not prudent in
-regard to government matters—the press being not so free in Germany, as
-the reader will observe, as in this country.
-
-Dr. Julius Rodenburg, editor of _Die Rundschau_, is of Jewish extraction,
-resembling Felix Mendelssohn so much that one must immediately remark
-it. As Mendelssohn was also a Jew, the association seems to grow more
-intimate in one’s mind, as an acquaintance with this light-hearted,
-spirited man progresses. He seems never to be weary—the world and his
-friend have a charm for him, and he and his intelligent wife know well
-how to attract them to their weekly receptions. They both speak English
-well, and have spent some time in England. He has published a little book
-entitled “Ferien in England”—Vacation in England.
-
-Sometimes he comes out in his review, which corresponds to our _Atlantic
-Monthly_, with learned and elaborate articles, but his time is, as
-editor, consumed with other people’s productions. Editors of papers and
-presidents of colleges have little time for anything but reflection upon
-the merits or demerits of others.
-
-Ferdinand Gregorovius, half German and half Italian, has published four
-volumes of the “History of Rome,” also in 1874 a very attractive volume
-on “Lucrezia Borgia.” In the back of the book appears a _fac-simile_
-letter from Pope Alexander IV. to Lucrezia, and one of hers to Isabella
-Gonzogo—most curious documents.
-
-Dr. Friedrich Kapp, who came to America when Carl Schurz did, returned
-after a short residence and entered political life in his own country.
-Beyond his exertion in this direction he has found time for considerable
-literary work; has edited the “Autobiography of Benjamin Franklin,”
-which contains a preface by Berthold Auerbach. Dr. Kapp is better known,
-perhaps, through the press, than through his books.
-
-Adolf Stahr, in his book on Goethe’s “Frauengestalten,” or female
-characters, gives a close analysis, and if the same theme has been
-written and rewritten upon as all Goethe’s productions have, Stahr
-maintains a dignified review, as if he were surveying the subjects for
-the first time. His wife, who is a novelist, is equally literary, and
-the two old people have grown beautiful in common sympathy in their
-winter work and summer resorts. She attracts more attention than he at a
-fashionable watering place, but one is the accompaniment of the other,
-and both have done honest, good work.
-
-
-
-
-HISTORIC NIAGARA.
-
-BY EDITH SESSIONS TUPPER.
-
-
-The Chautauquan takes back to his or her busy life in the school room,
-the college chair, the pulpit, the sanctum, the parlor, and the kitchen,
-many beautiful pictures of memory.
-
-In fancy does one often see the branches of grand old trees, fit pillars
-of one of God’s first temples, cross above one’s head, making a network
-for the laughing, blue, summer skies; in imagination does one again see a
-green landscape turn golden in the light of a fast setting sun. Ah! those
-vistas about the Hall in the Grove; can not you see those leafy avenues
-bending down to the lovely lake, now in the early morning stretching
-glassy and waveless, now at noon, tumbling and tossing its white
-caps abroad, now in the solemn night lying black and motionless, and
-reflecting the light of stars? Can one who has seen the moon rise over
-Long Point ever forget the sight? Recall now that midsummer night, when
-drifting out in your boat you idly watched those masses of clouds shift,
-part and separate to let the white glory of the moon shine through! How
-serene and lofty she hung, poised in mid-heaven. Higher and higher she
-climbed, pouring her wealth of light down upon the clouds heaped beneath
-her, until they, massed and piled upon each other, seemed like the
-glittering domes and towers of a city not made with hands. In vivid fancy
-you could almost trace the shining streets of gold, the gates of pearl,
-the walls of precious stones. The summer wind sighed softly around; the
-murmuring waters rippled about the keel of your boat; on the shore the
-lights danced and flickered like fireflies. Such a night is never to be
-forgotten. It is a scene of enchantment, a mid-summer night’s dream.
-
-    “In such a night as this,
-     When the sweet wind did gently kiss the trees
-     And they did make no noise in such a night,
-     Troilus methinks mounted the Trojan walls,
-     And sighed his soul toward the Grecian tents,
-     Where Cressid’ lay that night.
-
-    “In such a night,
-     Stood Dido with a willow in her hand,
-     Upon the wild sea banks, and waved her love
-     To come again to Carthage.”
-
-Ah! these beautiful pictures “that hang on memory’s wall,” these day
-dreams, by their potent magic, heal the heart and brain when life’s fret
-and worry are hardly to be endured. A writer has truly said:
-
-                 “’Tis well to dream.”
-
-    “I dream, and straightway there before me lies
-       A valley beautifully green and fair;
-     Bright, sparkling lakes, blue as the summer skies,
-       And trees and flowers dot it here and there.
-
-    “I wake, and straightway all familiar things
-       Display new beauty to my wondering gaze.
-     My soul refreshed by wandering, folds her wings
-       And finds contentment in life’s common ways.”
-
-To all these beautiful pictures of memory many a Chautauquan adds the
-remembrance of one indescribable scene—a look at the great fall.
-
-A short trip to Niagara is indeed one of the features of a summer’s
-sojourn at the city in the woods. Every week a crowd of excursionists
-leaves with reluctance the delights of the fair lake and takes a day’s
-jaunt to the Falls, which are distant about eighty miles from Chautauqua.
-Many of you, my readers, remember that trip—the magnificent views of Lake
-Erie, which you got from time to time, on the way to Buffalo. Then the
-run down from that city along Niagara River, past Fort Erie and Black
-Rock, historic names. You remember how your heart beat a little faster
-when the brakeman called, “Niagara Falls,” and you realized that you were
-soon to stand in sight of one of the wonders of the world. Of course you
-remember the clamoring hackmen, once heard not easily forgotten. Then
-have you forgotten that short walk or drive down a shaded street, past
-many shops filled with feathers and Indian temptations? Do you recall
-that dull, booming sound which suddenly broke upon your ear, and can you
-not now sense that delicious, fresh smell of the water as you turned into
-Prospect Park, and ah! can you ever forget when you at last stood within
-hand reach of that awful presence, when your bewildered and startled
-eyes glanced now at the shouting, leaping, laughing, maddening, scornful
-rapids; now at that overwhelming mass which flung itself over that
-tremendous precipice into a seemingly bottomless pit? Was it a pleasant
-day when you were there? Do you then remember the exquisite coloring of
-the water, the dazzling white, the vivid green, the pellucid blue? How
-the sun seemed to catch up every drop of that vast volume, and shine
-through it, giving a tiny rainbow effect to every crystalline particle?
-How the rapids called aloud to each other in glee, and chased one another
-in a mad race, as to which should first make that mighty leap? Or was it
-a dull, gloomy day? Then did they not shriek aloud in horror, and hurl
-themselves in black and hissing despair to their awful plunge?
-
-Did you chance at nightfall to drive or walk about Goat Island, and hear
-the chattering and cawing of myriads of crows, which blackened the tree
-tops? This is their rendezvous, and the woods are alive with them, and
-their weird sounds at dusk, added to that ever present, sullen roar,
-produce an unearthly and fantastic effect. Did not your breath almost
-forsake your body when you crossed to the three fair sisters lying so
-peacefully far out in the midst of that seething, tumbling, foaming hell
-of waters?
-
-At night you saw the electric lights turned on the American Fall, playing
-now with sulphuric effect, now giving a ghastly, blue appearance, and now
-turning this white, pure Undine to a very Scarlet Woman. The day on which
-you first saw these pictures will long be marked with a red letter in
-your calendar.
-
-But, sublime as is the physical beauty of Niagara, we have to deal
-with quite another phase of her character; one of which the tourist,
-limited by time, seldom thinks. It is only after becoming familiar with
-every inch of her picturesque surroundings, after spending days and
-weeks drinking in her superb beauty, content to sit, oblivious of time
-or space, or sun or sky, that one at last remembers that for many miles
-around the ground is covered with the footprints of history. Ground that
-has echoed the thundering tread of armies, that has been drunken with
-the blood of brave men, that now smiles peacefully, from which violets
-spring, and on which children play.
-
-    “Once this soft turf, this rivulet’s sands
-       Were trampled by a hurrying crowd,
-     And fiery hearts and armed hands
-       Encountered in the battle cloud.
-
-    “Now all is calm and fresh and still,
-       Alone the chirp of flitting bird
-     And talk of children on the hill,
-       And bell of wandering kine is heard.”
-
-To say nothing of the French and Indian wars, the country about Niagara
-was the scene of many of the fiercest struggles of the war of 1812, and
-some of the sorest defeats to the American side. The battle of Queenston
-Heights and Lundy’s Lane, or Bridgewater, were both disastrous to the
-American cause, while Fort George, at the mouth of Niagara River, a hard
-earned and costly acquisition of the Americans, was wrested from them by
-General Drummond, who also laid waste Lewiston, Youngstown, Tuscarora,
-and Manchester, then called, now the village of Niagara Falls. Those were
-dark days for the Americans, when they fought not only Englishmen, but
-crafty and treacherous Indians.
-
-The first great battle of the campaign on the Niagara during the war
-of 1812, was that of Queenston Heights, on the 13th of October. This
-was the second attempted invasion of Canada, the first having been the
-humiliating failure of Hull, at Detroit, in August previous. General
-Stephen Van Rensselaer determined to capture Queenston Heights, and for
-that purpose, early in the morning, sent two small columns down the
-river, most of which succeeded in landing under a brisk fire from the
-vigilant English. Captain John E. Wool led the Regulars up the hill, and
-was met by the British on the broad plateau, where a sharp engagement
-took place, ending in the Americans being forced back to the beach.
-Here they were reinforced and ordered to scale the Heights. This order
-was obeyed, and for a short time the Americans had the advantage, when
-suddenly brave General Brock, who defeated Hull at Detroit, and who was
-now at Fort George, at the mouth of the river, having ridden from thence
-at full speed, appeared and took command. A furious contest followed, in
-which the Americans, though fighting with the bravery of despair, were
-driven to the extreme edge of the precipice, and in which Brock fell,
-mortally wounded.
-
-Then General Winfield Scott crossed the river and assumed command of the
-American forces, expecting to be reinforced by the militia, but through
-stubbornness and cowardice they fell back on their prerogative, and
-refused to be taken out of the state. Twice was Scott attacked by the
-British and Indians, and twice repelled them with the bayonet, but at the
-third attack the Americans were obliged to retreat. Back, back, further
-yet, over the edge of that awful chasm they went scrambling from ledge to
-ledge, leaping from rock to rock, stumbling, falling, blindly catching
-at twig, branch, stem, blade of grass, even, powder blackened, faint,
-weary, bleeding, wounded, dying, only to reach the river to find no boats
-waiting to succor them, compelled at last to surrender. Ah! dead heroes!
-that was indeed a descent into Avernus.
-
-In this engagement the Americans lost one thousand men.
-
-Let the visitor to Niagara not leave until he has taken the drive to
-Queenston Heights. It is only seven miles below the cataract, not a long
-drive for a summer afternoon. A pretty drive, too, past many beautiful
-farms and country seats. Once there one can drive to the top of the
-broad plateau, on which the lofty and magnificent monument to General
-Brock stands. Now leave your carriage, go to the front of the plateau,
-and look. What a view! Directly at your feet lies old Queenstown; across
-the river old Lewistown; for seven miles before you, peacefully and
-languidly, as if weary from its terrible work up above, flows the green
-river, flecked with foam. Yonder, at its mouth, lies Fort Niagara, on the
-American side; the ruins of Forts George and Mississaga, on the Canadian
-side, while beyond, far as the eye can reach, stretches Lake Ontario,
-flooded with the light of a western sun—a sea of glass, mingled with fire.
-
-In the spring of 1813, Isaac Chauncey, an American Commodore, after a
-successful expedition against York, now Toronto, which he held for four
-days and then abandoned, after firing the government buildings, captured
-Fort George. The Americans held it until the following December, when
-General Drummond appeared on the peninsula, between Lakes Ontario and
-Erie. On his approach the American garrison abandoned Fort George and
-fled across the river to Fort Niagara. As they went they ruthlessly
-burned the village of Newark. One week after, the British captured Fort
-Niagara, and killed eighty of the garrison, showing no quarter to the
-sick in the hospital. Then followed the triumphant march of the British
-up the American side of the river, burning and sacking Youngstown,
-Lewistown, Tuscarora, Niagara Falls, even to Black Rock and Buffalo. All
-the farms were laid waste, and desolation stalked relentlessly through
-the entire region.
-
-The whole campaign on the Niagara had been a series of blunders, and was
-most disastrous to the American cause.
-
-The old town of Niagara, at the mouth of the river, is to-day an
-interesting and picturesque place to visit. Here the tourist takes the
-steamer for Toronto, and if he have an hour or two to wait, let him
-stroll about through the beautifully shaded streets, past the elegant
-hotels and private country seats, for the old town is a famous summer
-resort now, and is likely to be still more attractive, for a little
-Chautauqua is soon to spring up within stone-throw of the ruined
-breastworks of old Fort George.
-
-From the round tower of Fort Mississaga, which commanded the harbor, one
-gets a superb view of the lake and of Fort Niagara, just over the border
-on the American side. Fort and lighthouse are in capital condition, and
-the sight of the flutter of the stars and stripes against the blue sky is
-very dear to the American who stands on British soil, and, thinking of
-all it has cost to preserve that flag, realizes that it is still there.
-
-In 1814, the Secretary of War having persisted in his project to invade
-Canada, determined, as a first step, to take Kingston. In order to
-conceal this movement, and also that there might be no enemy left in the
-rear, Major-General Brown, of the American forces, commenced operations
-on the peninsula, between Lakes Erie and Ontario.
-
-On the 2nd of July he left Buffalo, and captured Fort Erie, on the
-opposite side of the river. He then pursued his way down the river until
-he reached Chippewa Creek. He then fell back a little to Street’s Creek,
-and waited for the main body of the force, which arrived on the morning
-of the 5th.
-
-General Scott’s camp was located on a little plain lying mid-way between
-these two creeks. In the afternoon he ordered out his brigade for a
-dress parade. Approaching the bridge he was met by General Brown, who
-informed him that a battle was imminent. The head of Scott’s column
-had scarcely reached the bridge when the British opened fire from the
-extensive forests that surrounded the creek. Riall, the British General,
-sneered contemptuously at the “Buffalo militia,” as he believed them
-when they first came in sight, but when he saw them cross the bridge
-steadily under fire, he discovered they were Regulars. General Peter B.
-Porter had command on Scott’s left, and his men fought well until charged
-by the bayonet, when they gave way. Major Jesup, however, covered the
-exposed flank, and the fighting became hot and furious along the entire
-front. After a time the right wing of the British disengaged from the
-line and charged against Jesup. Scott was quick to observe this, and in
-his turn charged against the exposed flank. Simultaneously Leavenworth
-attacked the left wing of the British, and through the gap between these
-two attacking columns, Towson’s battery poured in its canister with
-speedy effect, and the British soon retreated in great confusion, and the
-Americans had won their only decisive victory on Niagara.
-
-Chippewa is to-day a tumbledown, uninteresting spot, attractive only to
-the student of history. There are some beautiful private residences near
-the town, on the banks of the river, and just below the village the river
-breaks into the rapids. After the well fought battle of Chippewa, the
-invasion of Canada seemed more feasible. General Brown was very sanguine
-of success, providing he could secure Commodore Chauncey’s assistance,
-with his fleet. He wrote urgently to Chauncey, assuring him that the
-British force at Kingston was very light, and that between their two
-forces they could conquer Canada in two months, if they were active and
-vigilant. But those qualities Chauncey did not possess; besides, he was
-ill, and thought he had more important business on hand than to carry
-provisions for the troops, and therefore did nothing. Nearly opposite the
-American Fall a road runs back over the hill, past the Clifton House and
-the Canada Southern Railroad Depot. The tourist following this road, and
-turning to the left after passing the depot, will soon find himself in a
-beautiful little village. Cottages of quaint and old fashioned design,
-nearly covered with vines and roses, and narrow lanes in lieu of streets,
-are its distinguishing features. Up a hill you go past a brick church,
-and a graveyard, in which you may find many curious inscriptions. The
-top of the hill is reached. Look back down that pleasant street, where
-old trees stretch out their long arms to meet each other. See those
-comfortable happy homes on each side. Hear that group of children laugh
-at their play; and listen, from that little brick Methodist church, on
-a soft summer evening, come the solemn strains of an old time hymn. No
-more peaceful, pastoral scene in the world, and yet the spot on which we
-stand was the scene of frightful carnage, terrific struggle, horrible
-bloodshed; here was fought the famous battle of Lundy’s Lane. At noon
-of July 25, 1814, General Brown received intelligence at Chippewa,
-that General Drummond had reached Fort George the night previous, with
-reinforcements, with which he intended to capture the stores of the
-Americans at Fort Schlosser, which was located just above the rapids,
-on the American side. Scott—now a Brigadier-General—was ordered forward
-to divert the enemy from this project. He had advanced about two miles
-when he was confronted by the entire British force, drawn up in Lundy’s
-Lane. Scott engaged the right wing of the British, ordering Jesup to look
-after the left. These movements were successful, Jesup capturing many
-prisoners, among whom was General Riall. After the battle was well under
-way, General Brown arrived from Chippewa with reinforcements. The British
-held an eminence on which were planted seven guns. General Brown saw at
-once that unless this battery could be captured no impression could be
-made.
-
-“Can you take that battery?” he asked Colonel James Miller.
-
-“I’ll try, sir,” was the memorable answer of Miller—and he tried. It was
-now night, and the approach of Miller’s men was hidden by a high fence.
-The gunners held their lighted matches in their hands when Miller’s men
-thrust their muskets through the fence, shot down the men at the guns,
-rushed forward and captured the battery.
-
-The British made two valiant attempts to retake the battery, but were not
-successful. Generals Brown, Scott, and Major Jesup were all wounded, and
-the command devolved upon the inefficient Ripley, who, after idly waiting
-half an hour, anticipating another attack, instead of following up the
-advantage already gained, withdrew from the field. The British returned,
-took possession of the field and the battery which Miller had captured.
-The American forces were obliged to beat a retreat to Chippewa for food
-and water, and the British claimed the victory as the last occupants of
-the field. The loss of men on both sides was about equal.
-
-Drummond followed the Americans to Fort Erie, opposite Buffalo, and
-there ensued a regular siege until the 17th of September, when the
-Americans made a sudden sortie and destroyed the works of the enemy.
-This was accomplished only by terrific fighting on both sides, in which
-the Americans lost five hundred men, and the British nine hundred.
-Drummond now abandoned the siege, and in October the Americans destroyed
-Fort Erie, and returned to their own side of the river. Thus ended the
-campaign on the Niagara. It had been productive of no results save the
-digging of thousands of graves, and proving to the British that the raw
-Yankee troops were able to give the trained English soldiers some hard
-work.
-
-Just above Goat Island, where the river breaks into rapids, on the
-American side, the tourist notices the ruins of Fort Schlosser, of which
-we have spoken before as containing stores and provisions on which
-General Drummond had designs. Later history has something to say of this
-fort. Here occurred a circumstance out of which grew results which for
-a time threatened a third war between England and the United States. In
-1837, just after the close of the second Seminole war, a rebellion broke
-out in Canada. Great sympathy was felt on the American side, for the
-insurgents. Despite the fact that the United States made great efforts
-to preserve neutrality, a small American steamer, the “Caroline,” made
-regular trips across to Navy Island, carrying supplies to a party of five
-hundred insurgents, who were staying there. In December, one Captain
-Drew was sent out from Chippewa with a force to capture this steamer. He
-did not find her at Navy Island, as he expected, and so crossed to Grand
-Island, which was American territory, boarded her, killed twelve men on
-board, towed her out in the stream, set her on fire, and left her to
-drift down the river and go over the Falls.
-
-The United States promptly demanded redress, but could obtain no
-satisfaction for three years. In 1840, one McLeod, who had boasted of his
-part in this affair, came over to the American side, where he was under
-indictment for murder. He was seized and held for trial.
-
-The British government demanded his release on the ground that he had
-participated in an act of war, and therefore could not for that act
-be tried before a civil court. The President answered that as yet the
-United States had received no answer to the question whether the burning
-of the “Caroline” had been an authorized act of war. In all events the
-administration could not interfere with a state court, and prevent it
-from trying any one indicted within its limits. England threatened war
-unless McLeod was released; but the trial proceeded. The two countries
-would doubtless have been brought into conflict had not McLeod been
-acquitted. It was proved that he was asleep in Chippewa at the time the
-“Caroline” was burned, and that a vain desire for notoriety had caused
-him to inculpate himself. There was great excitement in 1841, over
-this trial, which was augmented by the indifferent attitude of acting
-President Tyler. A District Attorney of New York was allowed to act as
-McLeod’s counsel, and retain his office, thus presenting the astonishing
-spectacle of a government officer attempting to prove, in such a question
-as this, which was liable to result in war, his own government to be in
-the wrong.
-
-Nothing now remains of Fort Schlosser but a tall, gaunt chimney, which
-has weathered for many long years the terrific winds which sweep down the
-river.
-
-Throughout this fair and smiling region there are but few traces of these
-fierce battles.
-
-    “No solemn host goes trailing by
-       The black-mouthed gun and staggering wain;
-     Men start not at the battle cry,—
-       O, be it never heard again.”
-
-No blackened farms and desolated villages; no rattle of musketry and roar
-of cannon; the sword is turned into plow-share and pruning hook; from
-the soil watered with the blood of heroes spring thrifty orchards and
-sweet flowers; in the place of fire from the blazing torch of red handed
-war rises the smoke of prosperous town and thriving hamlet; Canada and
-the United States stretching out friendly hands to each other; the Union
-Jack and the Stars and Stripes floating side by side; peace, plenty, and
-prosperity on both sides the broad river. Everything is changed save the
-great Falls themselves. Unceasingly they do their awful work; unceasingly
-their thunders sound; unceasingly their mists roll heavenward.
-
-
-
-
-TWO FASHIONABLE POISONS.
-
-BY M. P. REGNARD.
-
-
-Some one said one day before Fontenelle, that coffee was a slow poison.
-“I can bear witness to that,” replied the witty academician, “for it will
-soon be fifty years since I began taking it every day.”
-
-This, which was on the part of the cultivated scholar, a brilliant sally
-of wit, is, alas! the common reasoning of many people who, simply because
-danger does not immediately confront them, allow themselves to be slowly
-but surely drawn to the tomb, because, forsooth, the way, for the time
-being, is pleasant, or fashionable!
-
-In the midst of us there are persons poisoning themselves to death. I
-refer to those addicted to the use of morphine. In England they have
-another class of these unfortunates, for whom the most adulterated
-liquors no longer suffice, and who drink ether; they are a sort of
-perfected inebriates, who by the scientific laws of progress succeed
-simple drunkards just as habitual morphine users follow the opium smokers
-of China. Our fathers in Asia who have already bequeathed to us many
-misfortunes, held in check until within recent years, among themselves,
-the singular taste which they have for opium. Let me tell you in a few
-words of the ancestors of morphine users of to-day, and you will better
-understand the history of the latter.
-
-The mania for opium eating diminishes rather than increases among the
-Mussulmans. Zambaco, who for a long time lived in the Orient, gives the
-reason. The Turk seeks in opium only intoxication—a delicious sort of
-annihilation—which he finds to-day more readily in champagne or Bordeaux
-wine. These give him, in addition, the pleasures of taste. Then, too, he
-can indulge himself freely in them, and still hold to the letter of the
-Koran. In the time of Mahomet neither rum nor cognac were invented; it
-does not then forbid them. But that which is not forbidden is permitted,
-and so the Mussulman, who considers wine so impure that he will not touch
-it, even with his hands, will become beastly intoxicated upon brandy, and
-think that by this process he is not compromising his part in Paradise.
-But their religionists—and above all their medical men—do not reason
-thus. They still cling to the opium.
-
-Its first effect upon the system is far from causing sleep. It is rather
-a sort of intellectual and physical excitant, which renders the Oriental
-(in his natural state sad and silent), turbulent, loquacious, excitable,
-and quarrelsome.
-
-These Turks are not contented to take opium themselves, they give it also
-to their horses. “I have just,” says Burns, “traveled all night with a
-cavalier of this country. After a fatiguing ride of about thirty miles I
-was obliged to accept the proposition he made to rest for a few minutes.
-He employed this time in dividing with his exhausted horse a dose of
-opium of about two grammes. The effects were very soon evident upon both;
-the horse finished with ease a journey of forty miles, and the cavalier
-became more animated.”
-
-In China they do not eat opium, they smoke it. There is an historical
-fact connected with them well known to all the world to which I would
-not now call attention were it not to show you to what extent a like
-calamity may go, and consequently with what the French people are
-threatened if the love of morphine continues to take among us the same
-intensity.
-
-Hundreds of years ago opium was, in the Chinese empire, a great luxury,
-reserved for the mandarins, who did not keep secret at all their use of
-it, but who interdicted it to all persons under their jurisdiction. All
-the more did they consider it a great honor to their invited guests, and
-especially to strangers, to be asked to partake of it. Recently it has
-come into general use, and since 1840 its abuse has reached the last
-limits. There is for all this an economic reason which I shall not fear
-to call abominable. The Chinese received in payment for their products
-only gold and silver, in money or in ingots; the specie thus introduced
-into their country never left it, and it was a veritable drainage which
-on this account Europe and America underwent.
-
-A neighboring nation of ours, and one whose Indian possessions furnish
-prodigious quantities of opium, forced China, in a celebrated treaty,
-to allow the entrance of this opium into her ports and to pay for it in
-ingots and not in merchandise; the empire was thus obliged to disgorge
-a part of its money held in reserve. You will have an idea of the
-importance of this operation when you know that to-day there enters
-annually into China 70,000 packing cases of opium from India, worth at
-least $558,000. So much poison forced by right of war upon a whole people!
-
-The Chinese smoke opium from the age of twenty to twenty-five years. The
-immediate effect is a sort of dizzy sensation. The preoccupations of the
-mind disappear, as do also all ailments of the body. Then comes a noisy
-delirium, a kind of insanity, in which the subject is deeply agitated; he
-is apt to hurl down and break everything around him. Sometimes he rushes
-out of the house, attacks the first passer-by, and not infrequently in
-his frenzy has committed murder.
-
-The opium smoker, as well as the eater, is obliged rapidly to increase
-the dose of his poison. At the end of six or eight months he must smoke a
-dozen pipes a day. His money is soon all spent; he is ruined in a year.
-He sells all that he possesses, and then he gambles. Writers agree in
-saying that the maximum of the life of a smoker is then five or six years.
-
-In the face of such an evil as this the imperial government has tried to
-act on the defensive; it placed a heavy duty on the entrance of opium;
-but this system was not successful. And before this attempt it tried
-penal jurisprudence.
-
-This is the decree which the Viceroy of Canton published in 1841:
-
-“It is two years since the Emperor of the Celestial Empire forbade all
-his subjects to smoke opium. This delay of grace expires the twelfth
-day of the twelfth moon of this year. Then all those guilty of offense
-against this law will be put to death, their heads will be exposed in
-public, in order to frighten those who might be tempted to follow their
-example.” (Then follows this modification.) “I have reflected, however,
-that solitary confinement would be more efficacious than capital
-punishment, in order to arrest such a dreadful misdemeanor. I declare
-then, that I am going to have built a special prison for opium smokers.
-There they will all, rich or poor, be shut in narrow cells, lighted by
-one window, with two boards serving as a bed and a seat. They will be
-given each day a ration of oil, of rice, and of vegetables. In case of a
-second offense they will be put to death.”
-
-This legislation was not practicable. The punishment was out of
-proportion to the crime, and consequently inapplicable.
-
-Besides, in looking around him the emperor found that his own wives
-smoked opium, and I would not guarantee that if he meant to live up to
-the letter of his law, he would not have to begin by committing suicide.
-
-After this legislation they tried moralization and preaching. The
-misfortunes of the opium smoker were depicted in an infinite number of
-ways. All this propagandism had about as little success as societies
-against intemperance, and this state of affairs is existing to-day in the
-East.
-
-There are not noticeably many opium eaters or smokers among the French.
-But every one knows that the people of the Orient have for their European
-brothers the morphine users. There is between the first and second the
-same difference that is found in everything pertaining to barbarous
-and to cultivated men. Civilization prescribes as to the manner of the
-poisoning.
-
-While the Oriental eats or smokes simply the juice of the poppy almost as
-nature furnishes it, the European is more refined, and wishes only the
-active principles of opium. So he uses it prepared in such a way as to
-have lost almost entirely its disagreeable properties.
-
-How does one become a morphine user when he is a Frenchman, an inhabitant
-of Paris, and when there is not a temptation to it from the fact of a
-general habit, or the existence of special establishments? This can be
-accounted for by two methods. The most common is some painful affliction
-from which one is suffering, it may be neuralgia, acute dyspepsia, or
-violent headaches. The physician, often at the end of his resources,
-prescribes injecting a little morphine under the skin. The effect is
-marvelous; the pain ceases instantly, but temporarily. The next day it
-returns with new force. The afflicted patient remembers the success of
-yesterday, and insists upon his anodyne. It seems necessary to give it,
-and so it goes on for several days. Soon the nature of the drug manifests
-itself: no longer will one injection a day answer; there must be two,
-then three, later four, and so on, always increasing, until it reaches
-formidable quantities. Meantime, the original trouble may have entirely
-disappeared, but the patient does not cease to use the remedy. The first
-time that the sick one insists upon having the treatment the doctor is
-called to perform the operation. But soon, as it becomes necessary to
-repeat the process oftener, making it expensive, it is entrusted to the
-nurse or to the family, and from that day the patient is lost; for how
-can the supplications of a suffering person whom one loves be resisted?
-Then on a day the sick one practices on himself—and from that on, without
-any control, with the avidity of passion, he uses the drug in the
-quantities of which I have told you.
-
-This is one way in which many victims fall into this sad habit. There is
-another. The victims of the second method are those who seek in exciting
-tonics the sensations which their weakened nerves and their surfeited
-imagination can no longer afford them. These are the proselytes of a
-veritable association, and they, in their turn, soon become missionaries
-in the same cause. It is a habit which the vicious have of wishing to
-make others like themselves. The fable of the fox which had its tail cut
-off is not a fable of yesterday. Two friends meet; one of them complains
-of slight annoyances; dullness, _ennui_; he no longer enjoys anything;
-the world, the races, the theater, do not procure for him distraction;
-he is _bored to death_. His friend admits that he also has suffered in
-the same way, but that he had recourse to morphine, of which some one
-had told him, and that he found in it a perfect cure. And thus by such
-conversations there is formed, as it were, a new class; they are the
-volunteers in this unhappy army.
-
-One can but remark, that luxury, which tends to introduce itself
-everywhere, has already invaded the domain of morphine. The little
-syringe of Pravas, which permits of the injection of the poison under the
-skin, and the consequent avoidance of the bitter taste and the nausea
-which would be occasioned by eating morphine, has received ingenious and
-artistic modifications. It was necessary to render it easy to carry, and
-at the same time to make it deceptive to the eye. I visited a surgical
-instrument maker at Paris, and he placed at my disposal for inspection
-his whole line of morphine instruments, those which the taste, the
-luxury, or the imagination of his clients had caused him to fabricate.
-
-There was first the syringe, containing a centigram of morphine, such
-as the physicians employ. It was not delicate enough, was difficult to
-handle and difficult to conceal; it is used now only by those who no
-longer care to conceal their vice—who feel no shame in regard to it.
-Then there was one adroitly concealed in a match box. At one side was a
-little bottle containing a dose of powder necessary for a half day. There
-was, too, a false cigar holder, containing all that was necessary for
-injecting the poison. But most remarkable of all was a long, sheath-like
-instrument. It is somewhat inconvenient in the midst of company to put
-the morphine into the syringe before making a puncture. This sheath,
-filled beforehand, can be carried in the pocket; the puncture can be
-made, and to inject the drug it is only necessary to move the piston in a
-certain direction; in the evening the sheath will be found empty. There
-were little gold syringes contained in smelling bottles; a little silver
-sheath which one would take for an embroidery stiletto; open it; it
-contains an adorable little syringe of gold and a bottle of the poison.
-
-Among morphine users in fashionable life they make gifts according to
-their taste, and there are manufactured syringes and bottles enameled,
-engraved, and emblematic—in every conceivable device.
-
-Do men more often become subject to this vice than women? According to
-the printed statistics, yes. Out of every one hundred who used the drug
-there are counted only twenty-five women. But practicing physicians say
-that the women are the more numerous victims. They are more artful, and
-try to keep the habit concealed; they do not consult the physicians
-regarding it, and so are not counted in the statistical returns.
-
-Is it then so very agreeable to live under the influence of this poison,
-since so many people expose themselves, for its sake, to such grave
-perils? To this I reply, no, not at the beginning. It is with this vice
-as with others, the beginning is hard. The first injections are not
-enjoyable—the puncture is painful, and sometimes nausea follows. But
-the habit is easily and quickly formed, and the disagreeable effects
-disappear. The introduction of the morphine produces almost immediately
-a sort of general vagueness, an annihilation of being which causes to
-disappear all external realities and replaces them by a sort of happy
-reverie; and at the same time the mind seems more alert, more active.
-Physical and moral grievances disappear, all troubles are forgotten for
-the time being. “You know,” says Mr. Ball, “the famous soliloquy of
-Hamlet, and the passage where the Prince cries out that without the fear
-of the unknown, no one would hesitate to escape by means of a sharp point
-from the evils of life which he suffers, in order to enter into repose.
-Ah well! this sharp point of which Shakspere speaks—this liberating
-needle—we possess; it is the syringe of Pravas. By one plunge a person
-can efface all sufferings of mind and of body; the injustice of men and
-of fortune; and understand from this time on, the irresistible empire of
-this marvelous poison.”
-
-The habit of taking ether is induced by the same causes that lead to the
-use of morphine. The danger, however, is not so great, and the habit can
-more easily be broken up. At the end of the inhalation one experiences
-a little dizziness that is not at all disagreeable; the sight becomes a
-little blurred, and the ears ring; the mental conceptions become gay,
-charming; hallucinations are developed, generally very pleasing. It is
-not necessary to increase the dose, for one would then reach a state of
-excitement, or be thrown into a sound sleep, such as physicians produce.
-Those who use it know this well, and moderate the dose, in order to make
-the pleasure of long duration. After the inhalation the subject returns
-almost immediately to his natural state. There is a little heaviness
-in the head and a dullness of the mind. Morphine users can secretly
-indulge in their habit, but ether emits a penetrating odor. In London,
-where it is more frequently practiced, the keepers of public squares and
-large parks often find in the more retired places empty bottles labeled
-“Sulphuric Ether.” These have been thrown down by those who have left
-their homes in order to give themselves up in the open air to their
-favorite passion.
-
-These victims commence by breathing ether. Then they drink a few
-drops—and after a while larger quantities. This burning liquid soon
-becomes a necessity; and some even go so far as to drink chloroform—a
-veritable caustic.
-
-Can anything be done for these unfortunate people? Yes, certainly—but
-only on one condition—that they wish to be cured. The best method is to
-separate, instantly, entirely, the patient from his family; to place him
-in an establishment where his movements can be watched, where he can be
-debarred, suddenly or gradually, as shall be judged best, from the poison.
-
-The Americans—a practical people—have already built asylums for the
-treatment of morphine users. The Germans have recently finished two, one
-at Marienberg, the other at Schönberg.
-
-But unfortunately, the French law does not permit us to do this. We can
-place in hospitals only those poison users who have become maniacs or
-idiots.
-
-If the French are to be saved from this rapidly increasing evil, it is
-evidently necessary to prevent its beginnings. In order to do this,
-the sick must be kept from procuring it. Its sale must be regulated so
-that it will be impossible to get it in any quantity, or to use the
-same prescription twice. The emperor of Germany, upon the proposition
-of Prince Bismarck, has issued a decree to this effect. Under such a
-regulation the law for the physician would be never to prescribe the use
-of these drugs save in cases of absolute necessity.
-
-The reading of medical books by the people is generally pernicious. I
-would, however, permit them to read the recent accounts of the effects
-of these drugs. If they are of comparatively late origin, these two
-fashionable poisons have already destroyed more victims than in a whole
-century has all the poison used by assassins.—_An Abridged Translation
-for “The Chautauquan” from the “Révue Scientifique.”_
-
-
-
-
-OUR C. L. S. C. COLUMN.
-
-BY CHANCELLOR J. H. VINCENT, D.D.
-
-
-For the past year I have given in THE CHAUTAUQUAN a series of articles
-on the interior significance and higher aims of the Chautauqua movement,
-instead of the answers to questions which filled the C. L. S. C. column
-in former years. The closing article of this year must be made up of
-answers to questions which are of general interest.
-
-1. A correspondent inquires “whether Alfred Ayres, author of the
-‘Orthoepist,’ and editor of the English Grammar of William Corbett, is a
-recognized standard authority in pronunciation, and whether he should be
-preferred to Webster or Worcester.” To this I can only reply that I do
-not so understand Mr. Ayres’s claim or position in the field of letters.
-He certainly is not accepted as are Webster and Worcester; and the chief
-advantage of his little volumes is in showing what one man who has given
-much attention to the subject of pronunciation thinks on the subject.
-That is all.
-
-2. “How can a knowledge of Greek, Roman, or any other history be of any
-benefit to me? I prefer to study the works of God, and in chemistry and
-other departments of science to trace the signs of his wisdom.”
-
-_Answer_: It is important to study God’s great gifts to the race in the
-great characters of history and literature. The genius of Homer is as
-much a wonder as is any fact in physical science. Acquaintance with the
-vivacity, enterprise and energy of the Greek character is as valuable
-to people who now live in the world as is a knowledge of the physical
-constitution, shape, habits of life, and movements of the colossal
-creatures reported by geology as having occupied this planet ages on ages
-ago. No education is complete that has not to some extent been influenced
-by the spirit of the old Greek culture. The whole history of that people
-shows the impotence of mere culture without moral character, and we may
-trace through the ages of Greek history the evidences of divine wisdom
-and justice. By all means let us study natural science, but let us not
-abandon history. Whatever pertains to man in any age of the world should
-possess peculiar interest to us.
-
-3. “People in our neighborhood often say to me: ‘Why study those books?
-You will not live to finish the course; and if you do, what good will it
-do you or your children?’”
-
-_Answer_: Ignorant people often ask the question, “Of what use is
-education, beyond a small amount of reading, writing and arithmetic? Why
-should people who have to work in kitchens and fields study the stars?
-Why should men who neither care to act on the stage, or to write for the
-press, give much attention to William Shakspere?” Whatever our business
-may be, we need to read general literature because we are members of
-society, and owe something as rational beings to society. Parents should
-keep in sympathy with their children, whose world of knowledge must
-of necessity in this age grow wider and richer all the time. We are,
-moreover, members of this universe, and God is our Father. We have a
-right as his children to know something about his works and ways and
-wisdom. Life is a wearisome thing to people who are ignorant. There is
-sustaining power in the large thoughts which a true culture brings. If
-one expects to live forever with God, he should cultivate noble and
-worthy character on this side the grave, and such nobility is increased
-and such holiness promoted by a wide range of reading and study with
-worthy motive.
-
-4. I am happy to announce that the “Chautauqua Press” has been fully
-organized. Under its direction some of the books of the C. L. S. C. will
-be published, and a series of standard books will be issued at once for
-the formation of home libraries; books adapted to the special courses and
-bearing also upon the Required Readings.
-
-The first series of three or four volumes will be ready by August 1st,
-and will supplement the regular work of the coming C. L. S. C. year.
-While all the classes are reading Roman History, Latin Literature,
-Italian Biography, and Italian Art, our “Chautauqua Library, … Garnet
-Series,” will provide for those who wish to read more than the required
-books, and for those who, as graduates, wish to win seals, the following
-admirable volumes:
-
-“Readings from Macaulay. Italy. With an Introduction by Donald G.
-Mitchell (Ik Marvel).”
-
-“Readings from Ruskin. Italy. With an Introduction by H. A. Beers,
-Professor of English Literature in Yale College.”
-
-“Art and the Cultivation of Taste, by Lucy Crane, with an Introduction by
-Charles S. Whiting, of the Springfield (Mass.) _Republican_.”
-
-[The fourth volume of the first series will soon be announced.]
-
-This series of four volumes will constitute a special course, for the
-reading of which the Garnet Seal (a new one) will be given to all
-graduates, and may be won by those undergraduates who are able to do more
-than the Required Reading for each year.
-
-The Chautauqua Press will soon have on hand a rich library of cheap but
-handsomely printed and bound volumes with which every Chautauquan will
-desire to decorate and enrich “The Chautauqua Corner.”
-
-Now we are on the eve of another summer of rest, of convocation, of
-Assembly reunions. From these retreats comes much of inspiration which
-keeps the Chautauqua movement in operation during the remainder of
-the year. Let me urge all members who can possibly do so to attend
-the nearest Assembly. Go to the Round-Table. Record your name on the
-list kept by the local secretary. Show your colors, and thus lend your
-influence to the Circle.
-
-In behalf of the administration, the president, the counselors, the
-secretaries, I extend to all members of the Circle a hearty salutation;
-and to all of you who read these lines who have for any reason grown
-remiss or apathetic in C. L. S. C. service, I give an earnest invitation
-to come back, resume your readings, join the class of ’89, and make sure
-of a successful four years’ course.
-
-You will join me, I am sure, in one universal Chautauqua salute to the
-honored editor of THE CHAUTAUQUAN and his competent associates and
-contributors as our tribute to the ability with which our monthly has
-been conducted.
-
-And now, as we “study the word and the works of God,” may our Heavenly
-Father be “in the midst,” and “may we never be discouraged” in pursuing
-the high and beautiful ideal of the C. L. S. C.: The attainment of
-symmetrical and practical culture which will fit us the better to serve
-our fellows upon the earth, and to enjoy the blessings promised by our
-Father in the heavens!
-
-PLAINFIELD, N. J., May 21, 1885.
-
-
-
-
-GLIMPSES OF THE CHAUTAUQUA PROGRAM.
-
-
-A part of our creed of late has come to be that we need change in summer.
-If our homes are in cities, we need it because we can not have there the
-requisites of good health—fresh air, pure water, quiet; if we live in the
-country, we want and need a change which will give us social advantages;
-if we are teachers or students, we want opportunities to see, to get new
-ideas, to observe new people and their customs. This theory of summer
-living makes the demand for summer resorts. It is rare, however, that
-any place offers with any degree of completeness health, society and
-opportunities. It is claimed for Chautauqua that all three may be found
-there; that it is, in short, an ideal summer resort, open to all classes
-of people. The outlook for Chautauqua in 1885 confirms this claim, and
-gives to its admirers most satisfactory glimpses of what is in store for
-them during the coming season.
-
-Chautauqua is fortunate in having had candid, disinterested men examine
-its condition and management, and pronounce their verdict as to its
-healthfulness. One of the most critical examiners of public places in
-America, Hon. B. G. Northrup, made his visit to Chautauqua last summer
-a kind of inspection tour. He pried into every corner and cranny, and
-publicly denounced every abuse he found. With “courage indomitable,” the
-Chautauqua “powers that be” attacked the enemy, and “they are ours.” This
-summer there is no pestilential spot, not one vault nor cess-pool nor
-wet spot to poison the water and breed disease. The determination of the
-management to have perfect sanitary arrangement at any cost—even if all
-other improvements are abandoned—is producing a condition unparalleled.
-This result, and the means taken for its accomplishment, are worthy of
-close study by every visitor at Chautauqua, particularly by those who are
-property owners, or are interested in the government of towns.
-
-Chautauqua is a _safe_ resting place. But it is more. It is preëminently
-a social place. Its social life is as pure and wholesome and natural as
-the air and water. Simple, unaffected manners, free, kindly intercourse,
-characterize the daily life of the people. “How very democratic you
-are here,” said a visitor last year, “and I don’t see a particle of
-snobbishness.” And it is true. The simple reason, perhaps, is that
-Chautauqua brings out of every one the best in them. People literally
-live too high there for snobbishness. They can run out in the morning
-for their milk or bread or steak; they can carry their bundles or do
-their own washing, and the high, clear, mental atmosphere of the place
-forbids them minding who sees them at their duties, forbids any one who
-sees them feeling that the work is menial. This mental and social air is
-indeed one of the most exhilarating things about the place. You do live
-socially above your ordinary level—live so because it is “in the air.”
-You can not help it.
-
-How wonderfully good health and good company contribute to making a good
-_working place_. Above all things else Chautauqua is that. Its pure air
-stirs your blood until you feel like working; its social life stimulates
-you; its opportunities are a constant temptation. Of course Chautauqua
-temptations begin with the platform. There are at least two features of
-the program for the platform of 1885 which deserve special attention.
-Of these the first is—it is timely. The questions which are interesting
-society are the questions it discusses. Note what a prominent place
-“Mormonism” holds. Miss Kate Field makes it the subject of two lectures:
-“The Mormon Creed” and the “Political and Social Crimes of Utah,” and
-Mr. W. L. Marshall takes up “Utah and the Mormon Question” in a third
-lecture. Temperance, our knottiest social problem, is elucidated by
-Miss Frances Willard in the “Evolution in the Temperance Reform,” by
-Mrs. Ellen Foster, by Hon. G. W. Bain, by a National Temperance Society
-Day, by temperance bands, by conventions, and by every attraction
-which Chancellor Vincent can devise and valiant Chautauqua temperance
-workers carry out. Missions, too, have a brave array of talent to plead
-their claim. The first four days of August are mission days, on which
-are discussed means of increasing interest and improving methods of
-evangelizing both foreign and home heathens, of raising funds, and of
-securing workers. One of the leading mission workers of 1885 will be
-the Rev. Wm. F. Johnson, of Allahabad, India. Mr. Johnson has been in
-the field nearly twenty years. He will fill the place this summer that
-Ram Chandra Bose and the Rev. Mr. Osborne filled in the missionary
-conferences of last year.
-
-A second characteristic is—the program is practical. Every day is full of
-hints; every exercise is suggestive. As an illustration, no profession
-is attracting so much attention to-day as is journalism; a successful
-journalist is to discuss it. Such a subject will be of practical benefit
-to numbers of young men and women who will be listeners to Mr. Carroll.
-Practical Christian ethics and Christian work form prominent subjects;
-as, for example, the three days’ examination of “Parish Work in Cities,”
-by Edward Everett Hale, and the interesting meetings of the Society
-of Christian Ethics. The tours abroad, while they are so bright and
-entertaining, are brimful of suggestions. This summer is to be unusually
-rich, the time being given largely to Italy. One pleasing variety will be
-a tour around the world with Philip Phillips.
-
-The special features of the summer will be strong. The Teachers’ Retreat,
-which begins its sessions in July, is arranged to do for teachers one
-peculiarly necessary work, to show them how to use the best methods, to
-lessen the friction which is incident to all school work. It is ably
-manned to produce this result, Prof. J. W. Dickinson, of the State Board
-of Education of Massachusetts, being at the head of the department of
-Pedagogy, and nearly a score of successful specialists assisting in
-expositions of their peculiar methods. The terms for the C. T. R. are
-very low.
-
-Persons holding the $5 ticket of the Chautauqua Teachers’ Retreat will
-be entitled to the following privileges: All general exercises in the
-Amphitheater, including lectures, concerts, recitals, and entertainments,
-during the sessions of the Retreat; fourteen lessons in Pedagogy;
-fourteen lessons in Practical Application of Pedagogical Science;
-four Tourists’ Conferences; two Expositions of Method in Chemistry;
-one Exposition of Method in Penmanship; two Expositions of Method in
-Elocution; one Exposition of Method in Phonography; one Exposition of
-Method in Stenographic Reporting; two admissions to each of the several
-classes in the Schools of Language; two lectures on School Methods by
-Prof. Edw. E. Smith, Superintendent of Schools, Syracuse, N. Y.; ten
-Half-hour Drills in School Calisthenics. Special classes are arranged as
-well for those who can find time to take in more than the full program,
-or who desire special instructions.
-
-Each summer, since the idea of a summer school was conceived, there
-has been a steady growth in the opportunities given to students. The
-coming season keeps up the record for improvement. The C. S. L. stands
-preëminent among Chautauqua institutions. In its departments of Greek,
-Latin, Hebrew, English, French, German and Spanish, the practical benefit
-to be derived in six weeks is altogether inconceivable to those persons
-who are unacquainted with the teachers directing the studies, and with
-the methods used. To two or three features we would call particular
-attention—features which serve merely as samples of work being done daily
-in all classes. In the Anglo-Saxon room there is a class which studies
-“Hamlet” for four weeks, a series of lessons rich in illustrations and
-full of facts. A particular beauty of this class is the free discussion
-and analysis of character which Professor M’Clintock encourages.
-
-Professors Worman and Lalande have many novel devices for fascinating
-their students. As interesting study as there was at Chautauqua last
-summer was the children’s hour in German, conducted by Professor Worman;
-as a lesson to teachers it was unsurpassed, as a drill for children it
-would teach them German if anything would. As for the French, the weekly
-lectures, the French receptions, and now this year, the “French table”
-which Professor Lalande has arranged for, are prominent features.
-
-Not content with reading Latin, Professor Shumway proposes that his
-students talk it. For many students at Chautauqua last summer a tree
-became _arbor_, the forest _silva_, the shade _umbra_, the dead alive—a
-result, by the way, that very often is accomplished at Chautauqua. The
-successful introduction of a School of Microscopy was accomplished in
-1884; 1885 will see the work enlarged. This department is under the
-direction of an able teacher, Professor Hall. His outfit for observation,
-and for preparing and mounting objects is most complete.
-
-It is said that when the Egyptians moved the huge rocks which form the
-pyramids, musicians were stationed among the workmen, and every motion
-was made in time to music. Chancellor Vincent seems to have profited by
-this suggestion in preparing the Chautauqua program for 1885, for it is
-all set to music of the rarest kind. To begin with, the great organ is
-handled by a skillful master, Mr. I. V. Flagler. His series of recitals
-contain selections from the greatest masters. The chorus will be led by
-our old favorites, Professors Case and Sherwin. The Fisk Jubilees, the
-Meigs-Underhill Combination, a new quartette—the Schubert, of Chicago,
-vocalists with rare voices, and with a splendid _repertoire_—and Miss
-Dora Henninges, of Louisville, a superb mezzo-soprano, will complete the
-musical program for 1885.
-
-These are but hints of what the six weeks’ session holds in store for
-visitors to Chautauqua this season. The entire program, with all its
-specialties, has been prepared with consummate care and with close
-regard for popular needs. The management has striven honestly to make
-Chautauqua a perfectly healthy place, with abundant social life, and with
-opportunities suited to the needs of all classes of people. The verdict
-of its thousands of visitors is that in the past they have succeeded. The
-outlook for 1885 declares that this year will be still more abundantly
-successful.
-
-
-
-
-LOCAL CIRCLES.
-
-
-C. L. S. C. MOTTOES.
-
-“_We Study the Word and the Works of God._”—“_Let us keep our Heavenly
-Father in the Midst._”—“_Never be Discouraged._”
-
-
-C. L. S. C. MEMORIAL DAYS.
-
-1. OPENING DAY—October 1.
-
-2. BRYANT DAY—November 3.
-
-3. SPECIAL SUNDAY—November, second Sunday.
-
-4. MILTON DAY—December 9.
-
-5. COLLEGE DAY—January, last Thursday.
-
-6. SPECIAL SUNDAY—February, second Sunday.
-
-7. FOUNDER’S DAY—February 23.
-
-8. LONGFELLOW DAY—February 27.
-
-9. SHAKSPERE DAY—April 23.
-
-10. ADDISON DAY—May 1.
-
-11. SPECIAL SUNDAY—May, second Sunday.
-
-12. SPECIAL SUNDAY—July, second Sunday.
-
-13. INAUGURATION DAY—August, first Saturday after first Tuesday;
-anniversary of C. L. S. C. at Chautauqua.
-
-14. ST. PAUL’S DAY—August, second Saturday after first Tuesday;
-anniversary of the dedication of St. Paul’s Grove at Chautauqua.
-
-15. COMMENCEMENT DAY—August, third Tuesday.
-
-16. GARFIELD DAY—September 19.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-The present number closes Volume V. of THE CHAUTAUQUAN and interrupts
-for a time the pleasant monthly visits with Local Circles. A review of
-the year’s work must be satisfactory to all. It has been a progressive
-year for the circles; few have fallen out of line; numbers of new
-organizations have been formed; almost all have increased their
-membership; the circle work has been done more thoroughly than ever
-before; new methods have sparkled on every page of reports; the social
-life has been quickened and intensified; the circle evening has become
-the most important evening of the week; it has been made the occasion of
-practical discussions and of intelligent conversation; a stronger feeling
-of union exists; the local circle has become a permanent institution.
-There is much encouragement in the review, but there is much for each
-circle to learn in a study of the reports of the past year.
-
-The present issue of THE CHAUTAUQUAN will contain all the reports
-received up to the date of going to press; those received after that date
-will necessarily be held over for the October issue.
-
-Very interesting and encouraging reports have been received from HALIFAX,
-NOVA SCOTIA, where the local circles are prospering, and much earnest
-work has been done. While their routine work and the required course of
-reading and study are pursued by the several circles separately, their
-occasional reunions are found profitable, and furnish much real enjoyment
-for the members. One such was held on Longfellow day at Dartmouth,
-across the harbor, which proved intensely interesting to an expectant
-audience. Thorough preparation was made for this meeting, and the whole
-arrangement was admirable. On Shakspere day an equally excellent program
-celebrated the day. The programs for both were highly original. The
-annual _conversazione_ of the “Central” circle, TORONTO, was held on
-May 19th. The novel little arrangement for a program—three ribbon-tied
-circles—looks most inviting. A half hour of orchestra music preceded the
-address and concert, after which were stereopticon views and a promenade.
-The guests were entertained at the Normal School building, where the
-museum and picture galleries were thrown open to them.
-
-Among the MAINE circles is a goodly one at ROCKPORT, composed at its
-beginning in 1882 of twenty-one ladies. They have clung together through
-separation in a way quite remarkable. One of their number spent last
-year at sea, but took her books along, and had her CHAUTAUQUAN sent
-to meet her at various points. Another friend who has been around the
-world during the past year missed her books at Antwerp, but writes
-from San Francisco that she is ready to make up the year’s work. The
-Rockport circle has the peculiar honor of having for its president a
-lady over seventy years of age.——“Mountain Echoes” have reached us from
-BRIDGETON—nineteen of them. This circle was formed in 1883, and for a
-year met monthly; the success was so great that they have doubled their
-number of meetings. A sufficient proof of their statement that “good
-work is being done.”——Fifteen members of a circle at BANGOR write us
-that they have enthusiasm quite sufficient for a class much larger. It
-is the steady variety, too, we fancy, for since 1881 they have met, with
-few exceptions, every Monday night from October to July. The studying is
-done on this evening, and time has been faithfully used, for they have
-succeeded in reviewing several books. A talented young physician in their
-midst has favored them this winter with lectures on Animal and Vegetable
-Biology, with microscopic illustrations.——A spirited circle, the
-“Whittier,” of twenty-five members, is working at NORTH BERWICK. Debates
-are frequent features of their programs, and they have adopted the
-sensible habit of choosing timely questions. Shakspere day was observed
-by a reading of the “Merchant of Venice,” the characters being assigned
-by a committee. At North Berwick the circle is fortunate in having
-members of different denominations who mingle in perfect cordiality. The
-result of their work together has been, they write, “an improvement of
-mind and broadening of ideas.”
-
-A pleasant gathering of C. L. S. C. folks has been carrying on local
-circle work since October last at MEREDITH VILLAGE, NEW HAMPSHIRE.
-Some fifteen members are in the company. A gentleman interested in the
-work kindly furnishes them a room, lighted, warmed, and furnished. The
-memorial days are held in honor, and recently they have had “an extra” in
-a talk on chemistry from a teacher of the town.
-
-VERMONT is represented this month in a lively letter from MONTPELIER:
-“Our circle is not dumb, as might be inferred from our silence, neither
-are we deaf to the appeals for reports from local circles. The trouble
-is this: Though an organization of about twenty members since October
-last, we have until this month been nameless. One name after another was
-suggested until ‘The Idea Hunters’ was proposed, and met with general
-favor. I think our motto should be, ‘Hunt until you find,’ for we are
-constantly hunting in reference books for settlements to the many
-questions proposed. We are learning, of course, and getting no little
-amusement out of our researches as well.”
-
-From the “Chautauqua Quintette,” of CHELSEA, MASS., we have this cheery
-report: “We are a little company of five ladies, all intensely interested
-in the C. L. S. C. work. We derive great benefit from our work, and
-some of our programs would be creditable to a larger organization.”——A
-slightly discouraged circle, finding it “hard to exist,” is the
-“Thaxter,” of ATTLEBORO. The small membership troubles them. It should
-not, it seems to us, especially since they have five members who write
-“fine essays.” We surmise that if the “Thaxter” has five good essay
-writers it is better off than many a large circle, and from the program
-of their Longfellow entertainment it is evident that some one of their
-number knows how to manage such things. Cheer up, friends.——A really
-joyous letter comes from MELROSE, where the secretary of the “Alpha”
-has been delaying her report because the new members would not cease
-coming in, and she wanted to get them all. She writes: “Every member is
-enthusiastic, and I believe that excellent work is being done. This is
-my last year—that is to say the last of my _first_ four years’ course.
-Please accept the most cordial greetings of our circle; we hope to send
-annual greetings for many years to come.”——A dainty hand-painted souvenir
-of the Shakspere evening of the “Alpha,” at UXBRIDGE, accompanies their
-report of good, strong work. The circle is small, but, says one of
-their number, “Chautauqua means a good deal with us.” The “Alphas” are
-to be congratulated on the success of the memorial exercises they have
-held this year.——Twenty-eight “Pilgrims,” of DORCHESTER, with their
-pastor as leader, are pursuing their course up the hill of knowledge
-courageously. Their meetings are well attended and interesting. Their
-verdict is: “We certainly feel that our circle has been a great benefit
-to us all the year, though it has been our first attempt at such work.
-We have no reason to regret starting, and look to next year for greater
-results.”——At LYNN the “Raymond” circle carried out a very taking list
-of exercises in celebration of April 23d. It was the first entertainment
-of the kind the circle has ever given, and certainly they ought to
-be pleased with their success. Their program has that unusual merit,
-originality.——The “Vincent” circle, of NEEDHAM, was organized early in
-the fall, and has been flourishing since. Nearly forty members are in the
-class, and next year additions are expected. The “Vincent” is going to do
-what we wish every circle in existence would do, have a representative
-at their nearest Assembly—if you can not go to Chautauqua. The ideas
-and stimulus gained would be worth many times the cost and fatigue.——A
-suggestion comes from “Clark” circle, of JAMAICA PLAIN, that deserves a
-comment. It is that THE CHAUTAUQUAN print more of the programs which it
-reports. Did we not furnish at least four programs each month for the use
-of circles we should certainly do this. As it is, we prefer to take the
-many good suggestions which we get from the programs sent us, and use
-them in our monthly programs. We do this because the programs sent us can
-not be printed until so long after the performance has taken place that
-they are of no practical use to circles; by readapting them we can give
-them to circles in a way in which they will be of use. The “Clark” itself
-has sent us a program that deserves reprinting, only of what practical
-good would be a March program in THE CHAUTAUQUAN for July?——“Although but
-a very small part of the great Chautauqua army, we have caught something
-of its spirit, and wish it ever increasing success.” So writes the
-secretary of the correspondence circle of “Earnest Workers,” of which
-Alice C. Jennings, of Auburndale, is president. The circle has a thorough
-and systematic plan of work. Frequent letters from the president offer
-counsel and hints. At each monthly meeting memoranda from the students
-are read. These memoranda contain answers to a list of printed questions,
-such as: “What books have you read in connection with the C. L. S. C.?
-What three subjects in them have most interested you? Have you met with
-any difficulties, and if so, what?” etc. The whole plan of their work
-is admirable——The “Acadia” circle of FRANKLIN, MASS., was organized in
-1882. It has now sixty members. The president, although pastor of a large
-church, has been absent but five times since the circle’s organization.
-One of their great helps has been the pronouncing matches on Greek names
-and common English words. On Shakspere day the circle had the pleasure of
-listening to a lecture from Dr. R. R. Meredith, on “Leisure Hours.”
-
-From WOODBURY, CONN., comes a plea: “Pray receive into your host of
-local circles the ‘Lone Star,’ for we are alone. There were others with
-us who are not faded, but gone.” Marriage and going west has robbed the
-circle of its members, until but one is left to keep the fire burning on
-the shrine. We are glad to find a corner for that one here—certainly in
-these columns there is plenty of company and no need to grow lonely.——The
-“Newfield” circle of WEST STRATFORD is still “marching on.” On Shakspere
-day the circle read “Merchant of Venice” and “Julius Cæsar” with hearty
-appreciation, closing their celebration with a C. L. S. C. experience
-meeting. Many were the stories told of what Chautauqua had done for
-them.——MANSFIELD CENTER, a rural village in a dear old fashioned
-Connecticut street, is the home of a circle of eleven members. It was not
-begun until January last, but has shown its colors by having quite caught
-up. Two of the professors of the neighboring Agricultural College have
-given them very interesting lectures, and on Longfellow and Shakspere
-days recitations and music furnished pleasing entertainments.
-
-A report of a successful first year comes from AUBURN, RHODE ISLAND,
-where the “Clio,” of fourteen members, was formed in October last. The
-new circles are all, like the “Clio,” promising to start next fall with
-fresh vigor.——Our thanks are due the “Esmeralda Bachelor” circle for the
-program of the first memorial services under the auspices of the Rhode
-Island Chautauqua Union. Great credit is due to Prof. John H. Appleton,
-the president of the Union, for his efforts to make the occasion a
-success.——The _Sentinel Advertiser_, of HOPE VALLEY, devoted almost
-a column to a Shakspere evening, at which the “Aryans” of that town
-entertained the “Pawcatuck” circle of CAROLINA. Some twenty-six of the
-guest circle were present and were greeted with elegant hospitality by
-the home circle.
-
-They are always doing something new at OCEAN GROVE, NEW YORK. The last
-has been a Tree Planting Day. On April 15 the C. L. S. C. planted a
-beautiful maple for each class respectively of ’85, ’86, ’87, and ’88.
-Representatives of each class were present, the largest number, of
-course, being for 1888. There was a short address by Dr. Stokes, prayer
-by the Rev. A. E. Ballard, and an appropriate song for each tree set out
-in Bishops’ Grove. In the evening a “service extraordinary” was held;
-trees and tree planting were the topics of talks, of songs, reading
-and reminiscences.——The PALMYRA C. L. S. C. has enjoyed two evenings
-in chemistry recently, Prof. J. C. Norris, of Walworth Academy, kindly
-explaining dark points to them, and performing many fine experiments.
-The circle is very warm in its praise of the lecture and lecturer.——A
-Chautauqua circle consisting of fifteen members was organized at
-UNION SPRINGS in January of this year. The members make their lessons
-interesting and profitable with music, questions, and readings.——The
-“Philomathean,” of LANCASTER, has a capital way of working in its
-inexperienced members. “Questions, criticisms, and commendations are
-interspersed through the whole evening. We aim to draw out the silent
-ones, to make all interested and feel themselves responsible; try to
-have every one feel that he _must_ take every appointment, and allow no
-one to escape his turn at getting up question lists and easy work, and
-so seek to train them for the more difficult work.” This circle is not
-yet a year old, and numbers fifteen members.——We are happy to introduce
-the first C. L. S. C. inventors. The “Unique” circle, of LOCKPORT, claim
-that honor. Their invention is a game made up from the questions and
-answers in THE CHAUTAUQUAN, and is intended to form a comprehensive
-review of the year’s work. “The Unique” is the title of it. Would it
-not be generous in the Lockport circle to share their discovery with
-the rest of us?——The “Argonaut” circle, of Buffalo, entertained a large
-number of invited friends at a special meeting held in April. The affair
-was a decided success. The “Argonauts” deserve special credit for the
-efforts that they are making to awaken interest in the affairs of the
-C. L. S. C. by extra meetings.——At YONKERS there is a circle now in
-its third year which has never reported to THE CHAUTAUQUAN before. In
-all it numbers twenty. Their work during the past three years of their
-existence has been in regular programs of essays, readings, and questions
-and answers, with an occasional variation to suit necessity. This year
-they held a very successful memorial service in honor of Longfellow’s
-day, and more recently have had a valuable lecture, with experiments, on
-chemistry.——Fourteen persons are reading the Bryant course in connection
-with THE CHAUTAUQUAN, at MUNNSVILLE. The circle did not undertake work
-until January, so adopted a short course for the rest of this year rather
-than try the regular course. We hope to find them at work on the regular
-course next fall, with their hopes of a larger membership gratified.
-
-“Our Junto” is a circle within a circle. Five young men of the “Broadway”
-circle, of CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY, form it. Their program for the spring
-(of which they ought to be very proud) is a little book rather than a
-single page, containing the work laid out for the “Juntonians.” The
-plan is admirable. Each member has something to do at every meeting,
-and he knows what it is to be so long beforehand that he has ample
-opportunity to gather material. All circles will find it to their
-advantage to give attention to “Our Junto’s” plan.——Last October a few
-of the many students in the C. L. S. C. in NEWARK, organized a local
-circle. By the perseverance of these few others have been persuaded
-to join until the circle numbers about twenty. They have taken the
-name “Arcadia.” Memorial days in particular find pleasant observance.
-The last celebration, Longfellow day, was especially interesting. The
-chemistry is furnishing an excellent opportunity for experiments, which
-the “Arcadia” is fortunate enough to have a chance to carry on in an
-academy laboratory.——For the sake of northern New Jersey, which they are
-sorry not to see often reported in THE CHAUTAUQUAN, the members of the
-“Hawthorne,” of HACKETTSTOWN, a circle of five members, formed in April
-last, has sent us thus promptly its report. The “Hawthorne” plunged _in
-medias res_ and celebrated the Shakspere memorial almost as soon as its
-organization was complete. Such a vigorous start promises well for their
-progress next year.——The “Round Table” circle of JERSEY CITY is a band
-of twenty enthusiastic workers. A great deal of genuine hard work has
-been done by them the past year. The memorial days are celebrated, and
-every incentive used to foster the true Chautauqua spirit. Experiments
-have recently been given the class at the high school under the direction
-of the teacher of science.——The “Ionic,” organized in DOVER, in January
-last, grows in interest with each meeting. There are nine members, whose
-happy experience thus far has been never to be discouraged. But why
-should they be? “Each member does his part.”
-
-The “Kensington,” of PHILADELPHIA, is a circle of eleven members who are
-much in love with their readings. Such a success has their circle become
-that the members are willing to sacrifice other things to be present, and
-the president writes that he has received great benefit in going over
-again the fields of study that he harvested years ago.——A letter from
-the secretary of the “Pleiades,” of PHILADELPHIA, says: “‘Pleiades’ is
-now nearly two years old. We began the present school year by increasing
-our membership from nine to eighteen. We took the advice given in THE
-CHAUTAUQUAN on simplicity of government, adopting such rules only as
-would systematize matters, and having as little formality as possible.
-It is a success. The meetings are so profitable that we think of
-continuing them all summer. Two of our members have taken college courses
-in chemistry, and they have been giving us some practical experiments
-in this delightful study. Greetings to our sister circles, and praises
-to our _alma mater_.”——The “Emanon” circle, of WEST PHILADELPHIA, has
-sustained a sad loss in the death of Mr. John S. Rodgers, to whom the
-circle ascribes its success. He had been the instructor of the class for
-a long enough time for its members to appreciate his worth and sincerely
-mourn his death.——A similar sorrow has come to the circle of WEST
-BELLEVUE, where Mrs. Dr. W. G. Humber, a loyal member of the C. L. S.
-C., died on the morning of May 3d.——The Chautauquans of PITTSBURGH make
-more of Special Sunday than any other circles that we know of. Our last
-reminder of this is a tiny vest-pocket program of the exercises carried
-out by the “Duquesne” and “Mount Washington” circles on the second
-Sabbath in May.——The circle at UNIONDALE writes us that it has chosen
-for its name “Meredith,” in honor of Samuel Meredith, first Treasurer of
-the United States, and for their motto they have selected “Spare minutes
-are the gold dust of time.”——What better proof of the efficiency of the
-course than this testimony from the “Tennyson” circle of thirty members,
-at ROCHESTER, PA.: “We think generally that our most pleasant evenings
-are spent at our circle. One thing that deserves to be especially noted
-is that light reading among us is being superseded by solid study and the
-reading of standard authors.”——A circle of ’88s, at ALLEGHENY CITY, bears
-the popular name of “Wallace Bruce.” Starting with eighteen members they
-have grown to twenty-eight, a sign, we hope, that next year they will
-increase with the same rapidity. Their program of Shaksperean exercises
-is before us, and it bears some excellent numbers.——The “Carbondale”
-circle reports a prosperous year. The interest and enthusiasm of the
-members is increasing. The memorial days are all observed, and by
-devoting ten to fifteen minutes of each session to singing the circle is
-becoming familiar with Chautauqua songs. Mr. and Mrs. G. R. Alden gave
-the circle some very happy talks on their return from their recent trip
-to the Florida Chautauqua and New Orleans Exposition. The circle closed
-its first year with a trip to England; this year it closed with a “Greek
-night.” Going direct to France they propose to visit Paris, Switzerland,
-Italy and Greece. Arrived in Hellas, the manners, customs, home life and
-amusements of the Greeks are to be described in short essays. Each member
-intends to constitute “thonself” a committee of one to secure a new
-member for next year’s circle.——An appreciative letter reaches us from
-SPRINGBORO, where a circle now numbering fifteen has been in existence
-since 1881. The president writes: “While we are nearing the goal of
-graduation we look back with gratitude at our rich feast with kings and
-princes, with masters of art, of science, and of literature. Best of all,
-we find that we have been made to more clearly understand the wonderful
-power of the Infinite in all things. With our motto ‘Invincible’ still
-before us we hope not only to finish the course, but keep climbing with
-the Chautauqua brotherhood while life lasts.”——Let all good Chautauquans
-congratulate the fraternity at MONTROSE. Thus the secretary writes: “It
-has long been a wish that we might have a branch of the C. L. S. C.
-in our ‘City on the Hill.’ Four attempts were made, but to no avail;
-finally a few who were especially enthusiastic endeavored to push ahead
-once more. The result has been more successful than we anticipated. We
-organized in January with nine members, and now have grown to sixteen. We
-trust that July will find us with the desired amount of work fully and
-well accomplished. There is a most encouraging prospect of doubling the
-membership another year.”
-
-Twenty-seven enrolled members make up the circle at ERIE, PA. The circle
-meets in the Y. M. C. A. parlors, and the informal, pleasant meetings
-have proved a great attraction to the members. The Shakspere memorial
-was observed very successfully, by a parlor session. The literary part
-of the program consisted of a discussion on the authorship of Shakspere,
-followed by readings, then came refreshments and the evening was closed
-by a half hour of Chautauqua songs. Not many evenings ago an address was
-delivered by the president on Emerson, followed by an hour of practical
-observation through the telescope. The Erie circle claims that they have
-interesting meetings, and as a proof say that a non-member, a blind man,
-is in almost constant attendance.——About 100 members of the C. L. S. C.
-Alumni Association of PITTSBURGH met in a social way at the parlors of
-the Seventh Avenue Hotel on April 20th, to enjoy the pleasures attendant
-upon the third annual reunion of the society. Arrangements had been
-partially made for the reception of Dr. Vincent, who had been expected,
-but the following letter was received instead:
-
-    To the Annual Reunion of the Pittsburgh C. L. S. C. Alumni
-      Association, Pittsburgh, Pa.:
-
-    MY DEAR FELLOW-STUDENTS—I sincerely regret the engagement which
-    had been made prior to the invitation to meet you this evening.
-    The original engagement it was impossible to break. I am
-    therefore denied the privilege of your feast of reason and flow
-    of soul. The Chautauqua work increases in expansion and power.
-    The later classes are steadily growing. I have the good hope that
-    the classes of ’89, already forming, will be the largest and
-    most flourishing of all. I am more and more convinced that there
-    are multitudes of people who would hail with joy the provisions
-    of the “C. L. S. C.” if they were simply informed concerning
-    them. Are you doing all you can toward the enlightenment of the
-    great public with regard to the C. L. S. C. and other branches
-    of the Chautauqua work? Let me urge you to renewed zeal in this
-    direction. Bidding you “a hearty God speed,” I remain your
-    servant in this goodly work.
-
-                                                       J. H. VINCENT.
-
-The banquet passed off most pleasantly.
-
-At a recent meeting of the “Evergreen” circle, of GREENVILLE, S. C., the
-circle expressed in a series of fitting resolutions the sorrow of the
-members at the death of Mr. Richard Grant White, and their appreciation
-of the value of his recent work for THE CHAUTAUQUAN.
-
-A letter from PETERSBURG, VIRGINIA: “We organized our circle last
-October, but it was almost January before we got fairly started. We
-follow closely the work laid out in THE CHAUTAUQUAN, occasionally having
-a public meeting. Our observance of the Longfellow and Shakspere days was
-as creditable as any literary exercises ever presented in our vicinity.
-Our desire for books has been so much increased by the C. L. S. C. that
-we have resolved to establish a library for the reading element of our
-city, and we have begun by the purchase of a few works as a nucleus.”
-
-ORANGE CITY, FLORIDA, has the beginning of, we hope, a large circle, in
-six readers who are taking the C. L. S. C. with their general reading.
-They use the questions and answers and make the general news of the week
-a feature of every program. The “Orange City” circle is looking forward
-to an assembly some day at Mount Dora.
-
-OHIO comes in with a letter too good to lose: “I discover in your May
-number that a Kansas member of the C. L. S. C. class of ’85 says he is
-the oldest of that class and was born (1815) in the year of the great
-battle of Waterloo. I hope he will persevere and enjoy the exercises
-until he reaches the age of at least three of the ‘Irrepressibles of
-’84,’ two of whom are 75 years of age and one 84. The last is still
-reading for another seal and hopes to be at Chautauqua in August. Hope
-the member from Kansas will press on in the work he has begun, for
-there are great possibilities before him which can only be attained by
-perseverance. He will retain his mental faculties fresh and vigorous as
-in youth. Press on, good brother, and you will reap your reward here and
-hereafter.”——The C. L. S. C. of CINCINNATI and vicinity held their _Sixth
-Annual Reunion_ on May 5th in the parlors of the First Presbyterian
-Church. A goodly number were present from “Alpha” circle, “Cumminsville,”
-“Christie,” “Mt. Auburn,” “Cheviot,” “Grace M. P.,” “Third Presbyterian,”
-“Emanuel,” “Covington,” “Newport,” “Madisonville” and “Walnut Hills.”
-The program consisted of an address of welcome by J. G. O’Connell, Esq.;
-prayer by Rev. S. N. Spahr, followed by music, readings, and recitations.
-The room was brilliantly decorated with mottoes and class emblems, and
-a profusion of choice and fragrant flowers. From the chandeliers were
-suspended the class dates, ’85, ’86, ’87, and ’88, and the letters S. H.
-G. and under these were grouped merry companies, who took part in the
-collation, which was not the least enjoyable feature of the program. The
-quarterly vesper service was held on Special Sunday, May 9th, at Grace
-M. P. Church. It was ably conducted by Mr. E. F. Layman, President of
-“Grace” circle. Rev. S. N. Spahr gave a very excellent address to the
-members upon knowledge rightly directed.——The “Young Men’s” circle of
-CINCINNATI has been doing good work this year. The circle is composed
-of companion workers in church and Sabbath school, and the bounds of
-union have been strengthened by the united study of the “Word and Works
-of God.” The Chautauqua studies were taken up by them with an earnest
-desire to better fit themselves for successful work. Their faith and
-courage has been severely tried by the death of one of their active,
-earnest members, Mr. George E. Wilcox—a sorrow which they are struggling
-to make a blessing.——The class of ’88 has a live section at MORROW, the
-“Irving.” There are over thirty regular attendants in the band and their
-fortnightly meetings are conducted like college recitations, a pastor
-being the instructor. May the “Irvings” prosper and multiply.
-
-A friend writes from NORWAY, MICHIGAN: “We wish to be recognized by our
-fellow-workers as a prosperous circle, although a small one, and we are
-very glad we have joined them.” The “Norway” has made a splendid record
-in its year’s existence, having met every week since last October. It
-need not fear a lack of cordial welcome here.——“Thornapple” circle, of
-NASHVILLE, boasts a history very similar to that of the “Norway.” It
-was first organized a year ago, and its membership is ten. The members
-are all workers, and kindly report themselves highly pleased with the
-Chautauqua Idea.——A letter full of the Chautauqua characteristics comes
-from DECATUR: “Our ‘Pansy’ circle of twenty-five members have held
-regular meetings since October. We are enthusiastic, and have done
-genuine work. But it has not all been work. We have had a ‘question
-match’ upon Greek History and Mythology, the winner of the contest
-receiving as a prize an original poem. On Founder’s day the question
-box was on ‘What has Chautauqua done for me?’ On Longfellow’s memorial
-the circle visited a neighboring class, spending a merry evening. But
-the red-letter day of the year was April 23d, when a dinner party was
-tendered the members and their husbands by one of the circle. It was
-generally pronounced the most enjoyable affair the town had had in many
-a day and served as a good advertisement of what the C. L. S. C. does
-for its members. Few of our guests knew how much we had done or could
-do.”——An unusually good joint meeting took place at FLINT in honor of
-Shakspere. Two circles of the C. L. S. C. and one of the Spare Minute
-Course united. We like one thing on the program particularly. After
-taking up in essays Shakspere’s Character, Home Life and Contemporaries,
-the essays were all studies of one play—“Macbeth;” thus the plot of
-“Macbeth” was outlined, then followed “Macbeth’s Character,” “Lady
-Macbeth,” “Who was Duncan?” “Witches and Ghosts,” and “Moral of Macbeth.”
-This is a much more satisfactory method than several disjointed readings
-or studies. The evening was closed by conversation and readings,
-conducted by an able Shaksperean scholar, Hon. E. H. Thompson.
-
-Shakspere himself would, we wager, have been nothing loath to have taken
-part in the celebration given in his memory at GOSHEN, INDIANA; for
-“Kitchen Science” illustrated took up the first part of the evening, and
-the supper, we are told, was not confined to the articles on which THE
-CHAUTAUQUAN has tried to instruct its readers this past year. In the
-evening, after these gastronomic exercises were finished, a literary
-program was carried out.——Here is a circle “of the first magnitude.” Read
-its record. “The FRANKLIN C. L. S. C. of INDIANA has increased during the
-past three years from a membership of twelve to forty-five. We have never
-failed in having our regular meetings every two weeks since we first
-organized. During the past winter the circle managed the lecture course
-of our city, and as one of the results cleared nearly $100. Chancellor
-Vincent was one of the lecturers, and the members of our circle were
-delighted to meet him after hearing ‘That Boy.’”——The C. L. S. C. at
-LIMA, representing classes ’85, ’86, ’87 and ’88, is one of the brightest
-and most wide-awake circles in the State. The circle was organized
-three years ago, and now has a pleasantly furnished room with piano,
-library, etc.; meets every Friday evening, and observes all memorial
-days.——SHAWNEE MOUND has a Chautauqua class of twenty-three members. We
-are pleased to notice that the circle passed, at a recent meeting, a
-resolution of respect in memory of Richard Grant White, expressing their
-sorrow at the loss which American scholarship, and in particular the
-C. L. S. C. have sustained.——We are pained to record the death of Mr.
-Hermon St. John, at SALEM, on May 1st. The Chautauqua work loses in him a
-faithful friend.
-
-It has been remarked in these columns already that “Alpha” of QUINCY,
-ILLINOIS, is famous for its novelties. Their latest sensation was the
-very practical illustration of a subject given before the circle by the
-secretary. This gentleman is a native of Hibernia, and so was chosen for
-a paper on dynamite. When called upon to perform he produced a package
-of the explosive, much to the consternation of the members.——There died
-at RUSHVILLE, on April 18th, the oldest member, without doubt, of the
-C. L. S. C. in the world, Mr. Van Rensalaer Wells. Three years ago his
-daughter began reading to him the books of the course. He took a lively
-interest in these readings, and finally joined the class of ’86. Had he
-lived it was his intention to have visited Chautauqua at the graduation
-of his class.——A good woman from CHICAGO writes: “I went about from house
-to house among my friends, and finally succeeded in inducing three young
-persons, all earning their own living, to begin the readings with me.…
-We sit around a table socially, and discuss freely our literary repast.…
-I forgot to say that I am a very busy woman, the mother of three boys.
-My best reading is often done after nine at night, when the little eyes
-are closed in sleep.”——The announcement of a new C. L. S. C. arrival
-is made from OREGON, where the “Ganymede” of twenty members appeared
-in October last. Busy people, but they feel that they can not afford
-to miss the Saturday evening meeting. The meetings are to be continued
-through the summer for the purpose of review.——Another Illinois addition
-made to the C. L. S. C. last fall was at SAVOY, where a club of eighteen
-was gathered. Notwithstanding the very severe weather and deep snow,
-and the fact that the circle members are farmers, living far apart, the
-sessions are full and wide-awake. A very good plan has been tried by
-the circle in chemistry, the blackboard being used for exercises. Every
-circle ought to have a blackboard.——The history of the class at BUCKLEY
-began in 1882, when six members met in informal meetings for discussion.
-In 1884 it was thought wise to organize formally. Since that time the
-circle has been making a decided impression upon the community. Two
-public meetings have been given, which have attracted general attention.
-At the last, the closing session of the year, thoughtful remembrance was
-made of the president by the gift of a beautiful chair.——A band of nine
-join the ranks from WARREN. It is only of late the class has found a
-name. It is “Meridian,” from the fact that the town is situated on one
-of the meridians. The circle has been following THE CHAUTAUQUAN in its
-plan of work, using the published programs, with slight variation.——“It
-takes three to make a circle,” writes a lady from FARINA, “and we are
-three; one ‘Invincible,’ one ‘Pansy,’ and one ‘Plymouth Rock.’ We are
-scattered as to time, but are united in interest, in enthusiasm, and
-in determination. Our circle was organized in November, 1881, only a
-dot—myself—but though alone, and unsuccessful in securing readers,
-and hindered in every way from doing the best of work, there was a
-satisfaction in doing the readings that nothing had ever brought into my
-life. What we shall accomplish as a circle, the future will reveal, but
-there is no ‘giving up’ to any of us.”——A Chautauqua circle of MOLINE,
-not yet a year old, and a Shaksperean circle, under the same direction
-as the former, have been coöperating the past season in a series of
-parlor meetings of great interest. In January it was a dinner party; on
-Founder’s day a literary performance with brief essays on Chautauqua
-subjects; and on Shakspere day a decidedly new thing—a Shaksperean
-quotation contest. No one was allowed to give a quotation that had been
-given by another, and the successful competitor took the prize on his
-ninety-fifth quotation.——We are in receipt of the Longfellow program of
-the “Oakland” circle, of CHICAGO; an excellent and varied list of numbers
-it is. The “Oakland” is a wide-awake circle.
-
-From MARKESAN, WISCONSIN, the secretary of “Climax” circle writes: “We
-are still in a flourishing condition. Although some who were with us last
-year have gone to new homes, we have new members to make up those we have
-lost. There are no very young students in the class, but one has to wear
-two pairs of spectacles to see. We have observed most of the memorial
-days, and found the programs in THE CHAUTAUQUAN very useful.”——What one
-zealous reader did is told in a note from DARLINGTON: “Last year myself
-and daughter read the course alone. Before the beginning of the present
-year I put a short article explaining the C. L. S. C. scheme into our
-local paper, and called a meeting of all those who would like to take the
-course. The result is that we now have a circle of thirteen. There will
-probably be an increase next year.”
-
-A beautiful souvenir of the Longfellow celebration of the “Vincent”
-circle at MILWAUKEE, MINN., has reached our table. The memorial was a
-perfect success, and with justice the members felt very proud of it. The
-“Vincent” is another circle sprung from the faithfulness of a single
-reader, a lady who in 1883 began the course, and in 1884 had gathered a
-circle of twenty-two about her, each one of whom responds promptly and
-faithfully to all calls for class work.——The “Quintette” of “Plymouth
-Rocks” at DULUTH have been doing the regular work since October, in
-informal meetings led by the different members in turn. They expect soon
-to change their name to suit an enlarged membership.——The “Gleaners,”
-of ZUMBROTA, with a goodly number of their friends were treated to an
-interesting program of exercises on Shakspere day. The “Gleaners” are
-a power in their community, and have, they say, “enough enthusiasm to
-fill up an evening without refreshments.”——At HASTINGS a circle began
-life in October with sixteen regular members, besides several local
-members. The class has had a sad break in its ranks by the death of Miss
-Kate Stebbins, a bright young woman who had undertaken the C. L. S. C.
-studies.——ST. PAUL bids fair to become exactly what its Chautauquans are
-aiming to make it, a great C. L. S. C. center. To this end a “Central”
-circle has been formed in the city, composed of six circles, the
-“Wakouta,” “Itasca,” “Dayton’s Bluff,” “Plymouth,” “Canadian American,”
-and “Pioneer,” and numbering in all over an hundred members. The
-“Central” circle celebrated Longfellow’s day by a very enjoyable program,
-and is trying to make arrangements for other joint entertainments. The
-St. Paul friends are proud of having two of their number prominent at
-Lake de Funiak, Mrs. Emily Huntington Miller, one of the founders of
-the “Pioneer” circle, and Dr. L. G. Smith, pastor of the First M. E.
-Church.——The home of the Minnesota Summer Assembly, WASECA, is the center
-of a stirring circle of twenty members. The increase in the circle is
-largely due to the efforts of the Rev. A. H. Gillet and his colaborers at
-the Assembly, which met at this lake for the first time last year. The
-“North Star,” of Waseca, offers a very attractive plan of work.
-
-The IOWA friends come in as strong as ever. WINTERSET reports a new
-circle of twenty-five members, with a weekly program published in the
-local paper, and growing zeal.——DUNLAP reports another which is in its
-second year, and which numbers twenty-three. An especially good program
-was arranged by these friends recently. A number of their members
-visited New Orleans the past winter, and an evening of sketches of
-Exposition sights was arranged.——“Sunny Side Straight Line,” of HAMBURG,
-is composed of two school ma’ams. They meet whenever and wherever it is
-convenient; after five p. m., before eight a. m., at the gate or in the
-kitchen. Pleased with the course, they are looking forward to joining
-the “Pansies” at Chautauqua in 1887.——The AFTON circle had the pleasure
-of celebrating its first memorial day on April 23d. They succeeded so
-admirably that Addison day was observed as well. The Afton circle pays a
-kind tribute to the work: “We are glad the Chautauqua Idea struck us, but
-sorry it failed to reach us sooner. It has been of untold benefit to us,
-opening to our view new fields of thought, and arousing new resolutions
-for the future.”——At BLANCHARD the “Pansy” class gave an entertainment
-not long ago for the benefit of their work. An elocutionist was secured
-and after the performance the C. L. S. C. and its aims were presented to
-the audience. The circle realized a nice little sum from their venture,
-which they propose to turn into maps, charts and the like for their room.
-An excellent idea.——Kindly mention we must make, also, of the DECORAH
-circle. Like all Iowa circles, it “grows.” The secretary writes: “We
-began last year with quite a small number, but have kept adding to our
-numbers until there are eighteen now who are reading the course. Our
-circle is composed entirely of ladies, the most of whom have work that
-takes up the greater part of their time. We have very pleasant meetings
-and derive much pleasure and profit from them.”——WASHINGTON, IOWA, has a
-circle of thirty members. It has been holding weekly meetings for over
-two years. At the close of last year this circle held a picnic with
-the Fairfield circle, and this year they have distinguished themselves
-by an elaborate Longfellow entertainment. “Miles Standish” was read
-and illustrated by tableaux. The Washingtonians certainly displayed
-extraordinary artistic ability in arranging one, at least, of these
-tableaux. They wanted “Priscilla” led in on her “Snow-white Bull,” but
-how to manage the “palfrey” was a question. Here is how they did it: A
-long narrow table was padded, the legs wrapped, a head with suitable
-horns constructed, and the whole thing finally wrapped with white
-cotton-flannel. “Necessity is the mother of invention.”——A beautiful
-memorial comes from one of the members of the circle at HUMBOLDT. “My
-mother, aged eighty-one years, died March 4th. She was the first one in
-this county to become interested in the C. L. S. C. She made her eldest
-grandson a member, bought the books for the first year’s course, and
-read them first, marking whatever she wished him to notice. At our class
-meetings she always selected from the Bible the chapter to be read at
-the opening exercises.… A grand helper has left us.”——At KEOSAUQUA a
-circle was organized as long ago as ’82. Of the original eight members
-only three are left, but the circle has more than held its own, now
-numbering twelve or more members. They are fortunate in having as a
-leader a teacher of unusual ability.——At TABOR a circle was organized
-last September, which, with a goodly membership of interested members,
-is doing excellent work. A Professor from Tabor College has helped this
-circle much by performing for them chemical experiments.
-
-The Chautauqua work has lost one of its strongest members in COOPERSTOWN,
-DAKOTA, this year, in the sad death of Mrs. H. G. Pickett, who
-accidentally shot herself in her husband’s bank in that town. She was an
-ardent admirer of the Chautauqua work, and her life a true exposition of
-the truths that the C. L. S. C. is striving to bring into the practical
-every-day life of its members.——A spirited Shakspere anniversary was
-celebrated at FAULKTON. The parlors where the circle met were filled to
-overflowing with delighted guests, and full exercises of tragedy, song
-and jest were carried out.
-
-The “Kate F. Kimball” circle, of MINNEAPOLIS, KANSAS, started on its
-career in October last with a membership of thirteen. Their plan is
-simple and practical—a sure way of introducing conversation. Each member
-is required to prepare five questions on the readings, which are given
-to the circle, and which are then discussed. This method would serve a
-good purpose in the _conversazione_.——The _Kansas City Journal_ suggests
-that Tuesday night in that city ought to be called Chautauqua night, as
-nearly a dozen circles meet there on that evening.——The “Clytie,” of
-ARKANSAS CITY has had a severe trial of its loyalty this year. Malarial
-fever has broken their ranks so that they have been able to hold but a
-few meetings. It does not dampen their ardor though, and they express
-all honor and gratitude to Superintendent and Counselors for their wise
-help. The “Clytie” joins another Kansas circle in protesting against
-the name “Plymouth Rocks.” This is the “Greenwood,” of EUREKA, which
-declares, “We can not become reconciled to it.” The “Greenwood” does not,
-however, allow its pleasure in the reading to be spoiled by the class
-name, for it writes: “Chautauqua gives us a broad departure from our
-daily cares and ruts which is very refreshing, and we trust it will be of
-benefit to us.”——Here is a five-year-old Kansas town, EVEREST, of five
-hundred inhabitants, with a circle of sixteen members. Here is certainly
-a chance, with such a start, to grow up with the country.——Greetings
-to the class of ’86, and to all Chautauquans, come from the circle at
-LEAVENWORTH. This circle has ten members. Its chief circle interest is
-the question box, which frequently leads to a lively discussion. They are
-favored in having secured an excellent leader, the Rev. J. A. Monteith.
-Several of this class are reading the White Seal course.
-
-There are in NEBRASKA nineteen circles of the C. L. S. C. A strong
-effort is being made to secure at the Assembly at CRETE, in July,
-a full attendance of representatives from all these organizations.
-Accept a word of advice from THE CHAUTAUQUAN. Go to Crete if you can
-get there. It will pay you in more than double measure to take part in
-the exercises of C. L. S. C. day. Of the nineteen circles of Nebraska,
-the one at LINCOLN takes the lead, we believe, in numbers. It has
-reached forty-seven, with an average attendance of about forty. In
-recognition of the literary character of the circle the Superintendent
-of Public Instruction in Lincoln has kindly opened a room in the new
-State House to the circle. The Lincoln circle, as befits its location
-at the capital of the State, is taking active measures to make the C.
-L. S. C. day at Crete a success. Already they have attracted public
-attention by a unique Shaksperean festival, at which a number of guests
-were entertained.——Another of the nineteen is at FALLS CITY, an ’88
-offspring. The circle has seventeen members. An executive committee of
-three appoints instructors for the review of each meeting, following
-the plan in THE CHAUTAUQUAN. The class observed Longfellow day with
-appropriate exercises. Our Falls City friends have chosen a name with a
-meaning—“Misselts”—“I will surmount all difficulties.” Not an easy name
-to take, by any means, but the “Misselts” is made up of school teachers
-mainly, and what can they not do?——An addition to the Nebraska circles
-is made at HOLDREGE. It came about in this way, writes a friend: “I left
-my home circle in Indiana in December last and started out to ‘try my
-fortune in the far West.’ I first stopped at Odell, Nebraska, and tried
-to introduce the ‘Chautauqua Idea’ there. I found it was already being
-talked of, and by the efficient efforts of a gentleman interested in the
-movement, a grand, earnest circle was organized. In February I came to
-Holdrege, the ‘Magic City,’ as it is called, naturally expecting every
-one to be interested in the C. L. S. C. I had almost decided to give up
-the course, because I was so busy, when I met a teacher of the town—a
-‘Pansy.’ We have formed a circle, and next year instead of having the
-smallest number possible, expect to compare favorably with any in the
-State.”——BLAIR has a circle of twenty-two members this year. A small
-circle has been at work in the town for two years, but this year its
-membership has increased in remarkable proportions. Blair is situated
-within sight of the Missouri River, and from this noble stream the circle
-calls itself the “‘Souri.” Occasional parlor meetings for invited friends
-are enlarging the work rapidly in Blair.
-
-Already we have given our readers hints of the noble way in which
-Professor Spring has been representing Chautauqua at NEW ORLEANS. His
-last public exploit was the Shaksperean Anniversary. From a local paper
-we learn of the success of the undertaking: “The thirty-first birthday of
-the Stratford-on-Avon bard was celebrated last evening at the Exposition.
-The ceremonies were gotten up almost entirely by Prof. Edward A. Spring,
-director of the Chautauqua classes in sculpture. It was hoped that Judge
-Braughn and other local gentlemen learned in Shaksperean lore would have
-been present, but a heavy storm prevented. The ceremonies, however,
-were very successful, though briefer than had been intended. They were
-presided over by ex-Governor Hoyt, from far-away Wyoming, chief of the
-jury on education, who made a brief but eloquent oration in commencing
-the proceedings. He dwelt on the incomparable greatness of Shakspere
-and the immense influence his writings have had on the many millions of
-people speaking the English tongue, and showed how, as the centuries roll
-on and as the English speaking peoples grow and multiply, the luster
-that attaches to his name must grow brighter and brighter. Following
-Governor Hoyt, Professor Spring made a neat little speech, setting forth
-the benefits accruing to those connected with the great educational
-institutions with which he was connected, and how appropriate it was for
-the Chautauquans to include in the fifteen great events they commemorate,
-the birth of Shakspere. Mr. Spring then introduced Mrs. Florence Anderson
-Clark, of Bonham, Texas, a member of the C. L. S. C., who closed the
-evening by reading an original poem on Shakspere.”
-
-From the far western frontier of TEXAS, at ALBANY, comes this letter:
-“Three of us associated ourselves together the first of October to read
-the Required Readings of the C. L. S. C. In January we were joined by two
-more. Our method of study has been to have each member originate twenty
-questions, to present at each weekly meeting to the members, who on the
-following week take them up to answer and discuss. The circle has been
-quietly but seriously working. The benefit of having a certain course of
-reading has already been felt, and we believe that many others will be
-influenced to join us the next year.”
-
-COLORADO is represented by a circle of seventeen at DELTA, a growing
-young town blessed with many people of culture and refinement. The circle
-belongs to the ranks of the ’88s, and is proceeding with the vigor
-characteristic of the class. They luckily can introduce good music as a
-part of each evening’s program. By the secretary of the Delta circle a
-word of experience is added: “After pursuing the course of study nearly
-four years, I can add my testimony as to its great inspiration to all who
-are systematically keeping it up.”
-
-CARSON, NEVADA, has the “Sierra Nevada” circle of twenty-five ’88s, a
-vigorous young life that, in spite of delays in getting books, and the
-discouragements in starting, is getting along famously. The spread of the
-C. L. S. C. in the West depends very largely upon the organized circle.
-The “Sierra Nevadas” have a summer work of bringing in recruits, as well
-as of making up back lessons.
-
-The flags are flying from the “Green” circle, of PORTLAND, OREGON, and
-“we are getting along splendidly,” is their watchword. They write that
-they are growing more and more enthusiastic, and that the circle is
-becoming “a joy and a feast of good things” to them all. “Green” circle
-had a brilliant Longfellow celebration last winter. The feature of it
-was a Longfellow picture gallery, representing the principal heroes and
-heroines. A good idea to remember when we come around to February 27,
-1886.
-
-The remarkable Floral Festival held in SACRAMENTO, CALIFORNIA, on May
-5th, in honor of Mrs. M. E. Crocker, to whom that city owes so much for
-her munificent charities and endowments, was participated in by two of
-the local circles of that city. The “Sacramento” circle sent an elegant
-tribute to the festival. On a bust about three feet high, decorated
-with flowers and bearing the letters C. L. S. C., was erected a gateway
-with gates ajar; within was an open book. The “Vincent” circle sent one
-equally unique—a pyramid of flowers surmounted with a flower-wreathed
-pole, from which was suspended a banner of flowers.
-
-The “Alma” circle of SAN DIEGO, CALIFORNIA, consists of seventeen members
-of the class of ’87. Longfellow’s day was a very pleasant occasion with
-them. The president tells us: “The good effects of the reading are
-already to be seen among our numbers; a desire for good and profitable
-reading being manifested more and more as we pursue the course.”——The
-Chautauquans of SAN JOSÉ had a very interesting meeting in celebration
-of the “Bard of Avon.” A most excellent program was rendered. One of the
-leading features was a very able critical review of “As You Like It,”
-read by a lady of the circle.
-
-
-
-
-THE C. L. S. C. CLASSES.
-
-
-CLASS OF 1885.—“THE INVINCIBLES.”
-
-“_Press on, reaching after those things which are before._”
-
-
-OFFICERS.
-
-    _President_—J. B. Underwood, Meriden, Conn.
-
-    _Vice President_—C. M. Nichols, Springfield, Ohio.
-
-    _Treasurer_—Miss Carrie Hart, Aurora, Ind.
-
-    _Secretary_—Miss M. M. Canfield, Washington, D. C.
-
-    _Executive Committee_—Officers of the class.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-There will be excursions from Chautauqua to Niagara Falls every few days
-during the season, and there will be no difficulty in securing ample and
-satisfactory accommodations for the class of 1885, or any portion of it.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-The challenge of our classmate in Kansas brings forth the following from
-Maryland: “I see in the May CHAUTAUQUAN a chivalric old gentleman hailing
-from Kansas, claiming to be the oldest member of the class—being born in
-the year the battle of Waterloo was fought. Now, I have entered on my
-seventy-fifth summer, and remember distinctly the battle of Waterloo.
-But, he claims also to be the _youngest_. Now, if I shall have the
-pleasure of meeting him at Chautauqua, and he is so disposed, we will
-run a foot race. But, really, this is the time for ‘grave and reverend
-seigniors’ to speak out. Who comes next?”
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-NEBRASKA.—I trust that I shall be numbered with those who shall “pass
-under the Arches” at dear Chautauqua this summer, thereby proving that
-I am one who is earnestly striving to “Press on, reaching after those
-things which are before.” The C. L. S. C. means a great deal to me. These
-magic letters are the key which unlocks all the enthusiasm of my being.
-These four years have been a new revelation to me, and have been of
-deep, abiding interest, and a well-spring of joy. Last year my dearest
-friend, a devoted Chautauquan, a member of the class of ’85, a thorough
-“Invincible,” in every sense where right was involved, went on before.
-Since that time I have read alone, but hope to be one of the successful
-many who shall pass under the Arches and “begin” again, instead of ending
-on Commencement day.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-An earnest society lady writes: “The whole bent of my life is changed by
-the C. L. S. C. Next to being a Christian, it is the greatest blessing of
-my life. I read and listen to sermons and lectures more intelligently,
-and have been led into a spiritual life.”
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-ONTARIO.—I have often felt it my duty to express my thankfulness to the
-C. L. S. C. for the information I have received from their well chosen
-books. Words are inadequate to express my gratefulness to Chancellor
-Vincent and his coadjutors for the great and lasting benefit I have
-received from this course, although being unable to do the work as
-thoroughly as I would if time permitted. I complete my four years this
-summer, and I am more anxious than ever to explore other books which
-I have not read. This circle of reading has created a desire for some
-branches that hitherto was dormant, and revived the desire for others.
-From the first I have been anticipating a trip to Chautauqua, but will be
-unable to gratify my desire this summer. I hope to be able to receive my
-diploma at home. I think our class motto is excellent, and hope we will
-all prove worthy of our name—“Invincible.”
-
-
-CLASS OF 1886.—“THE PROGRESSIVES.”
-
-“_We study for light, to bless with light._”
-
-
-CLASS ORGANIZATION.
-
-    _President_—The Rev. B. P. Snow, Biddeford, Maine.
-
-    _Vice Presidents_—The Rev. J. T. Whitley, Salisbury, Maryland;
-    Mr. L. F. Houghton, Peoria, Illinois; Mr. Walter Y. Morgan,
-    Cleveland, Ohio; Mrs. Delia Browne, Louisville, Kentucky; Miss
-    Florence Finch, Palestine, Texas.
-
-    _Secretary_—The Rev. W. L. Austin, New Albany, Ind.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-From all quarters there comes up the assurance from members of ’86 that
-they mean to be at Chautauqua or Framingham this summer. Attendance at
-an Assembly, with its enthusiastic “Round-Tables,” conferences upon
-literature, art and science, new lights upon past reading, and new
-outlooks for the future, well nigh doubles the value of the course. Come,
-earnest readers of ’86, and see.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-Plans are already being formed for the graduation exercises at Chautauqua
-next year, and the hardly less interesting observances at the New England
-Assembly. Any suggestions bearing upon this important matter may be
-freely made by letter to the president or secretary, by those who can not
-be present at the Assemblies. The class of ’86 is the first _large_ class
-to graduate; it has done grand work in the course, and it means to honor
-Chautauqua and itself by suitable exercises and observances, when its
-thousands shall come up to receive from the University their diploma in
-August, 1886.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-We shall hear, personally or by letter, at the Assemblies, from our
-honorary members, of whom the class of ’86 is justly so proud.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-Will members of ’86, in New England, remember the new Hall of Philosophy
-at Framingham, now under way, and to be completed by July 1st? Send your
-subscription, if you have not done so; subscribe and send at once if you
-have not yet taken a share in this grand enterprise, and induce your
-friends to lend assistance, that the few hundred dollars needed to finish
-and furnish the building may be at once forthcoming. Remit to N. B. Fisk,
-Woburn, Mass.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-It is hoped that there will be a large number of the New England members
-at the Framingham Assembly in July.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-Let your light shine! hold the torch on high! let every one see that the
-class of ’86 is true to its name—“Progressives.”
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-Miss Alice C. Jennings, ’86, whose poems from time to time have appeared
-in THE CHAUTAUQUAN, writes as follows: “A severe sickness in childhood
-deprived me entirely of the sense of hearing. This has been more
-effectual than bolts and bars in excluding me from all institutions of
-learning. You can easily imagine how precious to a person so situated
-must be the opportunities of the C. L. S. C., and of the ‘Society to
-Encourage Studies at Home.’ At least four of my deaf friends have joined
-the C. L. S. C. on my own solicitation. We have tried to have a circle
-among ourselves. We live in five different places, but our headquarters
-are at Boston Highlands, and we send reports there every month.”
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-    “We study for the light,” we would not be
-     Like the black hue, absorbing every ray,
-     But like the white, gladly reflecting all,
-     That we may be true children of the day.
-    “Blessing with light,” as we have each been blessed,
-     For wisdom makes the weary earthway bright,
-     And walking in its ways we soon shall rest
-     With _Him_ in realms of everlasting light.
-
-                                              —_Mrs. E. J. Richmond._
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-To the New England Branch a suggestion is made in the interest of the
-class, and in behalf of the excellent Secretary of the New England
-Branch. Will not _every_ member not able to attend at Framingham this
-summer send (July 15-28) to Miss Mary R. Hinckley, South Framingham,
-Mass., a postal card with postoffice address, and bearing, if nothing
-more, “Yours for ’86”? To ascertain those who and how many are affiliated
-with “the good class of ’86” in New England, is most desirable for
-weighty senior and graduation interests.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-Reports from various quarters lead to the conclusion that, compared with
-the whole number at any time enrolled in the class of ’86, the number
-entering upon the Senior year will be exceptionally large. It ought to be
-large—larger than any class preceding, more thorough, more enthusiastic.
-We have the advantage of the experience of all who have gone before. Let
-us rise to our privileges.
-
-
-CLASS OF 1887.—“THE PANSIES.”
-
-“_Neglect not the gift that is in thee._”
-
-
-OFFICERS.
-
-    _President_—The Rev. Frank Russell, Mansfield, Ohio.
-
-    _Western Secretary_—K. A. Burnell, Esq., 150 Madison Street,
-    Chicago, Ill.
-
-    _Eastern Secretary_—J. A. Steven, M.D., 164 High Street,
-    Hartford, Conn.
-
-    _Treasurer_—Either Secretary, from either of whom badges may be
-    obtained.
-
-    _Executive Committee_—The officers of the class.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-At a great camp meeting near Indianapolis, in the first week of August,
-the Rev. Frank Russell, President of the class of ’87, is to set forth
-in an address, the nature of the C. L. S. C. as an educational and moral
-force.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-The wake of a C. L. S. C. class is found to kindle a bright way for the
-next. Much correspondence of the officers of the class of ’87 has been
-toward the interest of the class of ’88, and is now extending even toward
-that of ’89. Each succeeding class seems to promise increasing numbers
-and power.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-A member of ’87 has succeeded in forming a circle at Jefferson, Ohio, of
-ten members. She writes: “I can not tell you all the good our circle is
-doing for us individually. We have enjoyed our chemistry very much. We
-were very pleasantly entertained and instructed by experiments given by
-Professor Perry in April.”
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-From St. Johns, N. B., Mr. G. A. Henderson sends the following account of
-the C. L. S. C.: “We organized with five ‘Pansies,’ and were joined this
-year by seventeen ‘Plymouth Rocks.’ We were the means also of influencing
-the formation of another circle of ’88, over twenty in number. At present
-there are about sixty reading the course in our city. We look forward
-with deep interest to the publication of the book by our chief ‘Pansy,’
-and although we have not contributed to it, we hope to meet and march
-with you through the Gates in ’87.”
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-Hannah Percival Hamer, a member of the “Pansy” class, died at her home in
-Taunton, Mass., April 24, 1885. She was a most faithful worker and firm
-advocate of the Chautauqua course.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-On the 9th of April Miss Maggie B. McKnight, of Chambersburg, Pa., a
-member of the “Pansy” class, died. She was a devoted and enthusiastic
-Chautauquan, and looked with great pleasure toward the time when she
-could visit Chautauqua. She was reading with another member of the class,
-who intends, however, to keep on, saying that she “could not do without
-it now.”
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-              “Pansy—a tender thought!”
-    A happy prophecy was that, to send
-    That one bright flower of our class to hide
-    Behind this modest emblem, while she penned
-    Her strong, sweet thought. A prophecy fulfilled;
-    For pansies—tender thoughts of her—are found
-    Within the garden of our hearts in bloom
-    The whole year round.—_J. B. Stuart._
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-Westfield, N. J., is the home of a “Pansy” circle, calling itself by
-the cheerful name of “Hope.” It began with three sisters reading the
-course together. It was very fitting that they should receive their
-first inspiration from reading “Four Girls at Chautauqua.” The “Hope” is
-working hard to increase its membership.
-
-
-CLASS OF 1888.—“THE PLYMOUTH ROCKS.”
-
-“_Let us be seen by our deeds_.”
-
-
-CLASS ORGANIZATION.
-
-    _President_—The Rev. A. E. Dunning, D.D., Boston, Mass.
-
-    _Vice Presidents_—Prof. W. N. Ellis, 108 Gates Avenue, Brooklyn,
-    N. Y.; the Rev. Wm. G. Roberts, Bellevue, Ohio.
-
-    _Secretary_—Miss M. E. Taylor, Cleveland, Ohio.
-
-    _Treasurer_—Miss M. E. Taylor, Cleveland, Ohio.
-
-    All items for this column should be sent, in condensed form, to
-    the Rev. C. C. McLean, St. Augustine, Florida.
-
-    Class badges may be procured of either President or Treasurer.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-The following are among the circles not yet reported in our column. I
-first give name of circle, then place and number of members: “Gradatim,”
-Kennebunk, Me., four; Bloomfield, Ind, seven; Niobrara, Neb., eight;
-“Master” (motto, “Labor is the price of mastery”), Ionia, Mich., eleven;
-“Peripatetics,” Chicago, Ill., twelve; “Magnolia,” Marianna, Fla.,
-fourteen; “Philomathean,” Lancaster, N. Y., eighteen. The last named has
-by quotations, recitations, readings and essays celebrated the “memorial
-days.” For six months none but ladies composed the circle. They, however,
-so charmed three gentlemen that they sought admission and became
-enthusiastic students. The members of this circle so dislike the class
-name that they have refused to adopt it. They are among the others who
-express their enjoyment of the class reports in our ’88 column.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-The circle at Hastings, Minnesota, twenty-three members, has instructed
-its secretary to write their objection to our name. Among other things
-is the following: “In THE CHAUTAUQUAN we read of one class talking of
-establishing a ‘Heliotrope Bed’ at Chautauqua, and another a ‘Pansy Bed.’
-We might send a coop of ‘Plymouth Rocks,’ but we fear they might demolish
-the beds of flowers.” We have received encomiums of praise of the name.
-One from Mount Carmel, Connecticut, says: “Our name, like every other
-worthy thing, in spite of its ‘fowl’ associations, needs no defenders.”
-One from Toronto, Canada, writes: “I am satisfied with our name, for
-although it represents a speckled bird it will ‘crow’ a good deal when
-four years old.” Another from Marine, Ill., after thanking Chancellor
-Vincent for “How to Read Alone,” protests against a change of name or
-motto.—A member of our class, a boarder in a Young Women’s Christian
-Association of New Haven, Connecticut, writes: “I think as one takes up
-Chautauqua books he loses the relish for stories, e’en though written by
-good authors. What an opportunity for gaining knowledge of the highest
-order!”—“Angle” circle, North Groton, N. H., is bereaved in the loss of
-one of their earnest workers, Mrs. E. E. Merrill, a lady who read much
-and well, and yet in the five short months had become so fascinated with
-the C. L. S. C. that almost her last words were those of appreciation of
-the same.—The East Norwich, L. I., circle is likewise bereaved in the
-death of a devoted member, Miss Lizzie Franklin.—A class of unmarried
-ladies complains that they have not been noticed. If they will send us
-another letter, writing the name of their circle so we can decipher it,
-and also give the town, or city, and state in which they live, we will
-gracefully and gladly bow our recognition.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-“Among the Indians: Osage Agency, Indian Territory.—Our circle consists
-of six members—five teachers and one bookkeeper. Although each lives
-a busy life, we have had weekly meetings, kept up with the required
-reading, and celebrated two authors’ days, Bryant’s and Longfellow’s.
-Surrounded as we are by Indians, who still wear blankets instead of
-citizen’s dress, and who are not far advanced in the arts of civilized
-life, we feel doubly thankful for the benefits arising from such a course
-of reading.”
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-In Bingham Cañon, Utah, a mining camp situated about twenty-eight miles
-southwest of Salt Lake City, the New West Education Commission has a
-school established. One of the teachers proposed taking the Chautauqua
-course alone, but, mentioning it to several, organized a circle of six.
-Of the name she writes: “I like it so much. My home is in Plymouth, Mass.”
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-Half of the members of “Carleton” circle, Hudson, Mich., live out of town
-from two to six miles, yet they are numbered among the most enthusiastic
-and faithful. They have had full programs at every meeting, and have
-observed all memorial days. They number thirty-seven, twelve being of our
-class. The ’88s wear on their hats a symbolical badge (a _fac-simile_, in
-brass, of the pedal extremity of a Plymouth Rock). They like the _motto_,
-but not the _name_.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-One from Gilbert’s Mills, N. Y., writes: “I can not longer refrain from
-expressing how much I enjoy the reading of the course, although I am
-pursuing it alone, occasionally meeting with the circle at Fulton, five
-miles from here, which I much enjoy. The more I read and learn, the more
-anxious I am to go on, that I may be no disgrace to our grand class name,
-that takes me back to dear New England, and home. I would prove myself
-worthy of it and of our motto.”
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-The “Chippewas” is the name of a circle of twenty-two members, formed at
-the city of Eau Claire, Wis., October of 1884. Four of the members belong
-to the class of ’86, the others to that of ’88. The society has met once
-a week, and has observed the memorial days. In addition to the prescribed
-course, the class is reading the two volumes of Timayenis’s History of
-Greece.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-“Mountain City” circle, Frederick, Md., very appropriately and
-enthusiastically celebrated “Shakspere Day.” The program consisted of a
-“Sketch of his Life,” and the reading of “The Merchant of Venice,” the
-members taking the different characters.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-Mrs. F. B. Edwards, who with her daughter joined the class of ’88 last
-fall, and was a faithful and diligent member, died at her home in
-Hartford, Conn., March 14, 1885. She was a lady of excellent education,
-and had also the culture of much foreign travel and residence in Europe.
-She was delighted with the C. L. S. C. plan, and especially with the
-opportunities it offers for mental and moral growth.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-One of the most earnest and beloved members of the “Pierian” circle,
-of Brooklyn, N. Y., Morgan Morgans, has lately died. Mr. Morgans was a
-young man of but twenty years of age—a member of the class of ’88, and a
-zealous Christian.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-So much having been written _pro_ and _con_, respecting our class
-name, it is proposed to have the entire class vote for or against the
-name. The circles will send their vote, giving the number in favor and
-against present name. Those who are not in circles can send their votes
-as individuals. The vote should be sent to the Rev. C. C. McLean, St.
-Augustine, Fla., at as early a date as possible.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-    Thoughts are but the seeds of truth ready for the ground,
-    Promises of future good that will within be found;
-    Yet, with purer, truer thoughts the words have purer sound.
-
-    Words are slender saplings, growing in the earth,
-    Starting from the very spot where the thoughts had birth,
-    But the noblest words can never tell the deed’s great worth.
-
-    Deeds are mighty forests, towering and grand,
-    Not results of thoughts that were planted in the sand,
-    But deeply rooted, broad-leaved trees that will forever stand.
-
-    Thoughts are truly noble, yet their work lasts but a day,
-    Words are often mighty, still their power may not stay,
-    But the influence of noble deeds can never pass away.
-
-                                                      —_Emily G. Weegar._
-
-
-
-
-THE SUMMER ASSEMBLIES.
-
-
-FRAMINGHAM, MASSACHUSETTS.
-
-The writer of this article has visited, in different years, most of the
-Sunday-school Assemblies, and he has found none, not even Chautauqua
-itself, where the wave of C. L. S. C. enthusiasm runs higher than at
-the New England Assembly, South Framingham, Mass. Every class has its
-headquarters, trimmed with greens and flowers, with the class-motto
-wrought upon its walls; and every class has its anniversary, with toasts
-and cream. The Round-Table is crowded at every session with intelligent
-students, who can both ask and answer questions. If a reporter could have
-taken down and printed all the replies given one afternoon last summer
-to the inquiry, “What good is the C. L. S. C. doing?” it would have
-furnished a valuable document for the use of workers in the cause. The
-camp-fire is always crowded; last year the ranks, arranged by classes,
-counted over five hundred members; and this year it will be greater.
-
-The traveler on the railway sees already a white columned building
-gleaming among the trees on the summit of the hill. If he be a
-Chautauquan, he needs no one to tell him “The Hall of Philosophy,” for
-he recognizes it at once as the copy in every detail of the building at
-Chautauqua. This Hall will be dedicated by the Chancellor during the
-coming session of the Assembly, when from all New England the faithful
-will rally to participate in the great occasion. Its dedication will take
-place on Wednesday, July 22d, and the address will be delivered by the
-Rev. Edward Everett Hale, D.D., one of the Counselors of the C. L. S. C.
-
-The Recognition day services will be held on Thursday, July 25th, when an
-address will be given by the Rev. Luther T. Townsend, D.D., of the Boston
-University.
-
-Among the leading lecturers (and lecturesses) of the Assembly during the
-present season will be the Rev. F. E. Clark, D.D., Prof. W. N. Rice,
-Dr. E. C. Bolles, Dr. R. R. Meredith, Dr. Geo. C. Lorimer, Robert J.
-Burdette, Miss Kate Field, and Mrs. Mary A. Livermore.
-
-
-MONTEAGLE, TENNESSEE.
-
-Monteagle is in the State of Tennessee, upon the Cumberland Mountains,
-2,200 feet above the sea-level. We have here the most invigorating,
-health-giving atmosphere, the purest water, the most beautiful wild
-flowers, the grandest mountain scenery, the most picturesque views of
-the valley lying hundreds of feet below, the loveliest vales, the most
-magnificent forests of native trees—indeed, a combination of all the
-desirable natural conditions for a pleasant summer resort.
-
-This is the place which has been selected by the Christian people of
-the South, of broad views, of liberal hearts and generous impulses, of
-intellectual culture and refinement, for the location of the Monteagle
-Sunday-school Assembly. This Assembly is permanently established by a
-charter granted by the State of Tennessee. For two years they have been
-very successful.
-
-If there is virtue in faithful and capable teachers and honest work, no
-one in 1885 will go away from Monteagle dissatisfied.
-
-These schools offer to teachers and intellectual people a place where
-they can spend the heated term of each year, combining study with rest
-and recreation, in a delightful and inexpensive mountain resort, free
-from all social dissipation. It is proposed to furnish in the summer
-schools of Monteagle the best instruction in every department open. All
-who seek absolute rest on these mountain heights will be free to take it;
-those who shall seek only lighter courses will find entertainment; and
-those who wish thorough instruction will not be disappointed.
-
-The summer schools open June 30th. The Assembly opens August 4th, and
-closes August 28th. Among the lecturers will be Dr. B. M. Palmer,
-President Chas. Louis Loos, Dr. D. M. Harris, Bishop Walden, Sau Ah-Brah,
-the Rev. Sam Jones, Dr. Lansing Burrows, Wallace Bruce, and Hon. G. W.
-Bain.
-
-
-ISLAND PARK, INDIANA.
-
-The Island Park Assembly will hold its seventh annual session on the
-beautiful grounds of the association near Rome City, Indiana. The
-Assembly will open July 14th, and remain in session until July 30th. The
-Tabernacle Lecture Course will be unusually brilliant and attractive.
-Among the speakers will be Bishop Foster, Bishop Bowman, Prof. C. E.
-Bolten, Wallace Bruce, Dr. Geo. C. Lorimer, Dr. H. H. Willets, Dr. John
-Alabaster, the Rev. John DeWitt Miller, and Miss Lydia Von Finkelstein.
-
-The music will be under the general management of Prof. C. C. Case. The
-Goshen full band and orchestra, and the Hayden Quartette will be in
-attendance. The Sunday-school Normal Class will be under the personal
-instruction of the Superintendent of Instruction, and will be one of
-the most important features of the coming Assembly. The course will be
-identical with the Chautauqua course, and graduates will be entitled to
-the Chautauqua diploma.
-
-The visitor finds the Island, some twenty acres in extent, a few
-minutes’ walk over a bridge and through a shady avenue from the railroad
-station, Rome City, with the village at an equal distance westward.
-The Island is naturally beautiful, always fanned by cool breezes, with
-hills and miniature valleys, romantic nooks, a beautiful beach, and a
-drive partially surrounding it, many fountains and wells, and a plaza
-surrounded by hotels and offices. Beyond the rustic bridges of the canal
-are a Tabernacle seating 3,000, a building containing the Model of
-Palestine, and the Art Hall with its large lecture rooms.
-
-From the north is to be seen, a mile across the Lake, “Spring Beach,” a
-well appointed hotel in an elaborately improved park, containing mineral
-springs and the famous trout ponds.
-
-South of the Island, across a bridge, are the Assembly lands, containing
-the Amphitheater, and laid out in lots and avenues, with a high bluff
-to the Lake. Here are opportunities to tent in perfect quiet or in the
-liveliest streets of the Assembly City.
-
-Two steamers ply on Sylvan Lake, between the Island, the head of the Lake
-and Spring Beach. Two hundred row boats are kept.
-
-Postoffice, telegraph, bathing and laundry facilities on the ground.
-Ample hotel and boarding arrangements in the village.
-
-
-MONTEREY, CALIFORNIA.
-
-The sixth summer Assembly of the Chautauqua Literary and Scientific
-Circle will be held at Pacific Grove, near Monterey, California, opening
-with an address Monday evening, June 29th, and closing Friday, July 10th.
-
-This Assembly, in spirit and purpose, resembles the famous Assembly held
-each summer at Chautauqua Lake, New York. The course of lectures during
-the coming session will include in its subjects not only scientific
-themes, but those of art, history, and general literature.
-
-Microscopes, stereoscopes and other apparatus will abundantly illustrate
-the lectures. The managers also intend to add to each evening’s lecture
-the attraction of beautiful music, illustrative tableaux, recitations,
-etc.
-
-The Assembly will open on the evening of June 29th, with an address by
-Dr. C. C. Stratton, of San José, President of the Pacific Branch.
-
-A few of the speakers and subjects will be as follows: The Rev. Dr.
-Wythe, Oakland, “Scenes in Great Britain and the Continent;” Prof. H.
-B. Norton, San José, “The Knights of the Temple;” F. B. Perkins, San
-Francisco, “Wit and Humor;” Dr. C. L. Anderson, Santa Cruz, “Diatoms;”
-Edward Berwick, Carmel Valley, “World Federation;” Adley Cummins, Esq.,
-San Francisco, “The Sanscrit Language and Literature;” the Rev. Dr. E. G.
-Beckwith, San Francisco, “School and Skill.”
-
-Sunday-school Normal Work will receive its due share of attention.
-
-The music of the Assembly will be in the very competent hands of Mrs.
-Helen M. Cushman, of San Francisco, and will be artistic and delightful.
-
-The morning of Friday, July 10th, will be occupied with the interesting
-exercises of the Third Graduating Class of the Pacific Branch C. L. S. C.
-
-Pacific Grove is situated on the beautiful Bay of Monterey, and connected
-with the ancient capital of the State by a pleasant drive of one and a
-half miles, over a macadamized road lately constructed. In beauty of
-location it can not be excelled—its graceful pines, extending to the
-water’s edge, affording a delightful refuge from the heat of the sun. As
-a healthful place of resort, it is not surpassed by any locality in the
-State. The value of the Assembly held here has been fully assured by the
-delightful sessions of the past five years.
-
-The well known facilities for studying Natural History at Pacific Grove
-have made that one of the important topics of study, and much enthusiasm
-has been aroused on the coast by the work of the C. L. S. C. in this
-department.
-
-
-LAKESIDE, OHIO.
-
-The prospects for the work of 1885 in this beautiful and healthful
-summer resort are commensurate with the energy displayed by the zealous
-management. The grounds are charmingly located on the northern shore
-of the Peninsula, opposite Sandusky, Ohio; accessible by an hour’s
-delightful steamer ride from this city, and will probably be connected
-with the Danbury station of the Lake Shore Railroad by rail this season.
-The Encampment sessions begin on Tuesday evening, July 21st, the brief
-enthusiastic “Reunion” to be followed by one of the spicy and wise
-lectures of the Rev. P. S. Henson, D.D., of Chicago. There will then
-follow for nearly two weeks a rare program under the superintendency
-of the Rev. B. T. Vincent, of Philadelphia, Pa., assisted by the Revs.
-F. Russell and E. Persons. Mrs. B. T. Vincent will have charge of the
-Primary Teachers’ Department, and also the Boys’ and Girls’ Meeting,
-assisted by the Rev. J. S. Reager, of Ohio. The Models of the Tabernacle,
-Jerusalem, etc., will be explained daily by the Rev. Dr. Hartupee and
-Mr. Tannyhill. Miss Ross, of Chicago, will give daily instruction in
-Kindergarten work, and Professor Trueblood, of Delaware, Ohio, in
-Elocution. Daily devotional meetings will be conducted by the Rev. W. H.
-Pearce, of Erie, Pa. Lectures and sermons are announced from Bishop R. S.
-Foster, Drs. Henson, Alabaster, Nelson, Bayless, Parsons, Rev. Messrs.
-Young, Pearce, Russell, Reager; Colonel Bain, of Kentucky, Wallace Bruce
-and Leon H. Vincent. Brilliant stereopticon exhibitions, with lectures by
-the Rev. Mr. Young and Professor Bolton. Oriental exhibitions by Miss and
-Mr. Von Finkelstein, with their gorgeous collection of Oriental costumes,
-etc. The Meigs Sisters and Professor Underhill will give concerts and
-elocutionary readings; Professor Trueblood will also give popular
-readings. Mr. French, of Chicago, a racy and instructive Chalk-talker,
-will “draw.” The music will be under the able direction of Professor
-Brierly, of Erie, Pa., and Miss McClintock will delight the crowds who
-gather at Lakeside. The C. L. S. C. will, of course, have a large place
-in the attention of the people, as Lakeside is a center of a large field
-of workers in this line. There will be “Round Tables,” etc., and a public
-Recognition service for the class of ’85, all of whom who desire it may
-secure this privilege there, and receive their diplomas, which will be
-there for distribution, if they inform the Rev. B. T. Vincent in time to
-see that the diplomas are sent to him for them. A Soldiers’ day, with war
-songs and a lecture on “Echoes from Round Top,” by the Rev. J. B. Young,
-of Harrisburg, Pa., will form one of the enthusiastic features. The
-promises of Lakeside, one of the finest of Chautauqua’s daughters, were
-never so good, nor so sure of rich fulfillment.
-
-
-CRETE, NEBRASKA.
-
-The Nebraska Sunday-school Assembly Grounds consist of one hundred and
-nine acres on the banks of the Blue River, at Crete, Nebraska. Its first
-session was held in that town in July, 1882, under the direction of the
-Rev. J. D. Stewart. Last year, at its third session, a splendid tract of
-land was donated to the Assembly. It extends along the river bank, with
-admirable opportunities for boating, contains a beautiful grove and ample
-grounds for buildings, walks, drives, and other purposes. Two lecture
-halls and a dining hall have already been erected, and some hundreds
-of tents provided; while a Normal Hall, several cottages, and other
-buildings are proposed.
-
-The Normal Department will be in charge of Prof. R. S. Holmes, who has
-been for many years a teacher of this department at Chautauqua.
-
-The Primary Normal Department will be in charge of Miss Lucy J. Rider,
-who will also conduct a children’s class daily.
-
-Dr. J. H. Vincent, President of the Circle since its commencement, and
-Chancellor of the Chautauqua University, will be present and give two
-lectures. Others who have had wide experience in literary pursuits will
-give their counsels on the ways of spending time most profitably in
-reading and study for the people.
-
-Among the lecturers engaged are: The Rev. R. R. Meredith, D.D., of
-Boston; the Rev. O. H. Tiffany, D.D., of New York City; the Rev.
-Robert Nourse, of Washington, D. C., and the Rev. H. M. Ladd, D.D., of
-Cleveland, O.
-
-A course of musical instruction will be given by Prof. J. E. Platt. Prof.
-W. F. Sherwin will give a lecture and conduct concerts.
-
-
-OTTAWA, KANSAS.
-
-By the time that this reaches the readers of THE CHAUTAUQUAN the
-Inter-State Assembly of Kansas and Missouri will be in session at its
-home in Forest Park, in the city of Ottawa, Kansas. No other assembly
-is entertained with such hospitality, for the people of Ottawa throw
-open to it their public park, in the limits of their city, on the banks
-of the historic Marais du Cygne, “The Swamp of the Swan,” celebrated
-by Whittier’s pen in the border days of Kansas. Among the orators
-whom they expect to hear are many whose names are well known to all
-Chautauquans, as Wallace Bruce, Dr. Henson, Robert Nourse, Dr. Tiffany,
-Sau Ah-brah, and our own Chancellor, Dr. Vincent. Indeed, it will be
-quite a transplanting of the Chautauqua Idea to the western prairie,
-for as at “the Mecca of us all,” we shall hold daily a Round-Table; the
-Commencement service will be fulfilled, the Chancellor will deliver the
-address to the graduating class and confer the diplomas of the C. L. S.
-C.; Prof. Sherwin will wave the baton before the chorus on the platform;
-Prof. Holmes will teach the Normal class; Sculptor Spring will instruct
-the class in clay modeling; and the general Superintendent of Instruction
-will be Dr. J. L. Hurlbut.
-
-Last year, the C. L. S. C. interest showed a great increase. In 1883,
-the number of C. L. S. C. members who clasped hands around the camp-fire
-was twenty. In 1884, it was nearly ninety, and if we could count those
-who joined before the close of the Assembly it would reach a hundred.
-We look for twice as many on Tuesday evening, June 30, when we expect
-to be entertained with stereopticon pictures of “Sights and Insights
-at Chautauqua” by the Rev. O. S. Baketel, of New Hampshire, and at the
-close of the lecture, march in procession to the camp-fire, and sing and
-talk together. We expect also a great day on July 1st, which is given
-to the “Grand Army of the Republic.” Perhaps no other State went into
-the war with quite the enthusiasm of Kansas; certainly no other has as
-large a proportion of veterans settled within its borders. Every year
-the Assembly recognizes these old heroes, and “Old Soldiers’ Day” always
-draws a multitude. We shall have a concert of war songs in the morning,
-and a lecture by General O. O. Howard, U. S. A., in the afternoon, when
-the Governor of Kansas is expected to preside.
-
-No gathering in Kansas is complete without a Temperance meeting, for
-Kansas is the banner State in constitutional prohibition. Let it be said,
-all stories to the contrary notwithstanding, that there is no defection
-in the ranks of the prohibition army, and no retreat. The cause is as
-strong as ever, and no one thinks of rescinding or re-submitting the
-Amendment. We hold “Temperance Day” on July 2, when Dr. Philip Krohn
-and Col. Geo. W. Bain will speak, and various conferences on different
-aspects of the work will be held.
-
-The Ottawa Assembly extends a welcome to all Chautauquans who may enter
-its gates, and gives its assurance that they will find themselves at home.
-
-
-MOUNTAIN LAKE PARK, MARYLAND.
-
-This delightful summer resort is situated on the Baltimore & Ohio
-Railroad, in Garrett County, Maryland. It is 2,800 feet above sea level,
-in the midst of sublime scenery. The place itself is enough to attract
-all lovers of the true, the beautiful, and the good, but besides the
-feast for the eyes and lungs, there is a feast of reason and a flow of
-soul prepared to profit, entertain, and inspire the hosts who gather to
-the Assembly.
-
-The principal lecturers are Prof. H. L. Baugher, D.D., of Pennsylvania
-College; the Rev. G. W. Miller, D.D., of Philadelphia; the Rev. C. P.
-Marsden, D.D., of St. Louis; the Rev. Z. Warner, D.D., of Parkersburg,
-West Virginia; the Rev. N. L. Reynolds, of Mt. Pleasant, Pa.; the Rev.
-J. B. Van Meter, D.D., of Baltimore; J. B. Phipps, Esq., Secretary of
-Maryland Sunday-school Union and author of pictorial designs for the
-Berean Lesson Periodicals.
-
-“Thorough Normal Work” is the motto of Mountain Lake Park Assemblies. The
-Assembly Normal Union course of study will be pursued during the session,
-and diplomas awarded on Normal Union day, August 19th.
-
-The C. L. S. C. Department was organized two years ago, and Monday,
-August 17th, has been set apart to this interest. A lecture on
-“Self-help” will be delivered by the Rev. J. T. Judd, A.M., of Lewisburg,
-Pa., president of the circle, with special C. L. S. C. exercises.
-Round-tables, vesper services, class unions, and camp-fires will be
-enjoyed during the Assembly session.
-
-New Testament Greek will be made a specialty. The Rev. C. E. Young, of
-Baltimore, instructor.
-
-Geology will receive the attention of the Rev. N. L. Reynolds, who
-inspires enthusiasm in this noble study.
-
-Elocution classes will be formed as last year, and Amateur Photography
-will be the pleasant recreation of lovers of the art.
-
-The Assembly meets August 6th and closes August 19th. For further
-information address the Rev. W. Maslin Frysinger, D.D., Baltimore, Md.,
-or the Rev. Jesse B. Young, Harrisburg, Pa.
-
-
-ROUND LAKE, NEW YORK.
-
-The management of the Round Lake, N. Y., Sunday-school Assembly sends
-greetings to its hosts of old friends and to many others whom it hopes to
-make warm friends in the near future. The last year was one of the best
-in its history. Numbers, meetings, speakers, work and workers, influence
-and the divine blessing, all combined, made it a power for good,
-wide-felt and lasting. It is the aim to make the coming Assembly better
-than ever. They have planned on the same generous breadth and scope of
-the last season, and are confident their work will merit approval.
-
-The program already completed is full and rich and varied. On July 9th
-and 10th there will be a reunion of chaplains and soldiers. The meeting
-is most vigorously planned for. There will be a large gathering of the
-old soldiers; Col. G. A. Cantine will act as Grand Marshal. Gen. John
-A. Logan has been secured as speaker. The Sunday-school Assembly will
-hold a longer session this season than ever. Beginning July 14th, it
-will continue fourteen days, and each day will be packed with varied and
-most profitable exercises. They have a larger variety of specialties
-than formerly, viz.: French, German, Painting, Drawing, Clay Modeling,
-Oratory, Vocal Music, Kindergarten, Calisthenics, Phonography, etc., etc.
-
-On C. L. S. C. day, Tuesday, July 21st, Dr. John H. Vincent, the
-originator of the Idea and developer of its plans and inspirer of its
-growing work, will be present and address the graduating class, who
-will pass the “golden gate” and from his hand receive their well-earned
-diplomas.
-
-The following is a partial list of the lecturers: The Rev. J. H. Vincent,
-D.D., the Rev. John P. Newman, D.D., the Rev. H. A. Buttz, D.D., the Rev.
-S. W. Dike, A.M., the Rev. A. D. Vail, D.D., the Rev. Geo. L. Taylor,
-D.D., the Rev. I. J. Lansing, A.M., Prof. J. L. Corning, the Rev. D. H.
-Snowden, the Rev. C. C. McCabe, D.D., Senator James Arkell.
-
-The Trustees, with great care and cost, have given special attention to
-every part of the grounds, draining, cleansing and beautifying, rendering
-the grounds, if possible, more healthful than ever.
-
-Never was this “charming spot of nature and art” more beautiful and
-health-inspiring than to-day! Never was it more sought for as a FAMILY
-SUMMER HOME than this spring.
-
-
-MONONA LAKE, WISCONSIN.
-
-The Sunday-school Assembly at Monona Lake, Madison, Wisconsin for 1885,
-will hold its session from July 28th to August 7th. The specialties
-are: Music, Prof. Sherwin; Grand Chorus of 300 voices; Goshen Band and
-Orchestra; Sunday School Normal; Children’s Class. Some of the speakers
-are: Bishop R. S. Foster, Wallace Bruce, Miss L. M. Von Finkelstein, the
-Rev. George C. Lorimer, D.D., Prof. William I. Marshall, Prof. W. C.
-Richards, Ph.D., the Rev. O. C. McCulloch, D.D., the Rev. D. Read, D.D.,
-the Rev. G. H. Ide, D.D., Meigs Sisters Vocal Quartette, C. F. Underhill
-reader.
-
-
-WASECA, MINNESOTA.
-
-The Assembly at Maplewood Park, Waseca, Minnesota, opens June 30th, and
-continues in session until July 10th.
-
-Thursday, July 9th, will be Chautauqua day, and on that day a public
-recognition service of the graduating class will be held. There will be
-an address suitable to the occasion, and the recognition service as used
-at Chautauqua will be used here. In the evening there will be a camp-fire.
-
-The names of Prof. H. B. Ridgeway, D.D., the Rev. Frank Bristol, Miss L.
-M. Von Finkelstein, the Rev. C. A. Van Huda, D.D., and the Rev. J. F.
-Chaffee, D.D., are found in the list of lecturers. No one has visited
-Maplewood Park without feeling that Nature has done her part in providing
-here a delightful retiring place for tired people and for those who are
-in danger of becoming so.
-
-A dense grove rises forty or fifty feet above the lake. The lake itself
-is a beautiful sheet of water, around which is a magnificent carriage
-drive. All so quiet that the busy world seems shut out, while all Nature
-seems to say, “Come and rest.”
-
-Besides, there are the attractions of the Assembly, calling the mind
-into new channels and awakening new thoughts and kindling new and noble
-desires for intellectual and moral improvement.
-
-The time at which the meetings are to be held this year has been
-selected, with special reference to the convenience of the people.
-
-Bro. Gillet, superintendent of the Assembly, never needs an introduction
-to the Northwest. He will make the occasion one of lasting good to the
-interests he represents.
-
-
-MAINE CHAUTAUQUA UNION.
-
-Arrangements are being made by the officers of the Maine Chautauqua
-Union for a grand meeting at Fryeburg, to begin July 27th, 1885, and
-to continue one week. The grounds at Martha’s Grove are being put in
-order and beautified by Mrs. Nutter, the prime mover in this matter, and
-everything will be done for the comfort and enjoyment of all Chautauquans
-who visit this lovely spot. There is soon to be erected on the grounds a
-“Hall in the Grove,” after the style of the one at Chautauqua.
-
-The program for this season is an attractive one and will consist of
-illustrated lectures, vocal and instrumental music, essays and readings.
-Some part of each day is to be devoted to the Round-Table, question box,
-discussions and reports of circles. As a result of our meeting last year,
-circles have sprung up all over the State. In Portland alone, there are
-_three hundred_ Chautauquans where there were only _nine_ last year.
-
-
-
-
-EDITOR’S OUTLOOK.
-
-
-VICTOR HUGO.
-
-The greatest of the French writers of this century has passed away from
-earth, after eighty-three years of a life which was, like Carlyle’s, full
-of work to the very end. Victor Hugo’s greatness is difficult to measure
-at this hour; we are too near to know whether this is an Alp or only a
-hill. That it has attracted the attention, the admiration, the homage of
-mankind for half a century would seem to mean that this was one of the
-three or four great lives of the nineteenth century. Victor Hugo came of
-a union of aristocratic and plebeian blood. His father’s tribe had been
-of the nobles since 1531; his mother was the daughter of a seafaring
-race. The current sketches of his father omit the most dramatic incident
-of Colonel Hugo’s career. We refer to his long chase and final capture of
-Fra Diavalo—the brigand hero of the opera which bears his name. In the
-whole history of brigandage in South Italy, there is no more exciting and
-romantic story than that of his hunt and capture of the “Friar-Devil” by
-the father of Victor Hugo. In the blood of the poet the plebeian mother
-triumphed at length over the Monarchist father, and Victor Hugo’s pen
-has rendered the Republicanism of France more valuable service than his
-father’s sword gave to the Napoleonic crown.
-
-His genius was fortunate in the poverty which compelled him to work for
-bread, and the banishment which in 1853 threw him into exile, and again
-forced him to take up the severe literary labor which brought forth
-“Les Miserables” in 1862. This son of the aristocracy might have lived
-a life with out fruit if he had not abandoned the ideals of his father
-for those popular sympathies which made him the most dangerous enemy of
-Napoleon III. The change in his views came slowly. He was a Royalist
-under Louis Phillippe, and that king created him a peer of France in
-1845. It was not until 1849 that he changed his political attitude, and
-he was then forty-seven years of age—so that he divided his life pretty
-evenly between the aristocratic and popular causes. His works show the
-influence of his political thoughts, and the differences between the
-earlier and later are very marked. The earlier works gave him the ears
-of the great world; the later won him the hearts of the people. Whether
-in prose or in verse, all that he ever wrote was poetry. His later prose
-is a collection of poems of human aspirations. It is idle to seek in
-them any system, they are emotion rather than thought; but the emotion
-is the throbbing of the universal human heart. He believed in God and
-in man. He rejected the religion of his people less under the stress of
-conviction than through the force of his hostility to the organized human
-world in which he saw men suffering. It was not his office to resolve
-the riddles of human pain; it was his to gather men’s tears into God’s
-bottle. It may be called a one-sided life; but it was on that side where
-great lives are too seldom found. It may be said that emotion is blind,
-passionate, dangerous, as Frenchmen have abundantly proved; but it is
-still true that the emotion which rouses men from lethargy is necessary
-to beneficent change, and that even though the wail of human misery
-must go up forever, we must honor the great souls who seek solutions of
-the mystery of evil in a happier ordering of human society. We need not
-become socialists to reverence Victor Hugo’s socialistic philanthropy.
-Its aim was high, and it has its great uses. Though only God’s bottle
-be large enough to hold the tears of his children, it is a noble poetry
-which considers the sorrows of the earth and seeks to pour the sunshine
-or hope into the low valleys of humanity. Hugo’s way may be the wrong
-way—probably it is—but it is good for men to hold fast the hope that
-there is _some_ way through the sea to the promised land. There is a
-desert beyond the sea; but somehow we shall cross the desert into the
-Canaan of humanity.
-
-It is, therefore, as a poet of the sorrows and aspirations of our race
-that we shall most profitably think of Victor Hugo. He was somewhat
-too French in spirit to be a poet of mankind; he was too egotistic to
-be on the heights of his human song; he would have been greater if his
-knowledge of Jesus of Nazareth had been deeper, and his imitation of
-him perfect in the measure of his great capacity; he would have left
-something unsaid which wounded men whose purpose was as high as his own,
-if he had been more Christian and less Hugoist. But why do we ask all
-things of all men? Victor Hugo did a great work in his own great way.
-A dangerous socialism has temporarily profited by his denunciations of
-society, but in the end of the account it will probably appear that he
-has advanced Christian socialism by the uplift he has given to human
-aspirations. Men are not so willing to go back to the fleshpots of Egypt,
-not so much in danger of leaving the bones of the whole race in the
-desert, more anxious to move on to their promised land.
-
-
-THE REVISED OLD TESTAMENT.
-
-It required fifty years of the Elizabethan age to introduce that revision
-of the English Bible which has so long been the standard edition of
-the Holy Scriptures in our tongue. It would be strange if the revision
-of that standard Bible which has just been completed were to come into
-immediate and general use. The New Testament revision met with a harsh
-reception from the critics of conservative temper; and it certainly
-has some defects, though the _sense_ of the original is more obvious,
-to use the mildest term, in the new than in the older revision. The
-revised Old Testament has consumed fourteen years of the labor of the
-English and American committees, and the most obvious fact is that it is
-a more conservative piece of work than the revised New Testament. The
-committees probably profited by the buffetings of their New Testament
-revision brethren; but they had a simpler task, since they had not to
-settle the text of the original Hebrew, whereas the Greek text of the
-New Testament is still a battle ground of criticism. After all, however,
-the two revisions constitute one “revised Bible,” and must stand or
-fall together. The general judgment may probably run to the effect that
-the New Testament is revised too much and the Old too little. There
-is a special defect, however, in the New Testament English—it is not
-idiomatic, and it is not always intelligible. There is a rumor that it
-will be re-revised into harmony with the conservatism which characterizes
-the new Old Testament. It is not to be overlooked that there are various
-demands made upon a revision. Those who most earnestly desire one have
-in view a more plain and understandable text for popular use. Wycliffe’s
-great thought, “a Bible understonden of the people,” is their desire.
-But the literary demands upon the revisers exclude intelligibility by
-the people as a governing rule. This group of demands defies the skill
-of any revision committee. They ask for improvements; but they object
-to any changes. The Bible as an Elizabethan classic is their admiration
-and they seem not to be willing that the people should have any other
-Bible. There would seem to be ample room for both revisions; let the
-literary people have their English of 1611, while the people have English
-of this century. We are not yet, however, sufficiently advanced in the
-thinking which revision requires to qualify even the critics among us
-to distinguish between a classic text for scholars and a plain text for
-the millions. A modern English Bible will come by and by; we can afford
-to wait, and meanwhile to study the fruits of the labors of a Revision
-Committee loaded down with a great weight of conservative environments.
-For it is not the classicist alone who stands guard over the old English
-text; conservative theologians regard that old text as too sacred to be
-modernized, and distrust modernizing as involving changes in the moral
-and religious influence of the Bible upon mankind. The intelligibility of
-the Bible is not, to such thinkers, a leading requisite; reverence for
-its mysteries ranks all other considerations. We are probably outgrowing
-this view of Holy Scripture; but it is an opinion strong enough yet to
-keep utterly dead English locutions in the revised Old Testament of 1885.
-This conservatism is much stronger in England than in this country; the
-American Committee desired to substitute modern for obsolete words.
-
-That any changes have been made under such respectable and imposing
-auspices is a great gain to Christian knowledge. The thing is done; the
-grand old text has been subjected to a revision. It is quite possible
-that we are entering an age of biblical revision; and it should be
-remembered that the Bible of 1611 closed an age of revision. It was
-the last in a series of revisions, each of which contributed to the
-perfection of the English text. We can not be content with an English
-Bible which employs _which_ for _who_, _wist_ for _knew_, _earing_
-for _plowing_ and _ouches_ for _settings_. The American Committee was
-thoroughly right in desiring to use modern words in these and other
-cases. If any revision is to stand, it must contain such modifications
-of the old text. A satisfactory English text can not be attained so long
-as the English Christians insist upon retaining archaic forms of such
-insignificance as the foregoing; there must be an agreement to make an
-English text on Wycliffe’s principle of popular intelligibleness, before
-a revision can be of very high utility. The present revision breaks the
-ice; we have begun; some time or other we shall go on to the logical
-conclusion of the movement—a modern English Bible for all who use our
-mighty speech. The assent of the conservative to a single change concedes
-the principle of revision; his assent to many changes prepares the way
-for all that are necessary to the modernizing of the Book of Books.
-
-
-SUMMER HEALTH AND PLEASURE.
-
-The summer is looked forward to with eager desire and it is dismissed
-without regret by the residents of the temperate zone. The explanation
-lies partly, if not mainly, in our defective adaptation of ourselves
-to the hot season. Charles Lamb once wrote, “The summer has set in with
-its usual severity.” The wit covers a truth; we adjust ourselves so
-imperfectly to the heated term that we suffer from the high temperature.
-The art of living must include devices and cautions through which we
-get the good and shun the evil of each season. Men are slowly learning
-that to “enjoy life” on this planet one must pay the same price as for
-liberty—“eternal vigilance.” The summer of the North ought to be our
-golden time of health and enjoyment. We have the whole of the atmosphere
-to breathe from—not bits of it let into artificially heated spaces.
-There is shade for the noonday heats, and the evenings and mornings
-for exercise and refreshment of muscular energy. But the hot hours are
-often dangerous and the atmosphere may be poisoned by our own neglect
-of decaying vegetables or animal matter. We must aim to keep clean and
-keep all things about us clean; food should be lighter than in winter
-(less heat-producing); exercise should avoid the hours of fervent heat;
-the occupations should take a more leisurely pace; the scene of life
-should, if possible, be shifted for some week or weeks so as to diversify
-our mental interests and break the dreary monotony of long days spent
-in one environment of body and soul. The word which describes the art
-of summer life is _moderation_; but moderation is not indolence, though
-there is a natural tendency to drop into the laziness which characterizes
-barbarian humanity in hot lands. To be healthy and happy one should
-resist the disposition to be idle. Neither health nor happiness come to
-lazy people in any desirable measure. The best forms of both depend on
-activity; but in summer it must be moderate and regular. If, then, one
-has constant occupation, he should cultivate moderation of interest and
-exertion, shun the blazing noontide, and take his food as well as his
-exercise in reduced doses. Too much food, care, exercitation, these are
-our northern summer dangers. Our civilization is yet very imperfect in
-this region of art. We have attained to food, clothing, shelter. We do
-not quite understand how to use them all wisely; but beyond these lie
-the adjustment of exertion, rest, air, water, electrical and chemical
-instruments of vitality, and the inner forces of our own being. Happiness
-is the result of a complex mass of conditions and instruments of life
-acting upon the spirit and reacted against by the spirit. Our knowledge
-grows; but while it is growing we have to take for our text moderation,
-and elaborate the sermon each man for himself.
-
-The great opportunities of the year come to us in summer. Nature is all
-alive to please and instruct us—to give us the delights of the eye and
-the inspiration of study. The world has been dressed with infinite art,
-to afford us a holiday which shall be full of instruction. We need travel
-to widen our vision of God’s modern Edens dressed by human art. We need
-an active intelligence, to see and understand the Eden world of summer.
-But all depends upon our care of our bodies. Health is the condition of
-all summer pleasures. Is it not strange that we will spend months and
-years learning how to use lifeless tools, and yet will not spend needed
-time to learn the management of this vital tool by use of which all
-happiness comes to us? Let us all try this time to keep the instrument
-of life in tune for the music of the summer; to make of the season of
-highest opportunity all there is in it for ourselves. Starting with that
-selfish purpose, we shall soon find that we need social food, and that
-here also, “it is more blessed to give than to receive.” Helping others
-to enjoyment is the healthiest of “health movements;” for no tonic is so
-spiritually exhilarating as the sight of other people’s happiness which
-we have made. The man who sends a child out of the city suffocation
-of summer time has a poor imagination if he can not enjoy the gambols
-of that child in the country meadows and groves as he never enjoyed a
-banquet in his own house. Doing as many generous actions as possible is
-one way to get both health and pleasure out of the summer.
-
-
-SCIENCE AND PRACTICAL LIFE.
-
-It is somewhat remarkable that at a time when science is indubitably
-failing to justify the exalted hopes of those who looked to it for a
-solution of the deepest questions of being, it is enlarging our sense
-of its value to practical every-day life. The mystery of the molecule
-is insoluble, but the usefulness of chemistry is rapidly increasing.
-Professor W. Mattieu Williams proposes to use maltose as a cooking agent
-to produce foods which are both more palatable and more easily digested.
-Those who attend the cooking school at Chautauqua this summer will
-probably learn how this work is to be done, and what results will follow.
-The theory sprang out of attempts to feed cattle on malted grain. It was
-found to be too expensive for cattle, and also hardly necessary, because
-cows have good digestive apparatus. Human beings have impaired digestion,
-and can afford more expensive food than the beasts have need of. The
-maltose cooking carries graniverous foods up into an advanced stage of
-nutritive condition, lessens the labor of weak stomachs, and tickles
-dull palates with new flavors. There is no near limit to the possible
-fruits of this thought. The chemist may render us incalculable services
-along this line. We have suffered something from the chemistry of men
-who adulterate our food; it is a comfort to know that the good uses of
-chemistry are coming forward to render us most valuable compensations.
-
-It is a matter of course that in this field we shall often be
-disappointed; but so many solid gains are secured that we shall readily
-excuse some fanciful experiments. In lighting public streets and
-buildings, electricity has made it possible to turn night into day;
-chemical studies have perfected the grinding of flour; a hundred more of
-small and great practical advances in scientific living are secure. We
-shall go on. It is very noticeable that the conveniences of modern life
-have triumphed in unexpected ways over natural difficulties. The zone
-of comfort for human life has been widened toward the pole and toward
-the equator. The gains are more slowly harvested southward; any reader
-who feels the languor of this season will know why we do not march so
-triumphantly toward the equator as we do toward the north pole. Moral
-energy is in larger demand, as we go south, to resist the tendency to
-idleness. The north wind puts spurs into us and whips us into action.
-We shall therefore find the northward limit of vigorous life before we
-find the south boundary of it. And naturally our science, invention and
-discovery bear upon cold rather than heat. We have the means now of
-living in higher latitudes, in full moral and mental activity, than were
-good for body or brain a hundred years ago. We know how to build for
-warmth in zero weather, and we have cheap fuel and cheap light for the
-frosts and the dark of the North.
-
-An enthusiastic writer says that natural gas is to be the fuel of the
-immediate future—the next fuel. We have as yet found it only here and
-there on the earth; but we are not done searching for it. Imagine, then,
-that we have found this gas all round the shores of Hudson’s Bay, and
-calculate the consequences. A new Mediterranean is opened in a region
-which has always been reckoned uninhabitable. Poets and philosophers
-flourish far up toward Doctor Warren’s original Eden! For what but a
-cheap and abundant fuel and light is needed to make possible a large and
-flourishing empire around Hudson’s Bay? Migration, which is said to move
-on parallel lines, has been trending northward for twenty-five years. The
-wheat fields of America are a hundred and fifty miles nearer the pole
-than they were fifty years ago. The Dakota and British Northwest which
-we were willing to leave to the Indians fifty years ago, are eagerly
-coveted for the plow of the wheat farmer. We are undeniably moving north;
-the limit of that movement will be fixed for us by devices, discoveries,
-sciences, which will enlarge our fields toward the eternal ice—on
-principles similar to those which have already extended our domain in
-that direction. For several generations the silk grown in Lombardy has
-been packed on the backs of horses or in carts and transported across
-the Alps to be spun and woven in Switzerland. Why should not our cotton
-travel by sea to the shores of Hudson’s Bay to be spun and woven? Give
-them power, heat and light in one natural agent, and the people of the
-American Mediterranean might excel in any industry. And in default of
-natural gas, who will now dare to say that the chemist may not solve the
-problem in a more intellectual way than by the use of the drill? We write
-here only of a _possible_ expansion of the human domain by the services
-of science.
-
-A more practicable matter is that the age of steam, out of which, into
-something better, we are probably to pass at a day not distant, has been
-a very prodigal one. Waste is its great fault. It wastes three fourths
-of the coal it consumes; it therefore wastes infinite sums of human
-energy. It wastes everything, nature and man, the streams, the forests,
-the vitality and the hopes of men. Its motto is _concentration_. It
-herds human beings in towns; it makes transit laborious and long. The
-age of economies has begun, and new agents, such as electricity and gas,
-have for their mottoes _disperse_ and _distribute_. It is probably not
-extravagant to say that mankind are wasting every week enough of natural
-bounties to sustain them for a month, perhaps for a year. If science,
-then, shall only barely help us to the economic use of all natural
-bounties, it will have enriched human life (for the mass of mankind)
-at least four-fold. It will probably be well for us if this enrichment
-comes gradually and is preceded by a moral preparation for the use of
-abundance. We have never, as a race, been good enough to be safely rich.
-We have no poets from the equatorial regions. It may be many generations
-before we are good enough to grow philosophy and high bred cattle in the
-torrid zone. Perhaps we do not any where keep up in moral training with
-the march of science.
-
-
-THE COURSE OF READING FOR 1885-86.
-
-The student about to enter college has scarcely a pleasanter task than
-that of examining the course he is about to begin. The prospect of
-future achievements, how fascinating it is! That Livy which he has heard
-discussed by learned seniors and professors will soon be his property,
-too. The problems that are historical among his big brothers and cousins,
-and sisters as well, sometimes, he will soon grapple with. Whole fields
-of unknown literature and science and art open to him in his brief
-glance. He enjoys familiarizing himself with the names of the authors
-of the text-books, in marking among the elective studies his choice, in
-looking up the old text-books in the library, in preparing note-books
-for the next year, in picking up random bits of information. Getting
-ready for his college course often becomes quite as engrossing as the
-actual work. The C. L. S. C. student will experience this same interest
-in looking over what he is going to do another year. The course is now
-ready, and he will have the entire summer for contemplating his coming
-conquests. Enjoy the prospect to the full; it is certainly a goodly
-one. The bone and sinew of next year’s course is to be Roman History
-and Literature. The place Greece and its men filled in the course of
-1884-85 will be taken by Rome. While the subject is equally interesting,
-the course of the coming year has one great advantage. Greece has no
-modern history of particular importance, its heroes died with Corinth’s
-destruction, its literature and art and philosophy faded with its loss
-of patriotism. Where Rome stood, now Italy stands. The history of the
-decadence of Roman rule and the growth of Italian freedom is one of the
-most thrilling chapters in the world’s history. A literature, an art, and
-a science belong to this new growth. In studying Rome’s life we have a
-modern chapter that keeps up our interest. The course happily provides
-for us papers on “Modern Italy” and “Italian Biography,” in addition
-to the works on the History of Rome, the “Preparatory Latin Course in
-English,” the “College Latin Course in English,” and “A Day in Ancient
-Rome.” A practical turn is given to the work by a study of the relations
-of Rome to modern history.
-
-The more general work of the course is selected from the wide fields of
-philosophy, science, art and religion. Dr. Geo. M. Steele has prepared
-a work on “Political Economy,” which will furnish some of the liveliest
-reading for the year. This subject will be supplemented by two series
-of papers on “Parliamentary Practice” and “International Law,” to be
-published in THE CHAUTAUQUAN.
-
-Robert Browning in “Pomegranates from an English Garden” will be the
-representative of English poetry. It will be seen that, as in the case
-of Robert Browning’s poems, several studies are introduced to brighten
-the more solid work; for this purpose we have “In His Name,” by Edward
-Everett Hale, read in connection with a book by Dr. Townsend on “The
-Bible and the XIXth Century,” and a series of studies, to appear in THE
-CHAUTAUQUAN, on “God in History.”
-
-One work which will be a real treat to everybody is “Studies in Human
-Nature,” by Dr. Lyman Abbott. The additional readings in THE CHAUTAUQUAN
-are: “Wars and Rumors of Wars To-day,” “The Age we Live In,” “Religion
-in Art,” “Art Outlines,” “Studies in Mathematics,” “Moral Philosophy,”
-studies on “How to Live,” by Edward Everett Hale, papers on the past,
-present and future of electricity, and “Home Studies in Physical
-Geography.” A better course has never been presented to the members of
-the C. L. S. C.
-
-
-
-
-EDITOR’S NOTE-BOOK.
-
-
-The July issue of THE CHAUTAUQUAN closes the fifth volume of the
-magazine. In October the sixth volume will begin. The outlook for THE
-CHAUTAUQUAN for 1885-86 is much brighter than ever before. We shall offer
-our friends a much improved magazine. The place of THE CHAUTAUQUAN will
-be taken in the summer by the _Assembly Herald_. The _Herald_ for 1885
-will contain full reports of the work of the Assembly for the summer. A
-glance at the elaborate program printed in this impression will convince
-the reader of the value of a paper containing such a course of lectures
-as that of the Chautauqua platform. Besides the lectures many suggestive
-and useful reports will be printed, which members of the C. L. S. C. in
-particular will find helpful. Those who may wish to subscribe for both
-THE CHAUTAUQUAN and _Herald_ will find it profitable to take advantage of
-our COMBINATION OFFER, found in another column of this impression.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-The war rumors of a month ago have subsided almost as quickly as they
-were aroused. The cries of “On to Khartoum” and “Smash the Mahdi” have
-died out. Instead of running the frontier below the Soudan, the English
-have been content to fix it at Wady Halfa. After all the excitement over
-Afghanistan, peace has been established between Russia and England.
-The Americans, most of them, have come home from Panama. Riel has been
-captured. The comparatively easy settlement of misunderstandings between
-nations is our best hope for the future. Each new victory of arbitration
-over “bad blood,” even if it be at the sacrifice of a little of our pride
-and possessions, is so much of a stride toward the millennium.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-For the third time Mr. James Russell Lowell has been called upon to speak
-in Westminster Abbey. This time at the unveiling of the bust of the poet
-Coleridge. In summing up his remarks he said: “Whatever may have been
-his faults and weaknesses, he was the man of all his generation to whom
-we should most unhesitatingly allow the distinction of genius, that is,
-of one authentically possessed from time to time by some influence that
-made him better and greater than himself. If he lost himself too much in
-what Mr. Pater has admirably called ‘impassioned contemplation,’ he has
-at least left us such a legacy as only genius, and genius not always, can
-leave. It is for this that we pay him this homage of memory.”
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-A series of statistics most suggestive to those interested in the
-temperance question have of late been published. According to this
-table there was drunk in the United States twenty-five years ago over
-86,000,000 gallons of spirituous liquor, while now, with a population
-almost doubled, the consumption is decreased by about 15 per cent. To
-balance this comes in the enormous consumption of light liquors, nearly
-six times as great as in 1860. But it must be remembered that a large
-proportion of the latter is consumed by the foreign element introduced
-since 1860.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-The tragic fate of the town of Plymouth, Pennsylvania, is one more
-melancholy example of the result of breaking Nature’s laws. There is
-no doubt but that an epidemic of typhoid fever is a crime traceable to
-somebody’s neglect. In Plymouth the refuse from a house situated at the
-head of the stream which supplied the village with drinking water was
-allowed to poison the water. This outrageous state of affairs is to be
-seen in many other towns, and in parts of our cities. If after Plymouth’s
-suffering a repetition occurs in any part of the country, public
-sentiment ought to be strong enough to hunt down and punish the guilty
-authorities that will hold human life and God’s law so lightly.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-There is one sure way of securing sanitary reform in every city or town
-with dilatory health board or indifferent council. Arouse the women. The
-Ladies’ Health Protection Society, of New York City, has done work in
-that community during the past six months, before which its large Board
-of Health seemed perfectly helpless. If cleanliness and purity are not
-to be secured by the civil authorities, there is no more suitable public
-work for women than to constitute themselves the guardians of the health
-of their home towns.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-At the recent commencement of the Union Theological Seminary, of New
-York, the alumni association elected as president an Indian of pure
-Choctaw blood, now a pastor in the Indian Territory. His son was a member
-of the graduating class of this year. We are growing broader.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-The position that Mr. Phelps will take at the Court of St. James has
-been agitating the English correspondent of one of our great dailies.
-He finds that being a minister merely, Mr. Phelps must come in among
-the ministers, after all the seven ambassadors; and that, alas! he
-will be literally at the foot of this class of twenty-three. Ministers
-take social rank according to the length of time they have held their
-positions, so Mr. Phelps and the stars and stripes trot along after
-Guatemala and Columbia and Siam and Hayti.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-The teachers who tried Chautauqua last summer for their vacations, found
-the spot so suitable for their uses, so delightful for recreation, that
-they have spread abroad the rumor of her beauty, and in July of the
-coming summer two State Teachers’ Associations—that of Ohio and that of
-New York—will meet there.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-There are very few people unfamiliar with law and its phrases, who have
-not been bewildered over the complicated expressions and seemingly
-useless repetitions found in almost all documents. This “iteration in
-law” has lately been made the subject of some interesting computations by
-David Dudley Field. By his counting every deed contains 860 superfluous
-words, and every mortgage 1,240. The people of New York State, he
-calculates, pay every year $100,000 for the recording of useless words.
-The next reform in law should be rhetorical.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-Mr. John Ruskin, of Oxford, and Prof. J. Rendel Harris, of Johns Hopkins,
-have resigned their professorships in their respective universities
-because, it is stated, vivisection is practiced in the institutions.
-There is no reason in such hyper-sympathy. The abuse of vivisection is
-quite probable, but that does not lessen the force of the fact that
-vivisection has done much to alleviate human misery, and will in the
-future undoubtedly do more. The question is, if man or beast must suffer,
-which life is the more precious.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-Houghton Farm, the headquarters of the Chautauqua Town and Country Club,
-has an interesting history. Several years ago 1,000 acres of land lying
-about nine miles from Newburgh, N. Y., were purchased by a Mr. Valentine
-as an experimental farm. About thirty buildings, adapted to every kind of
-farm work, were erected; the best of stock, the most skillful laborers
-were secured. The farm soon became a kind of educational institution.
-Farmers were invited to inspect its work, and to listen to lectures from
-the learned managers; children had days set apart for their enjoyment.
-Orange county has been educated by the Houghton Farm. Now its generous
-hearted proprietor has extended the work by opening its advantages to all
-those who will join the Chautauqua Town and Country Club.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-The strange fascination lurking in dangerous feats which so powerfully
-affects some minds, was never more forcibly manifested than in the case
-of Robert E. Odlum, who jumped from the Brooklyn bridge not long ago.
-For some time the thought had been a passion with him, and although the
-police were watching to prevent the attempt, he escaped their vigilance
-and took the fatal leap. His body was three and one-fourth seconds in
-making the descent of 140 feet, thus corroborating almost exactly the law
-of falling bodies. He breathed only a few times after he was picked up,
-being inwardly literally “mangled to death.” His is only one more name
-added to the list of those who, by their folly, may teach others lessons
-of wisdom, and so, perhaps, have not died utterly in vain.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-Although war-like preparations have ceased in the Soudan, and no
-more troops are to be transported thither to help “smash the Mahdi,”
-the railroad across the desert is progressing slowly but surely. The
-correspondent of the _Times_ telegraphs the following: “The construction
-of the railway is a curious and interesting sight. In advance is a
-picket of cavalry, while far off on either side the videttes scout in
-the bush. At the immediate head of the line is a battalion of infantry
-echeloned, and advancing as the rails are laid. Streams of coolies carry
-the sleepers from the trucks, and teams of four artillery horses drag up
-the rails, two at a time, to the navvies, who lay them in a twinkling,
-and drive the spikes. In the rear are gangs who complete the line, and
-further back the ballasting parties.”
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-Visitors to Niagara Falls this summer will enjoy their trip as never
-before. Everything that tends to mar the beauty of the natural scenery is
-to be removed, and after July 15th, access to all points of interest is
-to be free of charge. To bring about this happy consummation which during
-so many long years past has been devoutly wished by all right-thinking
-men, required a long and hard-fought battle against willful ignorance and
-greed of gain.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-General Gordon’s “Life and Letters,” recently published, prove him to
-have one accomplishment of rare beauty and usefulness, but too often
-nowadays neglected. He was a good letter writer, and that under
-circumstances the most trying. Here is the picture his biographer draws
-of the surroundings under which many of his letters were written: “The
-temperature is over 100°; the ink dries on the pen before three words are
-written; books curl, as to their backs; mosquitoes are busy at the ankles
-under the table, and the hands and wrists above; prickly heat comes and
-goes. How one realizes, for instance, the whole scene in the over-wakeful
-traveller’s night: ‘I am writing in the open air by a candle-lamp, in
-a savage gorge; not a sound to be heard. The baboons are in bed in the
-rocks.’” The letters which the most of us write under the most favorable
-circumstances are limited to the narrowest space possible. What we would
-do in Gordon’s place it is difficult to say.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-The most beautiful celebration of the month of June is Children’s day.
-With every season Protestant churches give more time and money to their
-preparations for it, and it bids fair to take rank in importance with
-Christmas and Easter. Certainly no day comes at a season when it is more
-easy to decorate, it being the very heyday of the flower season, and no
-cause is more worthy our efforts than the children’s.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-An important discussion has been going on for a few weeks in the New
-York papers, concerning the advisability of closing the dry goods
-stores on Saturday afternoons. Clerks have no day for recreation or for
-improvement except Sabbath. The same is true of nearly all classes of
-laboring people. The result is that the Sabbath, instead of being a day
-of religious rest, is turned into one of pleasure, and often of extra
-work. A half holiday would enable busy workers to prepare for Sabbath. It
-is a reform in the arrangement of time that is worthy the attention of
-Christian people particularly.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-There is a capital hint in the following story, told by a lady prominent
-in mission school work in one of our large cities: “We had some of our
-Chinese pupils at a church sociable a few nights ago, and we had at
-supper some candies which are rolled up in paper with printed couplets
-inclosed—some of them extremely silly. The Chinese boys read them and
-looked surprised, but were too polite to say anything. Soon afterward
-they gave an entertainment, and the same sort of candies were provided;
-but when we unrolled the papers we found they had taken out the foolish
-verses and had substituted texts of Scripture printed on little slips of
-paper.”
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-Here are a few of M. Bartholdi’s interesting figures about his great
-Statue of Liberty: “The forefinger is 96½ inches in length, and 56½
-inches in circumference at the second joint. The nail measures 17¾
-inches by 10½ inches. The head 13¾ feet in height. The eye is 25½ inches
-in width. The nose is 44 inches in length. About forty persons were
-accommodated in the head at the Universal Exposition of 1878. It is
-possible to ascend into the torch above the hand. It will easily hold
-twelve persons.” Compared with other colossi it far outstrips them all,
-being about three times the height of both the statue of Bavaria and
-of the Virgin of Puy, and about 58 feet higher than the Arminius in
-Westphalia.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-The French Republic would not allow the remains of Victor Hugo to
-be placed in the Pantheon until that celebrated structure was again
-secularized. The priests were allowed just forty-eight hours to vacate
-the sacred precincts which, as a church, they had held uninterruptedly
-since 1877. This action plainly shows the position of the Republic toward
-the Church. “French skeptics,” says _The Nation_, “are not content, like
-English or German skeptics, with ceasing to go to church.… They insist
-on proclaiming in every possible way their hostility to the clergy.” The
-fact that the Pantheon is again restored to its primitive design as “a
-last resting place for distinguished public men” can but be pleasing to
-all.
-
-
-
-
-TALK ABOUT BOOKS.
-
-
-Among the books belonging to the “Famous Women Series,” the biography of
-Harriet Martineau[B] takes a leading place. The life of this remarkable
-woman is written by one whose clear insight into human character, and
-keen appreciation of that which tends to make it noble and strong,
-render her eminently qualified for such an undertaking. The style of
-the book is simple, unadorned, direct. No step has been neglected which
-could add to the author’s information, or, as she quaintly expresses
-it, could help her “get touch” with her subject. That Mrs. Miller is
-something of a hero worshiper is evident from the fact that, with but
-one or two slight exceptions, she justifies all the facts of the life
-she relates. The rigor of Harriet Martineau’s early home; the longings
-of the young girl for freedom from a needless restraint, and the desire
-to read and study, which led her to steal the time for it in the early
-morning and late at night, might convey a lesson to many a mother who
-now insists upon having her daughters follow the conventional methods of
-living. One can but rejoice in the advanced position women have attained
-as he reads of Harriet Martineau, the statesman, and sees that she is
-as thoroughly understood and appreciated in this aspect of her life by
-her biographer as in the more womanly elements and instincts of her
-nature, which were never in the least violated by her study of political
-interests. Excepting the skepticism which marked all the mature years of
-Harriet Martineau’s life, one finds in her a good type of strong, noble
-womanhood. Christian readers can but deprecate this fact, and also that
-it is justified by Mrs. Miller.
-
-A volume of the prose writings of N. P. Willis[C] will be received by
-the reading public in much the same manner as the work of a new author,
-so little are they known. His reputation rests almost entirely upon
-his poems and a few Scriptural sketches, which it seems natural to
-think of as belonging to the early periods of American literature. It
-will probably strike most people with a feeling of surprise to recall
-that his death occurred so recently as 1867, and that he was therefore
-contemporary with Bryant and Longfellow. Just why this recent oblivion
-has fallen upon his writings is hard to tell, for the collection in this
-volume shows that they deserve a better fate. The character sketches
-are fairly drawn; and the bits of description indicate powers of a high
-order in this particular. The personality of the author is manifest in
-all the articles; the reader is conscious of constantly looking through
-the writer’s eyes. The wild, unchecked bent of his imagination is shown
-in such pieces as “The Lunatic’s Skate,” and “The Ghost-Ball at Congress
-Hall,” somewhat resembling the more intense works of Poe. Aptness in
-illustration, implying a delicate perception of resemblances, and a happy
-faculty of associating ideas is a marked characteristic. He fails to
-touch the deeper emotions of one’s nature, and there is a lack of both
-strength and plot in all he writes. Whether Mr. Beers succeeds in making
-Willis’s works live or not, he has by his selections and editing, and by
-his introductory memoir, given to the public a very interesting work.
-
-Perhaps no one ever more perfectly caught the spirit of all things
-Egyptian than Professor Ebers. The _genius_ of the country which brings
-under its sway all that comes within its domain, affecting them to such
-a degree that one can but fancy even the sphynx would be less gloomily
-impressive in any other land, gained such an influence over him, and so
-makes itself felt in his books, that it is almost impossible to imagine
-him otherwise than as a man wrapped round with that somber, mysterious
-air which constantly hints of the power to reveal things more and more
-wonderful. From the beginning to the end of Serapis[D] one is conscious
-of being under some spell that fascinates and charms. The little
-party introduced at the beginning gives rise to a sense of the vast
-possibilities hidden away in each life—even that of little Dada, the
-merry-hearted, seemingly thoughtless, young girl—and the sequel reveals
-in each one these possibilities realized. The story is laid in the times
-of the Roman emperor, Theodosius I., and its interest centers in the
-destruction of the Serapeum, the Alexandrian temple containing the statue
-of Serapis, the great Egyptian divinity, which was also mutilated and
-torn down. A description of the races is given in such a way as to render
-readers virtually eye-witnesses of the scene, and it is with an effort
-that one keeps himself from rising with the crowd as the decisive moment
-nears, and shouting in the general frenzy of excitement. The author lacks
-the power of putting his readers into nearer relation with his characters
-than that of mere acquaintances, in whose welfare a general sympathetic
-interest is taken. One prizes the book for its impressive historical
-facts and beautiful descriptions.
-
-“Troubled Waters”[E] is a novel with a purpose. The question of capital
-and labor is discussed, and the plan of coöperation is upheld as the key
-which is to unlock the difficulties thickening fast and threateningly
-around the business interests of to-day. The dangers lurking in the
-fact of poorly compensated labor, as it watches the fast increasing
-gains of capital amassed at its expense, are vividly set forth. In the
-strike of the Tradelawn mill hands, will be seen a faithful picture
-of what transpires in many a similar town. The style of the book is
-vigorous, independent, and clear. The number of persons introduced, and
-the characterization of some of them, particularly Mr. Thomas Street,
-reminds one of Dickens. In the web of adverse circumstances enmeshing and
-ever tightening about the really noble Robert Croft, until he is driven
-to the very verge of desperation and crime, the greatest power of the
-author is shown. Of course all ends well, and as one leaves all the hands
-in the new mills, in which every worker is a stockholder, contented and
-happy, there remains with him a conviction that coöperation is the right
-principle.
-
-One of the most attractive of all the books of its kind is “The
-Chautauqua Birthday Book”[F] just issued. Daintily bound, and containing
-illustrations of the places so familiar and endeared to all Chautauquans,
-it can not fail to receive a warm welcome at their hands. The “Prefatory
-Note” is written by Chancellor J. H. Vincent. The selections made of the
-best things said by the best authors. As one turns the pages bearing
-the dates, the eye lights upon the names of many familiar friends, and
-the pleasing memories that instantly arise make one glad for the happy
-thought that originated so genial a souvenir.
-
-No undertaking more deserves the thoughtful consideration and hearty
-support of every community than that of the introduction of a line of
-classics for children into the public schools. Mr. Ginn has already
-edited for the use of scholars of from nine to fourteen years of age, a
-number of very attractive books, among which are “Tales from Shakspere,”
-by Charles and Mary Lamb, and Scott’s “Tales of a Grandfather.”[G] The
-original works have been changed very little. A few verbal alterations
-were required, and the parts beyond the comprehension of a child were
-omitted. A young boy or girl after reading these editions will have
-practically the same knowledge that the older acquire from the unabridged
-works, and they certainly will be equally as much interested in them.
-
-[B] Harriet Martineau. By Mrs. F. Fenwick Miller. Boston: Roberts
-Brothers. 1885. Price, $1.00.
-
-[C] Prose Writings of Nathaniel Parker Willis. Selected by Henry A.
-Beers. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons.
-
-[D] Serapis. By George Ebers. New York: William S. Gottsberger, 11 Murray
-Street. 1885. Price, paper cover, 50 cents.
-
-[E] Troubled Waters. A Problem of To-day. By Beverly Ellison Warner.
-Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott. 1885. Price, $1.25.
-
-[F] The Chautauqua Birthday Book. Arranged by Annie M. Cummings. Buffalo,
-N. Y.: H. H. Otis. Price, $1.00.
-
-[G] Tales from Shakspere. By Charles and Mary Lamb. Tales of a
-Grandfather, Vol. I. Being the History of Scotland. By Walter Scott.
-Abridged and edited by Edwin Ginn. Boston: Ginn, Heath & Co. 1885.
-
-
-BOOKS RECEIVED.
-
-Valeria. By the Rev. W. H. Withrow. New York: Phillips & Hunt.
-Cincinnati: Cranston & Stowe. 1885. Price, $1.00.
-
-The Sentence and Word Book. By James Johonnot. New York: D. Appleton &
-Co. 1885.
-
-Vain Forebodings. By E. Oswald. Translated from the German by Mrs. A. L.
-Wister. Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott Company. 1885. Price, $1.25.
-
-Pestalozzi’s Leonard and Gertrude. Translated and Abridged. By Eva
-Channing. Boston: Ginn, Heath & Co. 1885.
-
-Dante. A Rare Collection of Texts, Commentaries, etc., of Dante’s Divina
-Commedia. Cincinnati: Anton Bicker.
-
-The Meisterschaft System for the Italian Language. By Dr. Richard S.
-Rosenthal. Part I. Boston: Meisterschaft Publishing Company.
-
-General Gordon: The Christian Hero. By the author of “Our Queen,” “New
-World Heroes,” etc. New York: Thomas Y. Crowell & Co.
-
-Pulpit and Easel. By Mary B. Sleight. New York: Thomas Y. Crowell & Co.
-
-Hearing and How to Keep It. By Charles H. Burnett, M.D. Philadelphia: P.
-Blakiston, Son & Co. 1885.
-
-Dogma No Antidote for Doubt. By a member of the New York Bar.
-Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott Company. 1885.
-
-Catechism on Alcohol. (In German.) By Julia Colman. New York: National
-Temperance Society. 1885.
-
-Circulars of Information of the Bureau of Education. No. I.—1885.
-Washington: Government Printing Office.
-
-Planting Trees in School Grounds and the Celebration of Arbor Day.
-Washington: Government Printing Office. 1885.
-
-The Russian Revolt. By Edmund Noble. Boston: Houghton, Mifflin & Co.
-1885. Price, $1.00.
-
-From the Golden Gate to the Golden Horn. By Henry Frederick Reddall. New
-York: Phillips & Hunt. Cincinnati: Cranston & Stowe. 1885. Price, $1.25.
-
-
-
-
-CHAUTAUQUA IN JAPAN.
-
-BY WM. D. BRIDGE.
-
-
-Japan moves to the front, for _Chautauqua_ has taken firm root in Japan.
-The Chautauqua Idea is an ecumenical idea, and it is the province of this
-article to show the workings of this idea in Japan during the past six
-months.
-
-Late in the summer of 1884 Mrs. A. M. Drennan (C. L. S. C. class of ’82),
-a resident missionary in Japan, at Osaka, entered into correspondence
-with Chancellor Vincent as to the possibility of translating valuable
-English materials in the line of the “C. L. S. C.” into the Japanese
-vernacular. Among the material tracts, papers, etc., sent, was one
-which she put into the hands of an educated native, well versed also in
-English, who said on reading it: “If that book can be put into the hands
-of the young men, Tom Paine and other infidels must leave Japan.”
-
-Chancellor Vincent, on reviewing the necessities of the field, and
-marking the wondrous developments of that newborn nation, arranged
-with Mrs. Drennan for the translation of the “Required Reading” in THE
-CHAUTAUQUAN into Japanese, guaranteeing a prescribed sum per month for
-expenses of translating for one year.
-
-March 30, 1885, Mrs. Drennan writes: “I wish I could convey to you
-something of an idea of the enthusiasm in reference to our Chautauqua
-Society here. In much less than a week after the first advertisement in
-the papers, our secretary had received nearly three hundred letters of
-inquiry, and, on application, had given out every one of the first five
-hundred copies of the ‘Hand-Book.’ A second edition of five hundred was
-made, and now, in less than a week, only two hundred copies remain.”
-
-The “Hand-Book” referred to is the first number of a magazine, in book
-form, containing articles from THE CHAUTAUQUAN, viz.: “Mosaics of
-History,” “Africa,” “Alexander the Great,” “One Hundred Questions,”
-“World of Science,” and “The Results of the Discovery of America.”
-
-Mr. C. S. Hongma, of Osaka, a native Japanese, President of the “Japanese
-Literary and Scientific Circle,” writes to Chancellor Vincent, in good
-English, a letter full of hope, and expressing his delight in aiding to
-organize the circle, and asking help and prayers for its success.
-
-The laws of Japan require six months’ notice to be given of intention to
-publish a magazine, and but one month’s notice for publishing a book. The
-quotations from THE CHAUTAUQUAN are therefore given the book form.
-
-Mrs. Drennan says the natives will pay the expense of advertising
-the movement in Japanese papers, and will, ere long, pay the cost of
-translation.
-
-April 13, 1885, Mrs. Drennan writes: “It would take a long letter to
-tell you the good things about our J. L. S. C. We have just received
-to-day from the press our third edition of the ‘Hand-Book;’ this makes
-twenty-five hundred printed. Our secretary is preparing to-night a list
-of the paid-up members. There have been over three hundred applicants
-for membership, but only one hundred and fifty have as yet paid all
-dues. You know there is the house rent (for place of meeting of the local
-circles), and the fixing up, lights, etc., to give us a comfortable place
-of meeting. These, with most of the advertising and other expenses, have
-been met by the members; and with your kind aid for a little while we
-will have an influence that will spread over this entire land, doing
-great things for this people. Our secretary has answered over _seven
-hundred letters of inquiry_. Applications have come from several cities
-for the privilege of organizing branch societies.
-
-“The first article in our ‘Hand-Book’ is an editorial by the editor
-of the largest paper in this part of Japan. He is a very fine writer
-and highly educated. He is perfectly enthusiastic over the work. It
-is an argument for this plan, giving his views as to the good it will
-accomplish in Japan. The second article explains the object and aim of
-the Society.
-
-“My heart has been thrilled with delight on receiving letters and
-applications for membership from some soldiers in a distant city. It
-has been a punishable offense for any teacher of Christianity, or Bible
-reader, to go into the army or among the soldiers. I thought, if this
-course of reading spread among them, who can compute its influence, who
-can tell the result of this silent teacher for Christ!”
-
-The new members are not satisfied with Japanese cards of membership, but
-are anxious for enrollment at the Central Office of the C. L. S. C.,
-Plainfield, N. J., and for cards of membership from America.
-
-Mrs. Drennan, under date of April 14th, says: “One hundred and
-seventy-five names of members have just been given me, fifty new names
-being added last evening. [She sends for three hundred membership cards.]
-I never saw such an interest created by anything in any country. Oh that
-God may bless it to the good of this people, and make it a permanent
-organization for all time! Pray for us.”
-
-That our readers may know of what “stuff” this earnest C. L. S. C.
-worker is made, I will say that she has charge of a Girls’ School at
-Osaka, teaches young men three hours per day, teaches a Bible class of
-young men (twenty-five in number) on Sabbath evenings, and for a year
-and a half has kept up a Chautauqua circle among the English speaking
-people and others. In order to secure government permission to publish
-the Chautauqua literature, permanent resident officers must be chosen;
-therefore the existing local circle suspended, and was reorganized with
-such officers as the government will recognize.
-
-One of the members is now translating “Outline Study of Man,” another
-“Cyrus and Alexander,” and two others are at work on THE CHAUTAUQUAN.
-
-Mrs. Drennan sends an itemized financial statement, showing three eighths
-of the expenses (total, $66.25) paid by the Japanese to date and five
-eighths by the Central Office, with the assurance that hereafter the
-heaviest part will be borne by the enthusiastic natives. God bless a work
-like this in young Japan, and God bless Mrs. Drennan and her associates!
-
-
-
-
-PROGRAM OF POPULAR EXERCISES.
-
-TWELFTH SUMMER ASSEMBLY AT CHAUTAUQUA.
-
-
-_Saturday, July 11._
-
-    10:00 a.m.—Organ Prelude, Mr. I. V. Flagler, of Auburn, N.Y.
-
-    10:30 a.m.—Opening Address before the “Chautauqua Teachers’
-               Retreat” and “Chautauqua Schools of Language,”
-               by Chancellor C. N. Sims, of Syracuse University.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilee Singers.
-
-     8:30 p.m.—Parlor Reception, C. T. R. and C. S. L.
-
-    10:00 p.m.—Night Songs—Flotilla on the Lake.
-
-
-_Sunday, July 12._
-
-     9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly.
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Opening Sermon, by Chancellor C. N. Sims.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Platform Meeting—Addresses by Dr. C. N. Sims
-               and Dr. J. H. Vincent.
-
-     4:00 p.m.—Society of Christian Ethics.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—Vesper Service of the C. L. S. C.
-
-     7:30 p.m.—Evening Song, conducted by W. A. Duncan, Esq.,
-               assisted by the Fisk Jubilee Singers.
-
-
-_Monday, July 13._
-
-    8:00 a.m.—Adjustment of Classes, and Beginning of C. T. R.
-              and C. S. L. Work.
-
-    8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. C. H. W. Stocking. Subject: “Venice,
-              the Faded Queen of the Adriatic.”
-
-
-_Tuesday, July 14._
-
-    11:00 a.m.—First Organ Recital, Mr. I. V. Flagler.
-
-     1:30 p.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilee Singers.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—First Tourists’ Conference.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. C. H. W. Stocking. Subject: “Florence,
-               the Athens of Italy.”
-
-
-_Wednesday, July 15._
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture: John Alabaster, D.D., “Michel Angelo.”
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilees.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Vesper Service.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. John Alabaster: “Leonardo Da Vinci.”
-
-
-_Thursday, July 16._
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilee Singers.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. John Alabaster: “Naples, Pompeii
-               and Vesuvius.”
-
-     5:00 p.m.—Second Tourists’ Conference.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. C. H. W. Stocking. Subject:
-               “Rome;” first lecture.
-
-
-_Friday, July 17._
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Second Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Lecture: “From Chautauqua to Casamicciola,”
-               by Prof. J. C. Freeman.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—A Popular Lesson in Music, Prof. A. T. Schauffler.
-
-     8:30 p.m.—Lecture, C. H. W. Stocking. Subject: “Rome;”
-               second lecture.
-
-
-_Saturday, July 18._
-
-Excursion to Niagara Falls, at Reduced Rates, for Members of the C. T. R.
-and C. S. L.
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture: “Around Vesuvius,” Prof. J. C. Freeman.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilee Singers.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Readings, Prof. A. Lalande.
-
-
-_Sunday, July 19._
-
-     9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly.
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Sermon by ——
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Sermon by Dr. B. G. Northrop: “The Bible as an
-               Educator.”
-
-     4:00 p.m.—Society of Christian Ethics.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Vesper Service.
-
-     7:30 p.m.—Song Service, Fisk Jubilees.
-
-
-_Monday, July 20._
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Dr. B. G. Northrop: “Memory, and
-               How to Train It.”
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Latin Symposium.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Spelling Match.
-
-
-_Tuesday, July 21._
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Third Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Concert, Meigs Sisters Vocal Quartette, and
-               Chas. F. Underhill, Elocutionist, all of New York.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—Third Tourists’ Conference.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Leon H. Vincent: “A Trip through Italy.”
-
-
-_Wednesday, July 22._
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Dr. G. C. Lorimer, of Chicago: “Philanthropy
-               of Humor.”
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Concert, Meigs Sisters Vocal Quartette, and
-               Chas. F. Underhill.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Vesper Service.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Parlor Soirée.
-
-
-_Thursday, July 23._
-
-    11:00 a.m.—
-
-     2:00 p m.—Fourth Organ Concert, I. V. Flagler.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—Fourth Tourists’ Conference.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. D. H. Wheeler: “Memories of Life
-               in Italy.”
-
-
-_Friday, July 24._
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Miss Kate Field: “The Mormon Creed.”
-
-     2:00 p.m.—The Rev. Dr. H. C. McCook, Lecture: “The
-               Homes and Habits of Ants.”
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Lecture on “The Oil Regions.”
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Pronouncing Match.
-
-
-_Saturday, July 25._
-
-Excursion to Oil City, Pa.
-
-     9:00 a.m.—Conference on “Visible Speech” and “Phonetics,”
-               Dr. J. W. Dickinson.
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Miss Kate Field: “Political and Social
-               Crimes of Utah.”
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Concert, Mr. A. T. Schauffler, of New York, conductor.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—
-
-
-_Sunday, July 26._
-
-     9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly.
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Sermon by the Rev. Dr. George Dana Boardman,
-               of Philadelphia.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Sermon by the Rev. Dr. H. C. McCook, of Philadelphia.
-
-     4:00 p.m.—Society of Christian Ethics.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Vesper Service.
-
-     7:30 p.m.—Sermon by the Rev. George W. Miller, D.D., of
-               Philadelphia.
-
-
-_Monday, July 27._
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Geo. W. Miller, D.D.: “Martin Luther.”
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. G. D. Boardman: “The Graphic Art.”
-
-     3:30 p.m.—Public Exposition Chautauqua School of Modern
-               Languages and Methods.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. J. T. Edwards: “The Telephone and
-               Edison’s Inventions.”
-
-
-_Tuesday, July 28._
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Fifth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Public Readings, Prof. R. L. Cumnock.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—Public Chautauqua Teachers’ Retreat Question Drawer.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilees.
-
-
-_Wednesday, July 29._
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Dr. George Sexton, of England.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Lecture, the Rev. Robert Nourse: “Blighted Women.”
-
-     5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Vesper Service.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—First Lecture on “Khartoum and the Soudan,” by
-               the Rev. Dr. Henry M. Ladd, with Stereopticon.
-
-
-_Thursday, July 30._
-
-    10:00 a.m.—Sixth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler.
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Sermon by Dr. J. M. King: “The Dignity of
-               Small Duties.”
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Concert—Fisk Jubilees.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Second Lecture on “Khartoum and the Soudan,”
-               by Dr. H. M. Ladd, with Stereopticon.
-
-
-_Friday, July 31._
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Concert, A. T. Schauffler, conductor.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Sermon by Dr. J. M. King: “Paris, and a Chapter
-               on Cæsarism.”
-
-     4:00 p.m.—Closing Exercises C. T. R.
-
-     4:00 p.m.—C. Y. F. R. U. Round-Table.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Philip Phillips: “Around the World,”
-               with Stereopticon.
-
-
-_Saturday, August 1._
-
-“Mid-Season Celebration.” Excursion to Panama Rocks.
-
-     9:00 a.m.—First Woman’s Missionary Conference: 1. “Best
-               means of creating an interest in missions.” 2. “How
-               can we increase the zeal and efficiency of present
-               methods of work?”
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture: “Wm. Carey,” by the Rev. J. W. A.
-               Stewart, of Hamilton, Ont.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilees.
-
-     4:00 p.m.—First General Missionary Conference: “How can
-               the work for Missions, being done in every church by
-               a minority of its members, be presented for the
-               consideration of the church _en masse_?”
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Philip Phillips: “Around the World.”
-
-
-_Sunday, August 2._
-
-     9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly.
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Sermon by the Rev. J. W. A. Stewart.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Second General Missionary Conference: Addresses
-               by Dr. George Sexton, the Rev. C. C. Creegan, and Dr.
-               William Butler. Topic: “The Ability and Responsibility
-               of the Church to Evangelize the World.”
-
-     4:00 p.m.—Second Woman’s Missionary Conference: Mrs.
-               D. R. James, of Washington, D. C.: “The Future of
-               Our Country.”
-               Society of Christian Ethics.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Vesper Service.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Service of Song, Philip Phillips.
-
-
-_Monday, August 3._
-
-     9:30 a.m.—Third Woman’s Missionary Conference: “The
-               Immediate and Pressing Necessity for Home Mission
-               Work.”
-
-    11:00 a.m.—General Missionary Meeting: Address by the Rev.
-               Dr. Wm. F. Johnson, of Allahabad, India.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Songs of the South, Fisk Jubilees.
-
-     4:00 p.m.—Third General Missionary Conference: “The
-               Present and Pressing Emergency for Increased Activity
-               in Home Missionary Work, how can we meet it?”
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Missionary Prayer Service.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Anniversary “Chautauqua Missionary Institute:”
-               Addresses by the Rev. William Kincaid and Dr.
-               William Butler.
-
-
-_Tuesday, August 4._
-
-“OPENING DAY.”
-
-     9:00 a.m.—Fourth Woman’s Missionary Conference: 1. “The
-               Importance of Missionary Training, especially
-               for the young.” 2. “The Relation of Missionary
-               Literature to successful Missionary Work.”
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Mr. H. K. Carroll, editor New York
-               _Independent_: “A Lost Doctrine.”
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. George Sexton.
-
-     4:00 p.m.—Fourth General Missionary Conference: 1. “Active
-               Service,” Dr. William Butler. 2. “Systematic
-               Giving,” the Rev. C. C. Creegan.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Chautauqua Bells.
-
-     7:30 p.m.—Chautauqua Vesper Service.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Chautauqua Reunion: Addresses; Music by Fisk
-               Jubilees, Miss Dora Henninges, Mr. Hutchins, of
-               Chicago, cornetist, etc.
-
-     9:30 p.m.—Fireworks.
-
-
-_Wednesday, August 5._
-
-     8:00 a.m.—Early Lecture, Dr. George Sexton.
-               Bible Reading, Dr. John Williamson.
-               Normal Class, Dr. J. L. Hurlbut, the Rev. R. S. Holmes.
-               Children’s Class, the Rev. B. T. Vincent.
-
-     9:00 a.m.—Devotional Hour, Dr. B. N. Adams.
-               Intermediate Class, the Rev. B. T. Vincent.
-
-    10:00 a.m.—Primary Teachers’ Class, Mrs. B. T. Vincent.
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Colonel Homer B. Sprague, of Boston:
-               “Shakspere’s Youth.”
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Lecture, H. K. Carroll, Editor N.Y. _Independent_,
-               “Journalism.”
-
-     4:00 p.m.—First W. C. T. U. Conference.
-               C. Y. F. R. U. Round-Table.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Denominational Prayer Meetings.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Lecture (illustrated), Miss Von Finkelstein and
-               Brother: “The Bedouins of Arabia.”
-
-
-_Thursday, August 6._
-
-     8:00 a.m.—Early Lecture, Dr. George Sexton.
-
-    10:00 a.m.—Eighth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler.
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Colonel Homer B. Sprague: “Shakspere
-               as an Author.”
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Concert, Henninges-Hutchins.
-
-     4:00 p.m.—Second W. C. T. U. Conference.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—S. S. Normal Question Drawer—Dr. J. H. Vincents.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Miss L. M. Von Finkelstein and Brother:
-               “The Fellaheen of Palestine.”
-
-
-_Friday, August 7._
-
-“LOOK-UP LEGION DAY.”
-
-     8:00 a.m.—Early Lecture, Dr. George Sexton.
-
-    10:00 a.m.—First Session “American Church-School of Church-Work.”
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Colonel Homer B. Sprague: “Milton
-               as an Educator.”
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Miss Frances E. Willard: “Evolution
-               in the Temperance Reform.”
-
-     4:00 p.m.—Third W. C. T. U. Conference.
-               “Look-Up Legion Anniversary.”
-
-     8.00 p.m.—Lecture, Miss L. M. Von Finkelstein and Brother:
-               “City Life in Jerusalem.”
-
-
-_Saturday, August 8._
-
-“C. L. S. C. INAUGURATION DAY.”
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Colonel Homer B. Sprague: “Milton’s
-               Paradise Lost.”
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Concert, Prof. C. C. Case, conductor.
-
-     4:00 p.m.—Fourth W. C. T. U. Conference.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—“C. L. S. C. Inauguration Day.” Address, the Rev.
-               R. S. Holmes.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Sunday-School Teachers’ Meeting.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. George Sexton.
-
-
-_Sunday, August 9._
-
-     9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly.
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Sermon, Bishop R. S. Foster.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—“Memorial Service:” Bishop I. W. Wiley, Mrs.
-               Victor Cornuelle, the Rev. Joseph Leslie, Hon.
-               Schuyler Colfax.
-
-     4:00 p.m.—Society of Christian Ethics. Lecture, Dr. George
-               Sexton.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Vesper Service.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Sermon, J. A. Worden, D.D.
-
-
-_Monday, August 10._
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture: “The Story of Two Brothers,” the Rev.
-               H. M. Bacon.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Bishop R. S. Foster: “India and its
-               People.”
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Normal Council.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Lecture, the Rev. S. R. Frazier: “A Yankee in
-               Japan.”
-
-
-_Tuesday, August 11._
-
-    10:00 a.m.—Ninth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler.
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Mrs. Mary A. Livermore: “Wendell
-               Phillips.”
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Concert, Schubert Quartette.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—A Question Drawer, Dr. J. M. Buckley.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Lecture, W. M. R. French: “The Wit and Wisdom
-               of the Crayon.”
-
-     9:30 p.m.—Music on the Lake.
-
-
-_Wednesday, August 12._
-
-“DENOMINATIONAL DAY.”
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Dr. J. M. Buckley: “The Peculiarities of
-               Great Orators.”
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Denominational Sunday-school Congresses.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Denominational Prayer Meetings.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Mr. W. M. R. French: “A Knack of
-               Drawing.”
-
-
-_Thursday, August 13._
-
-“ALUMNI DAY.”
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Mrs. Mary A. Livermore: “A Dream of
-               To-morrow.”
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Dedication of Normal Hall: Addresses by B. F.
-               Jacobs, Esq., the Rev. A. E. Dunning, and Dr. J.
-               L. Hurlbut.
-
-     4:00 p.m.—Conference, Chautauqua Alumni.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Alumni Reunion, Annual Address: Dr. J. M.
-               Freeman, of New York.
-
-     9:00 p.m.—Illuminated Fleet.
-
-
-_Friday, August 14._
-
-“INTERNATIONAL SUNDAY-SCHOOL DAY.”
-
-    10:00 a.m.—Tenth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler.
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Concert by the Choir of the Lafayette Street
-               Presbyterian Church, Buffalo, N. Y.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—International Sunday-school Meeting, B. F. Jacobs,
-               Esq., presiding.
-
-     4:00 p.m.—C. Y. F. R. U. Round-Table.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—Conference, “Chautauqua Baptist Circle.”
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Concert, Prof. C. C. Case, conductor.
-
-
-_Saturday, August 15._
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Anniversary “Chautauqua Baptist Circle,” B. F.
-               Jacobs, Esq., presiding. Address of Salutation by
-               Dr. J. H. Vincent.
-               Oration: The Rev. Dr. O. P. Gifford.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Mr. W. M. R. French: “A Chalk Talk.”
-
-     3:00 p.m.—Concert, “Schubert Quartette.”
-
-     5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table: “St. Paul’s Day.”
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting.
-               Lecture: “Sunday-schools in New England,” W. F.
-               Sherwin.
-
-
-_Sunday, August 16._
-
-     9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly.
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Baccalaureate Sermon, Dr. J. H. Vincent.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Sermon, Dr. Charles F. Deems, of the “Church
-               of the Strangers,” New York City.
-
-     4:00 p.m.—Society of Christian Ethics.
-               Y. M. C. A. Conference, B. F. Jacobs, Esq.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Vesper Service.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Even-Song.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Address, B. F. Jacobs, Esq.
-
-
-_Monday, August 17._
-
-     8:00 a.m.—Early Lecture, Edward Everett Hale: “Parish
-               Work in Cities.”
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Dr. Charles F. Deems: “A Scotch Verdict.”
-
-     2:00 p.m.—
-
-     4:00 p.m.—Public Exposition Chautauqua School of Modern
-               Languages, Methods.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—“Look-up-Legion” Reception to the Rev. Edward
-               Everett Hale.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. A. I. Hobbs, of Louisville, Ky.:
-               “Poverty Amidst Plenty.”
-
-
-_Tuesday, August 18._
-
-     8:00 a.m.—Early Lecture, Edward Everett Hale: “Parish
-               Work in Cities.”
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Opening “Chautauqua Society of Fine Arts.”
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. O. P. Fitzgerald, of Nashville, Tenn.
-
-     4:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Class Reunions.
-               Meeting C. L. S. C. Counselors.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Concert, Prof. W. F. Sherwin, conductor.
-
-     9:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Camp-Fire.
-
-
-_Wednesday, August 19._
-
-“C. L. S. C. RECOGNITION DAY.”
-
-     9:00 a.m.—Guards of “Gate” and “Grove;” Misses with
-               Floral Offerings; “Society of S. H. G.;” Glee Club
-               and Choir; Members of ’85.
-
-    10:00 a.m.—Chautauqua Procession; Passage of the “Arches.”
-
-    10:30 a.m.—“Recognition” in the Hall.
-
-    11:00 a.m.—“Public Recognition” and Commencement Oration,
-               Counselor Edward Everett Hale.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Addresses, Counselor Lyman Abbott and others.
-               Presentation of Diplomas.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Prayer Meetings.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Athenian Watch-Fires and “Reception.”
-
-
-_Thursday, August 20._
-
-“NATIONAL TEMPERANCE SOCIETY DAY.”
-
-     8:00 a.m.—Lecture, Edward Everett Hale: “Parish Work in Cities.”
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Temperance Address, Hon. George W. Bain, of Kentucky.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Temperance Address, Mrs. J. Ellen Foster, of Iowa.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Temperance Address, Prof. J. C. Price, President
-               of Zion Wesley Institute, North Carolina.
-
-     9:00 p.m.—Lecture, W. I. Marshall—“An Evening in Wonderland,
-               or the Yellowstone,” with Stereopticon Illustrations.
-
-
-_Friday, August 21._
-
-“ROMAN DAY.”
-
-     8:00 a.m.—A Conference on the Study of Latin—Prof. Edgar
-               S. Shumway.
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Francis Murphy.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Readings, Prof. R. L. Cumnock.
-
-     4:00 p.m.—Closing Exercises C. S. L.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Normal Sunday-school Council, Prof. W. F. Sherwin.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—Lecture, W. I. Marshall: “Sierra’s Enchanted
-               Valley, or the Yosemite Valley and the Big Trees.”
-
-     9:30 p.m.—Songs by the Schubert Quartette.
-
-
-_Saturday, August 22._
-
-“HARVEST AND C. T. C. C. DAY.”
-
-    10:00 a.m.—Harvest Service, the Rev. R. S. Holmes, conductor.
-
-    11:00 a.m.—First Rally C. T. C. C. Addresses by Mr. Charles
-               Barnard, of New York, Major Henry E. Alvord, of
-               “Houghton Farm,” and Dr. J. H. Vincent.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Grand Army of the Republic Reunion.
-
-     3:30 p.m.—Concert, Prof. W. F. Sherwin.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—Meeting “Chautauqua Society of Fine Arts.”
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting.
-
-     8:00 p.m.—W. I. Marshall: “Utah and the Mormon Question.”
-
-     9:30 p.m.—Illuminated Cottages.
-
-
-_Sunday, August 23._
-
-     9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly.
-
-    11:00 a.m.—Sermon, Bishop Cyrus D. Foss, D.D., LL.D., of
-               Minnesota.
-
-     2:00 p.m.—Sermon, the Rev. R. B. Welch, D.D., LL.D., of
-               Auburn Theological Seminary.
-
-     4:00 p.m.—Society of Christian Ethics.
-
-     5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Vesper Service.
-
-     7:00 p.m.—Sermon, Dr. B. M. Adams.
-
-     9:00 p.m.—“Vigil,” Class of 1886.
-
-
-_Monday, August 24._
-
-    8:00 a.m.—“The Farewell.”
-
-
-
-
-SPECIAL NOTES.
-
-
-Readers of THE CHAUTAUQUAN, particularly if they do not expect to visit
-Chautauqua this summer, will find a very useful and interesting paper
-in the _Assembly Daily Herald_. The _Herald_ is the daily chronicler of
-the proceedings at Chautauqua during the session of the Assembly. Its
-most important work is to furnish to its readers stenographic reports of
-all the leading lectures delivered on the platform. More than seventy
-lectures appear in its columns during the nineteen daily issues of the
-_Herald_. Among the lectures of the present season are to be several on
-Italy. The Tourists Ideal Foreign Tour will be mainly located in Italy.
-Now, for those who expect to read the C. L. S. C. course of 1885-86
-this will be particularly interesting and profitable, as a portion of
-the course is to be on Italy and its life. A feature to which we would
-particularly call the attention of readers of the C. L. S. C. is the
-reports of special meetings and special classes, together with the daily
-reports of C. L. S. C. news. Much of the best of the C. L. S. C. work and
-planning is done at the Assembly, so that no one thoroughly interested in
-the C. L. S. C. can keep abreast of the news of this institution without
-the _Herald_. The first issue of Volume X. of the _Assembly Herald_ will
-be on August 1st, and it will appear daily, Sundays excepted, in nineteen
-numbers. Its price is $1.00 for the season, or in clubs of five or more,
-90 cents. Subscribers to THE CHAUTAUQUAN will find it to their advantage
-to accept our combination offer until August 1st of THE CHAUTAUQUAN and
-_Assembly Daily Herald_ for $2.25.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-Through the help of the C. L. S. C. Loan Library, a number of students
-who would otherwise have been obliged to give up their C. L. S. C.
-studies entirely, have been enabled to continue the course during the
-past year. These books (about half a dozen sets) will be for sale at
-reduced rates, at the Plainfield office after July 1st.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-Another Chautauqua Idea of great practical importance is out. It has been
-devised to meet the demand for competent training in phonography. Within
-the last ten years shorthand writers of ability have become necessary to
-business offices, courts and editorial rooms. For those young men and
-women who would fit themselves for the numerous positions open to expert
-phonographers, the “Chautauqua University” has opened a “College of
-Phonography.” It is under the direction of W. D. Bridge, A.M., a reporter
-of nearly thirty years’ experience, who has associated with him F. G.
-Morris, A.M., one of the most successful and accomplished phonographic
-teachers in the country. For circulars of the College of Phonography,
-address the registrar, R. S. Holmes, A.M., Plainfield, New Jersey.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-We are in receipt of the finely illustrated catalogues of the church
-furnishers, Messrs. J. & R. Lamb, of New York City. The designs which
-they are offering in Metal Work, Stained Glass, Church Upholstery and
-Church Embroideries are all of them beautiful, many of them unique and
-original. Churches that are contemplating refurnishing, or are building,
-can not do better than to send for the Messrs. Lamb’s catalogue. They
-will get good ideas, if nothing else.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-The Chautauquans of Minnesota and the Northwest propose to hold this
-summer a Chautauqua Assembly of the Northwest. The first step in
-furtherance of this plan has been taken by the circles of St. Paul and
-Minneapolis, best situated as they are for united action, and strong in
-the presence of sixteen circles. On the 15th day of May, an association
-was formed by representatives from ten of the sixteen circles, to be
-known as the Central Chautauqua Committee.
-
-The first Assembly will be held at the “Enchanted Island,” a beautiful
-place in Lake Minnetonka, Hennepin County, Minn., on June 26th. Reduced
-rates have been obtained on all railroads leading into Minneapolis and
-St. Paul. Circulars containing programs and full particulars will be sent
-to all applicants. Let all Chautauquans of the Northwest be present at
-the “Enchanted Island.” Address E. T. Brandeburg, Secretary, Room 14,
-Webb Block, Minneapolis, Minn.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-Reports from the following local circles have been received at this
-office too late for the July issue of THE CHAUTAUQUAN: Osceola, Iowa;
-“Thornapple,” Vermontville, Michigan; “Beta,” Milwaukee, Wis.; “Aryan,”
-Hope Valley, R. I.; “Vincent,” Needham, Mass.; Jewett City, Conn.;
-“Springhill,” Morris Cross Roads, Pa.; “King Philip,” Medfield, Mass.;
-West Winsted, Conn.; Prattsburgh, N. Y.; “The Athenian,” Lanark, Ill.;
-“Longfellow,” Cambridge, Mass.; “Pansy Quartette,” Oshtemo, Mich.;
-Brantford, Ontario, Canada. Reports from local circles in the following
-towns have been forwarded to THE CHAUTAUQUAN from Plainfield, but too
-late for the July issue: Hope, R. I.; Luverne, Minn.; Rushville, Ill.;
-Wellington, South Africa; Monroe, Iowa; Jonesville, Mich.; Jacksonville,
-Ill.; Billerica, Mass.; Charlestown, Mass.; Wabash, Ind.; Amherst, N.
-H.; Brookville, Ind.; Madison, Conn.; Minneapolis, Minn., from “Highland
-Park,” “Alden” and “Vincent” circles.
-
-       *       *       *       *       *
-
-Transcriber’s Notes:
-
-Obvious punctuation errors repaired.
-
-Page 566, “differents” changed to “different” (These facts from different
-states)
-
-Page 572, “Onalashka” changed to “Unalashka” (the island of Kagamil, near
-Unalashka)
-
-Page 576, “Helena” changed to “Helens” (an outburst of Mt. St. Helens)
-
-Page 581, duplicate word “by” removed (mercury may be frozen by this
-means)
-
-Page 584, “in honor of the god of the gods of the under world” _may_ be a
-misprint for “in honor of the god of the under world” or “in honor of the
-gods of the under world”, but has been left as printed: it’s not obvious
-which alternative might be correct, or indeed whether it’s an error at
-all.
-
-Page 594, “Shakespere” changed to “Shakspere” (souvenir of the Shakspere
-evening)
-
-Page 599, “eighteen” changed to “nineteen” (There are in NEBRASKA
-nineteen circles of the C. L. S. C.)
-
-Page 605, “Monoan” changed to “Monona” (Assembly at Monona Lake, Madison,
-Wisconsin)
-
-Page 609, “Gautemala” changed to “Guatemala” (the stars and stripes trot
-along after Guatemala)
-
-
-
-
-
-End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Chautauquan, Vol. 05, July 1885,
-No. 10, by The Chautauquan Literary and Scientific Circle
-
-*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CHAUTAUQUAN, JULY 1885 ***
-
-***** This file should be named 55444-0.txt or 55444-0.zip *****
-This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
-        http://www.gutenberg.org/5/5/4/4/55444/
-
-Produced by Emmy, Juliet Sutherland and the Online
-Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
-
-Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
-be renamed.
-
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
-States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive
-specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this
-eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook
-for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports,
-performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given
-away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks
-not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the
-trademark license, especially commercial redistribution.
-
-START: FULL LICENSE
-
-THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
-PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
-
-To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
-person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
-1.E.8.
-
-1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the
-Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country outside the United States.
-
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work
-on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the
-phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-
-  This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
-  most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
-  restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
-  under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
-  eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
-  United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you
-  are located before using this ebook.
-
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
-
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm License.
-
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format
-other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain
-Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-provided that
-
-* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
-  the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
-  you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
-  to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has
-  agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
-  Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
-  within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
-  legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
-  payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
-  Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
-  Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
-  Literary Archive Foundation."
-
-* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
-  you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
-  does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
-  License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
-  copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
-  all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm
-  works.
-
-* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
-  any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
-  electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
-  receipt of the work.
-
-* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
-  distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
-
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The
-Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
-
-1.F.
-
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
-of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
-www.gutenberg.org
-
-
-
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
-
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
-
-The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the
-mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its
-volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous
-locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt
-Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to
-date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and
-official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-
-For additional contact information:
-
-    Dr. Gregory B. Newby
-    Chief Executive and Director
-    gbnewby@pglaf.org
-
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
-Literary Archive Foundation
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
-spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
-state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-
-Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works.
-
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-
-Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search
-facility: www.gutenberg.org
-
-This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
-